eng-GB20036078B H

OPERATOR'S MANUAL
G930/G940/G946/G960/G970/G976/G990
Ser. No.
G930 SHP 526003-, PED 502838-, G940 PED 503597-
G946 PED 504115-, G960 PED 505155-
G970 SHP 530031-, PED 506053-
G976 SHP 531020-, PED 507053-
G990 SHP 532006-, PED 508110-
Original Instructions
G930/G940/G946/G960/G970/G976/G990
Foreword OPERATOR'S MANUAL

This operator's manual is intended as a guide for the correct use and
maintenance of the machine. Read this manual carefully before you start
and move the machine or before you carry out any preventive
maintenance.
Keep this manual in the lockable storage compartment so that it is always
available for easy reference. Replace it immediately if it is lost.
The operator's manual describes the applications for which the machine Table of contents
was primarily designed. It has been written to be valid on all markets.
Therefore, please ignore any sections which do not relate to your machine
or to the work that you do with your machine.
NOTE! Presentation
If the manual covers more than one machine, the information relates to all
machines unless otherwise specified.
When designing this machine, much time has been invested in achieving
the best possible efficiency and safety. But accidents do happen, and most Instrument panels
of them can be attributed to human error. A safety-conscious person and
a well-maintained machine make up a reliable, powerful, and profitable
combination. Therefore, read the safety instructions and follow them.
We constantly strive to develop and improve the efficiency of our products
by making changes to their design. We reserve the right to make design Other controls
modifications to the products even after they have been delivered. Also,
we reserve the right to change data and equipment, as well as the service
and maintenance instructions, without prior notice.
Operating instructions
Operating techniques
Safety when servicing
Service and maintenance
Specifications
Alphabetical index
Ref. No. 20036078-B

The original language is English. Original instructions.
2013.05
Copyright © 2013, Volvo Construction Equipment. All rights reserved.
Foreword
2
Safety regulations
The machine operator is responsible for being aware of and complying
with the relevant, legally prescribed, national and regional safety
instructions. The safety instructions in this operator's manual are
applicable only in cases where no legislated safety instructions are in
force.
DANGER
The safety symbol combined with this signal word indicates a hazardous
situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. Danger
is limited to the most extreme situations.
WARNING
situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
CAUTION
situation which, if not avoided, could result in moderate or minor injury.
NOTICE
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which may result in machine
damage.
NOTE!
Used in order to refer to installation, operating, or maintenance information
which is important but not danger-related.
Get to know the capacity and limits of your machine!
Foreword
Identification numbers 3
Identification numbers
Enter the product identification number (PIN) of machine, manufacturer
code and engine serial number. These numbers must be specified when
contacting the manufacturer to order spare parts. For positions and
explanation of the PIN plate, see page 22.
Manufacturer Volvo Construction Equipment

312 Volvo Way
Shippensburg, Pennsylvania 17257 USA
PIN of machine
Manufacturer code
Engine serial number
Please send comments about the Operator’s Manual to om@volvo.com

Table of contents
5
Table of contents
Foreword ................................................................. 1
Identification numbers ......................................................... 3
Presentation ............................................................ 7
Machine view ..................................................................... 17
CE-marking, EMC-directive ............................................... 19
Communication equipment, installation ............................. 21
Product plates ................................................................... 22
Information and warning decals ........................................ 24
USA federal clean air act ................................................... 30
Instrument panels .................................................. 33
Instrument panel, centre .................................................... 34
Display unit ........................................................................ 40
Instrument panel, pedestal ................................................ 65
Instrument panel, side ....................................................... 73
Instrument panel, rear ....................................................... 79
Other controls ........................................................ 82
Controls ............................................................................. 82
Operator comfort ............................................................. 103
Climate control system .................................................... 118
Operating instructions .......................................... 121
Safety rules when operating ............................................ 122
Measures before operating ............................................. 137
Starting engine ................................................................ 138
Gear shifting .................................................................... 141
Differential locks .............................................................. 163
Steering ........................................................................... 164
Braking ............................................................................ 168
Stopping .......................................................................... 171
Parking ............................................................................ 172
Retrieving and towing ...................................................... 174
Transporting machine ...................................................... 177
Operating techniques .......................................... 180
Whole-body vibrations ..................................................... 201
Working within dangerous areas ..................................... 202
Attachments .................................................................... 207
Attachments, connecting and disconnecting ................... 208
Attachments, installing .................................................... 209
Dozer blade ..................................................................... 224
Scarifier ........................................................................... 225
Ripper .............................................................................. 228
Signalling diagram ........................................................... 230
Safety when servicing .......................................... 232
Service position ............................................................... 232
Before service, read ........................................................ 233
Fire prevention ................................................................ 237
Handling hazardous materials ......................................... 241
Table of contents
6
Service and maintenance .................................... 244
General inspection of machine ........................................ 248
Service points .................................................................. 249
Engine ............................................................................. 251
Fuel system ..................................................................... 256
Turbocharger ................................................................... 260
Engine air cleaner ........................................................... 261
Cooling system ................................................................ 263
Electrical system ............................................................. 268
Transmission ................................................................... 274
Axles ................................................................................ 276
Tandems ......................................................................... 277
Brake system ................................................................... 278
Wheels ............................................................................ 282
Cab .................................................................................. 284
Windscreen wiper system ............................................... 286
Air conditioning ................................................................ 287
Hydraulic system ............................................................. 289
Attachments, maintenance .............................................. 292
Greasing .......................................................................... 301
Lubrication and service chart .......................................... 302
Specifications ...................................................... 307
Recommended lubricants ................................................ 307
Fuel system ..................................................................... 314
Service capacities and change intervals ......................... 315
Engine ............................................................................. 317
Electrical system ............................................................. 319
Transmission ................................................................... 324
Brake ............................................................................... 325
Steering ........................................................................... 326
Wheels ............................................................................ 327
Cab .................................................................................. 328
Hydraulic system ............................................................. 330
Machine weights .............................................................. 331
Dimensions ...................................................................... 332
Service history ................................................................. 333
Alphabetical index ............................................... 337
Presentation
7
Presentation
Intended use
The machine (motor grader) is intended to be used only for the
grading of gravel and soil, and for the removal of snow. Use of
the machine for any other purpose, such as for towing other
vehicles or equipment, is contrary to its designated use. The
manufacturer and local authorised dealer or distributor cannot be
held responsible for any damage resulting from such use.
The machine is not for use in other applications or in potentially
hazardous environments. Contact the manufacturer's local
authorised dealer or distributor for further information.
The risk of misuse lies entirely with the user.
Environmental requirements
Be aware of the environment when operating and during service
and maintenance of the machine. Always follow local and national
environmental legislation applicable to all handling of the
machine.
Machine
The complete structural design of G900 Motor Graders is
balanced to focus their weight and power for optimum blade down
force and drawbar pull values.
Twin-gear direct-drive circle turn system provides maximum
strength to either hold or to turn the moldboard smoothly while
moving under full load; wide-stance blade lift cylinders provide
stability for fine grade control.
Volvo D7 and D9 Tier 3/Stage IIIA engines; high torque at low
RPM ensures excellent performance and fuel savings.
Advanced HTE840 and optional HTE1160 transmissions
available with Manual or optional Autoshift modes to optimize
performance and fuel economy.
Standard shuttle shift feature enables shifting between
selected forward and reverse gears in single smooth motion.
Purpose-built front axle with high center ground clearance
consists of a reduced number of components which ensures
long life with minimum maintenance.
All wheel drive or Volvo exclusive creep mode for the industry’s
best fine grading control.
Presentation
8
Robotic welding builds in consistent frame strength and
durability, while the full-perimeter rear frame protects the
powertrain from attachment-related load stresses.
Easy lift rear hood opens wide for easy cleaning access to the
radiator.
Cover panels for the engine, hydraulic centre and battery pack
all open up fully and quickly to provide unmatched access for
ease of service.
Volvo APR70 and APR90 rear axles with planetary reduction
final drives reduce loading on tandem chains for maximum
service life.
Purpose built differential with hydraulic clutch lockup ensures
maximum tractive effort at the flip of a switch.
Frame
The frame articulates 23° (models G930 to G960) or 21° (models
G970 to G990) to the left or to the right and uses lock valves to
ensure stable operation.
Engine
G930, G940, G946, G960
G930 Volvo D7EGCE3, G940 Volvo D7EGBE3, G946 and G960
Volvo D7EGAE3.
A 7.2 litre (439 in³) six cylinder, four-stroke, direct-injection, low
emission engine which is turbocharged with charge air cooling of
the air to air type. Common rail fuel system and internal exhaust
gas recirculation (IEGR) are controlled by the engine electronic
control unit (E-ECU) software. The engine has wet, replaceable
cylinder liners and two valves per cylinder with replaceable valve
guides and valve seat inserts. The accelerator position is
transferred electrically from the accelerator pedal to the engine
electronic control unit (E-ECU). All models have variable
horsepower (VHP).
G970, G976, G990
G970 Volvo D9BGAE3, G976 and G990 Volvo D9BGBE3.
A 9.4 litre (574 in³) six cylinder, four-stroke, direct-injection, low
emission engine which is turbocharged with charge air cooling of
the air to air type. Overhead camshaft and unit injectors and
internal exhaust gas recirculation (IEGR) are controlled by the
engine electronic control unit (E-ECU) software. The engine has
wet, replaceable cylinder liners and two valves per cylinder with
replaceable valve guides and valve seat inserts. The accelerator
position is transferred electrically from the accelerator pedal to the
engine electronic control unit (E-ECU). All models have variable
horsepower (VHP).
VHP (Variable Horsepower)

All Volvo grader models have engines that provide three different
power levels depending on the gear selected by the operator.
Transmission gear
VHP engine power range
HTE840 HTE1160
Low F1, F2, R1 F1, F2, F3, R1, R2
Mid F3, F4, F5, R2, R3 F4, F5, F6, F7, R3, R4
High F6, F7, F8, R4 F8, F9, F10, F11, R5, R6
Presentation
9
Instruments and controls, overview
An ergonomic design includes low-effort operating controls in
front of the operator. The complete pedestal assembly slides
and tilts to adjust easily to any operator’s preference. Highly
responsive, industry-standard controls are precise and
predictable.
The Volvo proportional demand flow (PDF) hydraulic system,
balances flow between all grading functions for consistent and
predictable implement control. The PDF hydraulic system is
ideally suited for all leading automatic blade control systems.
An electronic display provides detailed system status to the
operator in real time: records up to 25 points of interest for
service analysis through the exclusive Matris system from
Volvo.
Operator's station
A rollover protective structure/falling objects protective structure
(ROPS/FOPS) enclosed operator compartment lives up to every
expectation for a Volvo cab with industry-leading comfort, safety
and efficiency. The cab is equipped with an excellent HVAC
system, AM/FM CD, deluxe suspension seat with tilt steering
wheel and unobstructed wide angle views for reduced operator
fatigue, high productivity and maximum safety.
The G900 cab builds on the Volvo tradition of productive work
environments for operators. Interior lighting, illumination on the
steps and handholds ensure maximum ease and safety as you
enter or exit.
Expansive windows, a sloped rear wall and the cowling design
provide exceptional visibility to all areas of the grader, while a
unique package of six optimally placed interior and exterior
mirrors allow a commanding view to the rear and sides.
Fresh, clean double-filtered air is ducted in throughout the cab,
with vents built into the rear posts for improved circulation. Side
and front windows also open for passive ventilation.
Quiet Volvo engines combined with a sound suppression
package provide lowest interior sound levels.
Additional features include built-in coat hooks, smart storage
areas, convenient mounting brackets for communications gear
and an optional air-suspension seat for the best in operating
comfort.
Electrical system
The battery disconnect switch is connected to the negative (-)
cable of the batteries. When the switch is turned to the OFF
position, electrical power is disconnected from the machine. The
battery disconnect switch should be turned off whenever the
machine is not in use.
The electrical system is a 24 volt, negative ground system. Battery
charging is accomplished using a standard 80 amp alternator or
an optional alternator with increased charging ability.
The machine has three electronic control units (ECUs). The
instrumentation electronic control unit (I-ECU) is integrated with
the display unit, warning lamps and instruments, and provides the
operator with information. The vehicle electronic control unit (V-
ECU) receives signals from sensors on the machine and these
are passed on to the I-ECU and E-ECU. The V-ECU is placed in
the electrical distribution box on the back wall of the cab. The E-
ECU controls the engine. For D7 engines, the E-ECU is installed
Presentation
10
in the cooling module. For D9 engines, the E-ECU is installed on
the engine.
Joystick ECU, description

Valid for option / configuration
Option Configuration
Steering Dual joystick
The joystick steering major components consist of two joysticks,

a display, a master controller, multiple slave controllers, and a
steering valve. The joysticks are mounted on the seat armrests to
provide comfortable, ergonomic operation and replace the shift
lever used in conventional steering. The steering wheel is still
included and will take control if used by the operator. Besides
steering, some of the major functions controlled include gear
shifting, mouldboard tilt, mouldboard shift circle turning,
articulation, wheel lean, and auxiliary hydraulics.
Transmission
All machine models are equipped with the standard HTE840
powershift transmission, which has 8 forward speeds and 4
reverse speeds. All machine models can be equipped with the
optional HTE1160 powershift transmission, which has 11 forward
speeds and 6 reverse speeds. Both transmissions are direct
drive, fully sequential units using a countershaft design.
Brake system
Hydraulically actuated oil disc service brakes are located at the
four tandem drive wheels. The crossover dual braking circuits
provide even braking on both sides of the machine. During normal
operation, a brake charge system maintains pressure in a bank
of accumulators. If the engine stalls or hydraulic pump failure
occurs, hydraulic pressure stored in the accumulators supplies
the power required to bring the machine to a safe stop.
Parking brake
The parking brake is a spring applied, hydraulically released, wet
multiple disc brake. The brake assembly is installed inside the
rear axle housing. In the event of transmission system pressure
loss, an accumulator in the circuit stores system pressure and
allows the parking brake to remain released for approximately 20
minutes.
Rear axle and tandem

Models G930, G940, G946 and G960 are equipped with the
APR70A rear axle. Models G970, G976 and G990 are equipped
with the APR90A rear axle. Each has an operator-controlled
differential lock/unlock. Tandem wheels are chain-driven.
Description, All Wheel Drive system

Applies to models: G946, G976
G946 and G976 are all wheel drive (AWD) models. The AWD
system is powered by two electronically controlled, variable
displacement hydraulic pumps in separate closed loop systems.
Each pump supplies one front wheel motor. Front wheel motors
are two-speed, high torque, radial piston, cam lobe type. Each
wheel motor has a separate speed sensor.
Presentation
11
Cab
The cab is approved as a protective structure according to falling
object protective structure (FOPS) and rollover protective
structure (ROPS) standards, see page 11.
If any part of the cab's protective structure is affected by plastic
deformation or cracks, the cab shall be replaced immediately.
Never carry out any unauthorised alterations to the cab, e.g.,
lowering the roof height, drilling, welding on brackets for fire
extinguisher, radio aerial or other equipment, without first, via a
dealer, having discussed the alteration with personnel at Volvo
Construction Equipment. The manufacturer will decide whether
the alteration may void the warranty.
A mounting plate option is available for the mounting of two-way
radios, etc.
Cab's emergency exits

On machines equipped with an enclosed cab, in case of
emergency and a blockage of the normal cab exit occurs, exit the
cab through the window identified with the “Emergency Exit” label,
located at the right side of the cab. Exit through the front or rear
window if blockage occurs at the normal and emergency exits.
FOPS and ROPS
WARNING
Risk of serious injury or death.
Structural damage caused by unauthorised modification, or the
machine rolling over, weakens the rollover protective structure
(ROPS) / falling objects protective structure (FOPS) and can
result in serious injury or death from falling objects or machine
rollover.
Do not repair, modify, drill, weld on or add attachments to the
ROPS/FOPS unless authorised in writing by the manufacturer.
Use only genuine original equipment manufacturer replacement
parts. Do not operate this machine if the ROPS/FOPS is
structurally damaged, shows cracks, is not properly secured as
originally installed, or has been involved in a rollover.
The manufacturer provides rollover protective structure (ROPS),
falling object protective structure (FOPS) and a seat belt as
standard equipment on the machine. The ROPS and FOPS, used
in conjunction with a seat belt, will lessen the possibility of death
or serious injury in the event of a rollover.
Check the seat belt regularly for wear or damage. Inspect belt
hardware and fabric. Replace if hardware is damaged or if strap
is nicked, frayed or if loose stitching is found. Seat belt assemblies
should be replaced every 3 years regardless of appearance. Seat
belt strength degrades over time and use due to exposure to
weather, ultraviolet (UV) radiation and abrasives (dirt). Ensure
mounting hardware is tight.
Hydraulic system
The closed-centre hydraulic system uses a pressure and flow
compensated (load sensing) variable displacement piston pump.
The pump supplies oil to the implements and the steering. The
cooling fan is driven by a hydraulic motor. Fan speed is variable
Presentation
12
and is determined by various cooling requirements. The fan
operates between pre-determined minimum and maximum
speeds. The fan remains at its minimum speed until there is a
demand for cooling. Fan speed will automatically increase with
the demand for cooling. Lock valves are incorporated in the blade
lift, moldboard tilt, circle shift, wheel lean and articulation hydraulic
circuits to prevent cylinder drift. The control levers are short throw,
feathering type and are located on a fully adjustable steering
pedestal.
Equipment
The machine can be equipped with different types of optional
equipment, depending on the requirements of different markets.
Examples of such equipment are lever steering (CDC), Boom
Suspension System (BSS), secondary steering, separate
attachment lock, automatic engine shutdown, and automatic
greasing system (standard on certain markets).
Anti-theft device (optional equipment)
An installed anti-theft device makes it more difficult to steal the
machine. Volvo Construction Equipment can supply an anti-theft
device as optional equipment. If your machine is not equipped
with such a device, look into the possibility of having one installed
by your dealer.
Modifications
Modifications to the machine, including use of unauthorised
accessories and spare parts, may affect the machine's condition
and its ability to function as it was designed. No changes of any
kind may be performed without first obtaining written approval
from Volvo Construction Equipment. Volvo Construction
Equipment reserves the right to refuse all warranty claims that
have resulted due to or can be attributed to unauthorised
modifications.
The person who performs unauthorised modifications assumes
all responsibility for consequences that arise due to the
modification or can be attributed to the modification, including
damage to the machine.
Modifications may be considered to be officially approved, if at
least one of the following conditions has been met:
1 The attachment, the accessory, or the spare part has been
made or distributed by Volvo Construction Equipment and has
been installed according to approved method described in a
publication available from Volvo Construction Equipment; or
2 The modification has been approved in writing by the
Engineering Department at each product company within
Volvo Construction Equipment.
Attachments
The circle, drawbar and moldboard equipment is fully
manoeuvrable using hydraulic cylinders. Blade mobility permits
steep ditch cutting angles and back sloping outside of overall
machine width. The circle is held in place by adjustable clamp
plates and guide shoes. Bearing surfaces are faced with
Duramide™ for maximum service life. Hardened teeth are cut on
the outside of the circle. The moldboard has a replaceable cutting
edge and end bits. The drawbar is a narrow “T” design for
optimum visibility to the work area. Five common attachments
include:
Presentation
13
1 Mid-mounted scarifier
2 Front-mounted scarifier
3 Rear-mounted ripper
4 Front-mounted dozer blade
5 Front-mounted push block
Logged machine data

This machine is equipped with software systems, which records
various information about the machine and this information is
transferred from the machine to Volvo and used by Volvo and its
authorised workshops in the product development process and
for possible malfunction detection.
Questions regarding this information can be directed to your
dealer.
CareTrack
The machine can be equipped with optional CareTrack, a
telematics system developed by Volvo Construction Equipment.
The system collects machine data which can be wirelessly
transferred to a computer. The data shows machine position,
operating hours, fuel consumption, alarms, etc. (may vary by
machine model and/or subscription). CareTrack is available in
different versions, depending on the required information level.
CareTrack makes it easier to plan for service and reduces costly
downtime. Productivity is improved by knowing if machines are
being operated correctly and how much fuel is being consumed.
It also allows the customer to restrict the operating area of the
machine, by using virtual fences. This helps eliminate
unauthorised machine usage and theft. For further information,
contact a Volvo Construction Equipment dealer.
Additional Icons
NOTE!
Some symbols shown in this section may not appear on your
machine.
Machine specific symbols

Symbol Description Symbol Description
Tie-down points Caution
and tow points
International symbols
On/start Seat (lap) belt
Off/stop Linear
Presentation
14
On/Off Rotational
Plus (positive) Volume empty
Minus (negative) Volume half full
Horn Volume full
Battery condition Grease
Hourmeter Oil lubrication point
Lift point Engine oil temperature
Jack or support point Engine coolant
Filling or emptying Engine coolant level
Read Operator's Manual Coolant temperature
Engine oil Engine rotations (rpm)
Engine oil pressure Gas inject (cold start)
Engine oil pressure – failure Engine air filter

Presentation
15
Engine oil level Engine air filter – failure
Engine oil filter Fan belt – failure
Emergency engine stop Reverse direction
Engine start Parking brake
Engine on/run Brake on
Start switch Brake off
Transmission Primer (start aid)
Transmission oil level Hydraulic oil
High gear Hydraulic oil pressure
Low gear Hydraulic oil level
Forward direction Hydraulic oil filter
Hydraulic oil temperature Control lever – multi-direction
Diesel fuel Clockwise rotation

Presentation
16
Fuel level Counterclockwise rotation
Fuel filter Engine electrical preheat
Work light Fast speed
Flashing beacon Slow speed
Control lever – dual direction

Presentation
Machine view 17
Machine view
Directional terms
The terms left and right, when used in this manual, indicate the
sides of the machine as seen from the operator seat facing the
front of the machine.
1 Front
2 Rear
3 Left
4 Right
Presentation
18 Machine view
Machine description
1 Operator's cab 12 Battery disconnect switch

2 Operators seat 13 Frame articulation hinge and lock pin
3 Power transmission 14 Moldboard tilt cylinder
4 Hydraulic tank 15 Moldboard
5 Engine and hydraulic pumps 16 Circle
6 Cooling package 17 Drawbar
7 Fuel tank 18 Circle turning cylinders
8 Tie-down points 19 Circle lift cylinders
9 Lift points 20 Circle shift cylinder
10 Battery 21 Molboard shift cylinders
11 Axle and tandems
Presentation
CE-marking, EMC-directive 19
CE-marking, EMC-directive
CE-marking
If this machine is CE-marked, this means that, when delivered,
the machine meets the applicable “Essential Health and Safety
Requirements,” which are given in the EU Machinery Directive,
2006/42/EC.
Any person carrying out changes that affect the safety of the
machine is also responsible for the same.
As proof that the requirements are met, an EU Declaration of
Conformity and a sound certificate regarding sound level in dB (A)
are supplied with the machine. The sound certificate includes both
measured external values and guaranteed sound level. These
declarations are issued by Volvo Construction Equipment for
each individual machine. This EU declaration also covers
attachments manufactured by Volvo Construction Equipment.
The documentation is a valuable document, which should be kept
safe and retained for at least 10 years. The document should
always accompany the machine when it is sold.
EU's EMC directive

The electronic equipment of the machine may in some cases
cause interference to other electronic equipment, or suffer from
external electromagnetic interference, which may constitute
safety risks.
The EU’s EMC-directive about “Electromagnetic Compatibility,”
2004/108/EC, provides a general description of what demands
can be made on the machine from a safety point of view, where
permitted limits have been determined and given according to
international standards.
A machine or device which meets the requirements should be CE-
marked. Our machines have been tested particularly for
electromagnetic interference. The CE-marking of the machine
and the declaration of conformity also cover the EMC-directive.
If other electronic equipment is fitted to this machine, the
equipment must be CE-marked and tested on the machine with
regard to electromagnetic interference.
Presentation
20 CE-marking, EMC-directive
Declaration of Conformity
The following is a generic version of the EC declaration of
conformity. A signed and dated version is included with the
shipment of the machine.
EC Declaration of Conformity for Machinery (IIA)

Volvo Construction Equipment Inc, Shippensburg, PA, USA, hereby declares that the product:
Make: Volvo Construction Equipment
Type: Motor Grader *Gxxx*
Product Identification Number (PIN): VCEXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
to which this declaration relates, is in conformity with the relevant provisions of Essential Health and Safety
requirements of the:
Council Directive 2006/42/EC relating to Machinery.
Council Directive 2000/14/EC relating to Noise Emission in the Environment by equipment for use out doors.
Council Directive 2004/108/EC on electromagnetic compatibility, and their Amendments relating to machinery,
and other applicable Directives.
Harmonized standards applied:
EN 474-1:2006+A1:2009 Earth Moving machinery – Safety General Requirements,
EN 474-6:2006+A1:2009 Earth Moving machinery- Safety Requirements for Dumpers.
This declaration relates exclusively to the machinery in the state in which it was placed on the market, and excludes
components which are added and/or operations carried out subsequently by the final user.
Signature of the issuer of this declaration:
_____________________________________ _____________________________________
Director, Road and Utility Product Platforms Signature
_____________________________________
Date of issue
Signature of the person, established in the Community, authorised to compile the technical file:
_____________________________________ _____________________________________
Global Director Laws and Regulations Signature
_____________________________________ _____________________________________
_____________________________________ Date of issue
_____________________________________
Address
This declaration may include attachments developed, designed/approved, marked and marketed by above-
mentioned manufacturer.
Presentation
Communication equipment, installation 21
Communication equipment,
installation
NOTICE
All installation of optional electronic communication equipment
must be performed by trained professionals and in accordance
with the Volvo Construction Equipment instructions.
Protection against electromagnetic

interference
This machine has been tested in accordance with EU directive
2004/108/EC governing electromagnetic interference. It is
therefore very important that all non-approved electronic
accessories, such as communication equipment, should be
tested before installation and use, since they can cause
interference to the electronic systems of the machine.
Guidelines for installation of mobile telephone

To obtain the best functionality, mobile telephones should be
permanently installed in the electrical system of the machine, with
a permanent aerial fixed on the cab and installed as advised by
the manufacturer. If a portable mobile telephone is used, note that
it can constantly transmit information to its base station, even
when the telephone is not used. For this reason, it should not be
placed beside electronic equipment in the machine, such as
directly on a control panel, etc.
Guidelines for installing antenna

The guidelines given below must be followed during installation:
The aerial placement must be chosen to give good adaptation
to the surroundings.
The down lead from the aerial must be of the coaxial type. Make
sure that the cable is undamaged, that the sheath and braid
are not split at the ends, the braid covers the connector ferrules
and has good galvanic contact with them.
The mating surface between the aerial mounting bracket and
the bodywork must be clean metal surfaces, with all dirt and
oxide removed. Protect the mating surfaces against corrosion
after installation, to maintain good galvanic contact.
Remember to keep interfering cables and those which may suffer
from interference apart. Interfering cables are the power supply
cables and the aerial to the communication equipment. Cables
which may suffer from interference are cables to and from
electronic units on the machine. Install cable harnesses as close
to grounded plate surfaces as possible, as these have a
screening effect.
Presentation
22 Product plates
Product plates
The machine and its components can be identified using the
identification numbers on the machine's product plates. State
these numbers when ordering spare parts or for any enquiries.
Enter the numbers in the table on page 3.
Product identification plates

With the aid of the product plates, shown below, it is possible to
identify the machine and its components. The product
identification number (PIN) indicates the model designation,
engine code and serial number of the machine. The component
identification number (CIN) indicates the serial number of the
component.
When ordering spare parts, and in all telephone inquiries or
correspondence, the PIN and CIN must always be quoted.
Product identification plates

Presentation
Product plates 23
1 Engine 5 Product plate for TUV (Germany)

The engine model designation, serial number and power Machine model designation, PIN, max. machine weight, max.
rating (plate attached on the engine). charge weight on front axle, max. charge weight on rear axle,
2 Cab year of manufacture.
ROPS / FOPS number and ROPS / FOPS certificate 6 Transmission
number (plate attached on the R.H. door post). The manufacturer’s name and address and transmission CIN
3 Product plate (plate attached to the housing).
The manufacturer’s name and address, machine model 7 Rear axle
designation, machine PIN, machine weight, engine The manufacturer’s name and address and rear axle CIN (plate
output, year of manufacture, year of delivery and position attached to the housing).
of CE mark (EU / EEA countries only).
4 CE mark
Separate self-adhesive decal attached to the product
plate (EU / EAA countries only).
Product identification number

V C E E C 3 5 C C 0 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 When ordering spare parts and in all telephone enquiries or
A B C D
correspondence, the product identification number (PIN), which
V1085475 includes the machine model, must always be quoted.
PIN plate detail The PIN is located on the PIN product plate. The PIN identifies
A World manufacturer code the world manufacturer code, the machine model and the
B Machine descriptor section
machine serial number.
C Check letter section
D Machine serial number
Presentation
24 Information and warning decals
Information and warning decals

The operator should read, understand and follow the information
and warning decals which are positioned on the machine.
The decals must be kept free from dirt so that they can be read
and understood. If they have been lost or no longer are legible,
they must be replaced immediately. The part number (order
number) is given on the respective decals and in the Parts
Catalogue. Contact your manufacturer’s local authorised dealer
or distributor for additional information or assistance as required.
Presentation
Information and warning decals 25
Decal locations
Applies to models: G970, G976, G990
Item Decal Quantity Location

1 Warning! Rotating components, hot surfaces, high pressure 1 Engine compartment
2 Warning! Jumper cables alert 1 Battery box
3 Warning! Battery information, corrosion and explosion 1 Battery box
hazards
4 Warning! Read Operator's Manual first 3 Cab
5 Warning! Articulation crush zone. Stay clear when engine is 2 Both sides of frame articulation
running hinge joint
6 Warning! Crush zone. Keep clear of moldboard 4 Both sides of circle
7 Warning! Pressurized accumulators 4 Over the circle area
8 Warning! Rotating components 1 Rear cooling grille
9 Warning! Reversing machine 1 Rear bumper
10 Lifting points 5 Main frames
11 Tie down points 8 Main frames
12 Battery disconnect switch 1 Engine compartment
13 Warning! Rotating components 2 Both sides articulation hinge joint
Presentation
Decal locations
Applies to models: G930, G940, G946, G960
Item Decal Quantity Location

1 Warning! Rotating components, hot surfaces, high pressure 1 Engine compartment
2 Warning! Jumper cables alert 1 Battery box
3 Warning! Battery information, corrosion and explosion 1 Battery box
hazards
4 Warning! Read Operator's Manual first 3 Cab
5 Warning! Articulation crush zone. Stay clear when engine is 2 Both sides of frame articulation
running hinge joint
6 Warning! Crush zone. Keep clear of moldboard 4 Both sides of circle
7 Warning! Pressurized accumulators 4 Over the circle area
8 Warning! Rotating components 1 Rear cooling grille
9 Warning! Reversing machine 1 Rear bumper
10 Lifting points 5 Main frames
11 Tie down points 8 Main frames
12 Battery disconnect switch 1 Engine compartment
13 Warning! Rotating components 2 Both sides articulation hinge joint
Presentation
North American decals
1 WARNING! Rotating components, hot surfaces, high
pressure. Read Operator's Manual.
2 WARNING! Jumper cables alert. Read Operator's Manual.
3 WARNING! Battery information, corrosion and explosion

hazards. Read Operator's Manual.
4 WARNING! Read Operator's Manual first.

Presentation
5 WARNING! Articulation crush zone. Stay clear when engine
is running.
6 WARNING! Crush zone. Keep clear of moldboard.
7 WARNING! Pressurized accumulators. Read Operator's

Manual.
8 WARNING! Rotating components. Keep clear.
9 WARNING! Reversing machine. Keep clear.
10 Lift points
11 Tie down points
12 Battery disconnect switch

Presentation
13 WARNING! Rotating components

Presentation
30 USA federal clean air act
USA federal clean air act

The Federal Clean Air Act Section 203.a (3) prohibits the removal
of air pollution control devices or the modification of an EPA-
certified non-road engine to a non certified configuration.
The Federal regulations implementing the Clean Air Act for non-
road engines, 40 CFR 89.1003(a)(3)(i), reads as follows:
The following acts and the causing thereof are prohibited:
For a person to remove or render inoperative a device or element
of design installed on or in a non-road engine vehicle or
equipment in compliance with the regulations under this part prior
to its sale and delivery to the ultimate purchaser or for a person
knowingly to remove or render inoperative such a device or
element of design after the sale and delivery to the ultimate
purchaser.
The law prescribes a fine of up to $2,750 USD for each violation.
An example of a prohibited modifications is the recalibration of
the fuel system so that the engine will exceed the certified
horsepower or torque.
You should not make a change to an EPA-certified non-road
engine that would result in an engine that does not match the
engine configuration certified to meet the Federal Standards.
Customer Assistance
Volvo Construction Equipment wishes to help assure that the
Emission Control System Warranty is properly administered. In
the event that you do not receive the warranty service to which
you believe you are entitled under the Emission Control System
Warranty, you should contact the nearest Volvo Construction
Equipment regional office for assistance.
Normal non-road engine use
The maintenance instructions are based on the assumption that
this conventional machine will be used as designated in the
operator's instruction manual and operated only with the specified
fuel and lubrication oils.
Presentation
USA federal clean air act 31
Non-road engine maintenance
This is a non-road engine of conventional design and any local
dealer may perform the necessary non-road emission control
maintenance as defined in this manual.
Volvo recommends that the purchaser use the service program
for the non-road engine, known as preventative maintenance,
including the recommended engine emission control
maintenance.
In order to document that the proper regular maintenance has
been performed on the non-road engine, Volvo recommends that
the owner keep all records and receipts of such maintenance.
These records or receipts should be transferred to each
subsequent purchaser of the non-road engine.
Service performed by your local dealer
Your local dealer is best suited to give you good, dependable
service since he has trained service technicians and is equipped
with genuine original manufacturer's parts and special tools and
the latest technical publications. Discuss your servicing and
maintenance requirements with your local dealer. He can tailor a
maintenance program for your needs.
For scheduled service or maintenance, it is advisable to contact
your local dealer in advance to arrange for an appointment to
ensure availability of the correct equipment and service
technician to work on your machine. In this way you will assist
your local dealer in reducing the time required to do service on
your machine.
Preventive maintenance program
In order for the conventional non-road engine to retain the
reliability and performance parameters such as noise level and
emission levels it had when delivered, it is essential that it
receives regularly scheduled service, inspections, adjustments,
and maintenance.
Presentation
32 USA federal clean air act
Fuel system
Fuel recommendations:
The fuel used must be clean, completely distilled, stable and non-
corrosive. Distillation range, cetane level and sulfur content are
most important when selecting fuel for optimum combustion and
minimum wear.
Engine working conditions and ambient temperature influence the
selection of the fuel with respect to cold handling properties and
cetane levels.
In cold weather conditions, below 0 ºC (32 ºF), the use of lighter
distillate or higher cetane level fuel are recommended. (Final
boiling point maximum 349 ºC (660 ºF) and cetane minimum 45.).
In order to avoid excessive sedimentation and to minimize the
emissions of sulfur dioxide, the fuel's sulfur content should be as
low as possible. The diesel fuels recommended for use shall meet
ASTM designation: D 975 no. 1D (C-B) or no. 2D (T-T) with a
cetane level above 42 and sulfur content not exceeding 0.05
percent by weight.
Check for fuel leaks (with the engine running at high idle):
Visually check unions and hose connections.
Check the condition of the fuel hoses for:
Ageing
Cracks
Blisters
Scuffing
Check the condition of the fuel tank:
Drain condensation water.
Check for cracks.
Check for leaks.
Check the mounting.
Check the turbocharger:
Visually check for leaks in the intake hoses and exhaust pipe
of the turbocharger.
Instrument panels
33
Instrument panels
WARNING
Do not operate the machine until you know the function and
position of the instruments and operating controls. Carefully read
through this Operator’s Manual, your safety is involved!
1 Side console instrument panel (switches, rheostat)

2 Centre instrument panel (central warning, warning/information
control lamps, display unit, gauges, I-ECU)
3 Pedestal instrument panel (switches, display unit keyboard,
direction indicator/horn/high beams lever)
4 Rear control panel (L.H. side behind operator’s seat) (remote
12 V power source, service connection (VCADS Pro), remote
24 V electrical power source, fuses and relays, V-ECU)
Instrument panels
34 Instrument panel, centre
Instrument panel, centre

By taking action in time, it is possible to prevent serious damage
to the machine. Therefore, look now and then at the centre
instrument panel where the operator is provided with information
should something happen that requires his or her intervention. In
order to be able to check the function of instruments and controls,
the current must be turned on and the ignition switch should be
in running position (I).
Information is provided to the operator in different ways
depending on the function involved:
The amber central warning lamp flashes when a less critical
system error occurs. The corresponding system indicator lamp
will light up and any available information is displayed on the
display unit.
The red central warning lamp flashes if abnormal operating
values or faults occur. The warning lamp for the function lights
up at the same time as information is shown on the display unit.
Stop the machine as quickly and safely as possible. Park the
machine away from high traffic areas.
The buzzer sounds for certain functions at the same time as a
central warning lamp flashes.
The control lamps light when the respective functions are
engaged.
The warning lamps light in case of malfunctions such as too
high or too low pressure, temperature or level.
In addition to alarm texts the display unit also shows starting
sequence, operating information and settings. See page 40.
The machine is equipped with three gauges. A warning lamp
to the right of the gauge lights up if the engine coolant
temperature is too high, engine oil pressure is too low or the
fuel level is too low.
Instrument panels
Instrument panel, centre 35
Instrument panel, centre
Central warning lamps

1 Central warning (amber)
2 Central warning (red)
Warning and control lamps
3 Battery charging (red)
4 High hydraulic oil temperature (red)
5 Low transmission oil pressure (red)
6 Service brake warning (red)
7 Blade lift lock status lamp (amber)
8 Applied parking brake (red)
9 Engine air filter restriction (amber)
10 Filter bypass warning (amber)
11 Primary steering system (red)
12 High beam (blue)
13 Direction indicator (green)
14 Differential lock status (amber)
15 Preheating (amber)
16 Secondary steering (amber)
17 Seat belt (red)
18 Low hydraulic oil level (red)
19 All wheel drive charge pressure (red)
20 Display unit
Gauges
21 Engine coolant temperature
22 Fuel level
23 Engine oil pressure
Instrument panels
Central warning (amber)
The lamp flashes when system errors occur for less critical
warnings. It informs the operator that a function is engaged/
disengaged or that a function needs to be kept under observation
(e.g., low fuel level). At the same time, it is accompanied by the
warning lamp for the function lighting up and/or alarm text shown
on the display unit.
Central warning (red)
The lamp flashes when critical warnings or errors occur. At the
same time, it is accompanied by the buzzer sounding, the warning
lamp for the function lighting up and/or alarm text shown on the
display unit. It informs the operator that immediate attention is
required.
Buzzer
The buzzer sounds and the red central warning lamp flashes if
any of the following faults occur. The buzzer will not sound if the
parking brake is engaged.
- Low engine oil pressure
- Low engine coolant level
- Low transmission oil pressure
- Low service brake pressure
- Low hydraulic oil level
- Low steering system pressure
- Low AWD charge pressure
- High engine charge air temperature
- High engine coolant temperature
- High engine charge air pressure
- High crankcase pressure
- High fuel rail pressure
- High engine oil temperature
- High hydraulic oil temperature
- High transmission oil temperature
- Service brake backup system
- Service brake circuit failure
- Parking brake (if applied in motion)
- Engine shutdown pending
- Engine protection active
- Computer failure
- Reduced computer function
Battery charging (red)
The lamp lights when the alternator is not charging within the
proper voltage range. Alarm text shows on the display unit if the
electrical system voltage is not within specifications.
High hydraulic oil temperature (red)

The lamp lights when the hydraulic oil temperature in the tank is
too high. The red central warning lamp flashes and alarm text
shows on the display unit. The buzzer will not sound if the parking
brake is engaged.
Fluid temperature must be kept within acceptable limits to retain
the proper viscosity and other properties necessary for
satisfactory operation between oil change intervals.
For additional information, see page 289.
Instrument panels
Low transmission oil pressure (red)
The lamp lights when the oil pressure in the transmission is too
low. The red central warning lamp flashes and alarm text shows
on the display unit. The buzzer will not sound if the parking brake
is engaged.
Stop and check the oil level or investigate any other cause of the
triggered warning. Rectify before continuing operation.
Service brake warning (red)
WARNING
If the brake warning lamp lights up and the buzzer sounds while
operating, the brake system is faulty. Remove the ignition key and
keep it safe. Tie a warning label to the steering wheel. The
machine must not be operated until it has been repaired by a
qualified service engineer.
The lamp lights if the brake pressure is too low or if one brake
circuit does not work. The buzzer will not sound if the parking
brake is engaged. At the same time, alarm text indicating fault
error type is shown on the display unit. The red or amber central
warning lamp flashes depending on fault/error condition.
Blade lift lock status lamp (amber)
The lamp lights when the blade lift lock bar pin is disengaged. For
additional information, see page 180.
Applied parking brake (red)

The lamp lights when the parking brake is applied. If the brake is
applied when the machine is in motion above 0.5 km/h (0.3 mph),
the red central warning lamp flashes, the buzzer sounds and
alarm text shows on the display unit. The red central warning lamp
flashes depending on parking brake error condition. Alarm text
indicating fault/error type is shown on the display unit.
Engine air filter restriction (amber)
The lamp lights when the air flow through the engine air filter is
restricted. The red central warning lamp flashes. The buzzer will
not sound if the parking brake is engaged. If the lamp lights, clean
or replace the engine primary air filter element.
Filter bypass warning (amber) (optional equipment for
hydraulic filter) (standard equipment for transmission
filter)
The lamp lights when either the transmission or hydraulic filter is
clogged. The amber central warning lamp flashes and alarm text
in the display unit shows which filter has registered the warning.
Instrument panels
Primary steering system (red)
WARNING
If the warning lamp for the steering system lights up when
operating, the system is faulty. Do not operate the machine until
it has been repaired.
The lamp lights if the steering system hydraulic pressure is too
low. At the same time, the red central warning lamp flashes, the
buzzer sounds and alarm text shows on the display unit.
High beam (blue)
The lamp lights when any of the high beam lights are switched
on.
Direction indicator (green)

The lamp flashes when the direction indicator lever is moved for
turning left or right or the four-way hazard flasher light switch is
activated.
Uneven flashing pulses indicate a faulty bulb, which should be
replaced.
Differential lock status (amber)
The lamp lights when the differential lock is in the LOCK position.
If there is a fault in the circuit, the lamp lights and alarm text
indicating the fault is shown on the display unit.
Preheating (amber)
The lamp lights when the preheating is activated.
After 10–50 seconds (the time depends on the coolant
temperature), the preheating element will automatically
deactivate and the lamp will go out.
Secondary steering (amber) (optional equipment)
The lamp lights at the same time as the steering system electric
motor is energized. It indicates that the secondary steering
system has been activated.
NOTICE
Do not operate the function more than 60 seconds to avoid
damage.
The secondary steering option is an auxiliary electric/hydraulic
system that allows the operator to make steering corrections more
easily in the event of loss of hydraulic flow to the steering unit.
The ignition key must be in the running position (I) for this system
to function.
The system also works when the test switch is activated.
NOTICE
Do not test the secondary steering for more than one minute, as
otherwise a thermal disengagement device that protects against
overheating will be activated.
Instrument panels
Seat belt (red)
The lamp lights to warn that the operator should wear and fasten
the seat belt. The lamp goes out when the seat belt is buckled
securely.
Low hydraulic oil level (red)
The lamp lights when the hydraulic oil level is too low in the
hydraulic tank. The red central warning lamp flashes and alarm
text shows on the display unit. The buzzer will not sound if the
parking brake is engaged.
All wheel drive charge pressure (red)
The lamp lights when the all wheel drive charge pressure is low.
The red central warning lamp flashes and alarm text shows on
the display unit. The buzzer will not sound if the parking brake is
engaged.
To protect the system, all wheel drive operation is not available
when low charge pressure is detected.
Display unit
For display information, see page 40.
Engine coolant temperature
The pointer shows the current engine coolant temperature. If the
pointer enters the red sector, the lamp to the right of the gauge
lights up. The red central warning lamp flashes and alarm text
shows on the display unit. The buzzer will not sound if the parking
brake is engaged. At the same time, the engine speed is limited
as a protective measure.
Run the engine at low idle for a few minutes. If the gauge
continues to indicate within the red sector, stop the engine and
investigate the cause.
Fuel level
The pointer shows the current level in the fuel tank. Check the
fuel supply when the machine is on level ground. If the pointer
enters the red sector, the lamp to the right of the gauge lights up
indicating the machine should be refuelled. In this situation, there
is approximately twenty per cent of fuel capacity remaining in the
tank. Refuel the machine to avoid air entering the fuel system.
If the fuel tank has been run empty, see page 256.
Fill the fuel tank at the end of each shift. This reduces the chance
of condensation forming in the tank.
See page 315 for specifications.
Engine oil pressure
The pointer shows the current engine oil pressure. If the pointer
enters the red sector, the lamp to the right of the gauge lights up.
The red central warning lamp flashes and alarm text shows on
the display unit. The buzzer will not sound if the parking brake is
engaged.
The lamp lights if the engine lubricating oil pressure is too low. At
the same time, the engine speed is limited as a protective
measure.
Stop the engine as soon as it is safe to do so and rectify the fault.
Instrument panels
40 Display unit
Display unit
The display unit is located on the pedestal instrument panel and
shows starting sequence, current operating information and
alarm texts. With the aid of the keyboard on the pedestal
instrument panel, the operator may also obtain information about
the machine status and make settings.
Initial display
When the ignition key is turned to position (I) (running position),
a test program will begin to run to verify the system. The starting
sequence takes 4–5 seconds and its progress is shown by way
of black squares increasing in number from one to seven. During
the first part, the control lamps will light up and the gauges will
indicate (at the twelve o’clock position).
Operating information
NOTE!
"Operating Information" screen for all wheel drive machine is
shown.
NOTE!
If “Er” is shown for a value in any display screen, it indicates an
error in the signal monitoring that information.
NOTE!
X Engine speed/Er/-
Features that are options will not appear in the display unless the
V Travel speed/Er/- machine is equipped with that option.
Z Units: km/h/mph
After an initial display, an "Operating Information" screen will be
G Operator selected gear: shown including current information, provided that this screen
N/P/FC/F1F11/R1–R6/-
was displayed when the ignition was last switched off.
H Current time: hours: minutes/Er/- If another screen was displayed when the ignition was last
T Temperature:/Er/degrees C or F/- switched off, that screen will be displayed. Press ESC to return to
P Units: C/F the "Operating Information" screen.
Y AWD mode: Off/On/On (Standby)/-
A AWD aggression setting A0–A16/Er/- (AWD
models only. No aggression setting displayed
when AWD is off.)
D Mode switch position - T (Travel)
E Mode switch position - M (Manual)
F Wanted gear position: F1–F11/R3–R6/-
Mode switch position - A (Auto) (Displayed with
the transmission direction selector in neutral or
the parking brake engaged)
Wanted gear position: F1–F11/R2–R6
(Displayed with transmission in Forward or
Reverse). XXX0 rpm AWD YYY AAA VVV ZZZZ
GGG D E HH:HH TTT°P FFF
Engine oil level information

When the ignition key is turned to position (I) (running position)
the engine oil level is shown on the display. If the engine oil level
is low, an information message will be displayed, and the amber
central warning light will flash.
Instrument panels
Display unit 41
Keyboard for the display unit
With the aid of the keyboard on the pedestal instrument panel,
the operator may obtain information about the machine status and
also make certain settings.
Machine information
Information about the machine status is obtainable by pressing
the respective function on the keyboard.
Each function group consists of one or more display screens.
Should more than one screen be available for a function group,
an arrow pointing downward will be displayed in the bottom, right
hand corner. To browse within the function group, press arrow
down or arrow up.
Revert to the "Operating Information" screen, press the ESC key.
X = Engine speed (revolutions per minute)/Er

T = Engine coolant temperature/Er/< –15 °C or < 5 °F
Minimum temperature displayed is –15 °C or 5 °F
P = Units: C/F
Y = Engine oil pressure/Er
Z = Units: bar/psi
X = Charge air pressure/Er

Z = Units bar/psi
T = Charge air temperature/Er/< –15 °C or < 5 °F
Minimum temperature displayed is < –15 °C or < 5 °F
P = Units: C/F
Y = Engine coolant level: Normal/Low/Er
X = Fuel pressure/Er
Z = Units bar/psi
Y = Intake air temperature/Er/< –35 °C or < –31 °F
Minimum temperature displayed is < –35 °C or < –31 °F
P = Units: C/F
Instrument panels
42 Display unit
X = Fan reverse mode: Not Installed/Off/Manual/1/15 3/30/-

NOTE!
Reversible fan is optional equipment. If the reversible fan has not
been installed, then "NOT INSTALLED" is displayed as the fan
mode and no other selections are available.
If manual mode has not been selected, then the "activate" option
is not available and not displayed. If the reversible fan option has
been installed and manual mode has been selected, then a
manual reversal of the fan may be activated by pressing the
SELECT key.
For additional information, see “setup, fan reverse” screen.
X = Transmission oil pressure: Normal/Low/Er

T = Transmission temperature/Er
P = Units: C/F
Y = Transmission oil filter: Normal/Bypass/Er
NOTE!
Transmission oil filter bypass feature is an option.
G = Operator selected gear: N/P/F/F1/F2/F3/F4/F5/F6/F7/F8/F9/

F10/F11/R/R1/R2/R3/R4/R5/R6/Er
Y = Current gear: N/P/FC/F1/F2/F3/F4/F5/F6/F7/F8/F9/F10/F11/
RC/R1/R2/R3/R4/R5/R6/Er
M = Transmission mode: MAN/AUTO/DRIVE/CREEP/Er
NOTE!
Creep mode is only available on AWD machines.
T = Hydraulic temperature:/Er
P = Units: C/F.
X = Hydraulic oil level: Normal/Low/Er
Y = Hydraulic oil filter: Normal/Bypass/Er
Instrument panels
Display unit 43
Brake charging pressure

X = Pressure
Output brake pressure

X = Pressure
Y = Brake light switch status, On/Off
NOTE!
Brake pressures are displayed in bar regardless of the setup
choice.
X = Grader hours: up to a maximum of 999999.9 hours

Y = Engine hours: up to a maximum of 999999.9 hours
X = Electrical system voltage (real time) in volts
Instrument electronic control unit I-ECU

X = Main software: [MSW]/Er
Y = Dataset 1: [DST1]/Er
Z = Dataset 2: [DST2]/Er
Vehicle electronic control unit V-ECU

Instrument panels
44 Display unit
Z = Dataset 2: [DST2] Er
Engine electronic control unit E-ECU

Z = Dataset 2: [DST2]/Er
D = Current date: [year]-[month]-[day]

H = Current time: [hours]:[minutes]
X = Machine model: G930/G940/G946/G960/G970/G976/G990/

G930B/G940B/G946B/G960B
Y = Installed tyre size: 14.00/16.00/17.50/20.50
D = Distance travelled: Up to a maximum of 999999 km or 621372
miles
Z = Units: km/mi
X = Instantaneous fuel consumption, shown in L/h or g/h (liters

per hour or US gallons per hour)
Y = Average fuel consumption per hour, shown in L/h or g/h (liters
per hour or US gallons per hour) and calculated by dividing total
fuel consumed by grader hours
Z = Total fuel consumption, calculated up to 9999999 liters or
2641720 US gal, in one unit increments
W = Units: L/g
X = Time remaining to next service [hours]

Y = Service interval shown as 250/500/1000/2000
When 8 hours remain to the next service, display shows "Time for
service".
Instrument panels
Display unit 45
To acknowledge and remove information, press SELECT for 3–5
seconds when in the AUX 1 (machine information) functional
group at the grader service display.
The service interval is displayed to the right of the bar. The bar
increases from left to right as time to the next service decreases.
– Press ARROW DOWN: selects the TRIP INFO 2 display

X = Fuel consumption since resetting, in liters or US gal up to
999999 liters or 264172 US gal
Y = Time since resetting in hours up to 9999.9 hours
Z = Fuel consumption per hour since resetting, up to 99.9 L/h or
26.4 g/h (liters per hour or US gallons per hour)
W = Units: L/g
NOTE!
To reset, see Trip information reset to follow.
– Press ARROW UP: selects the TRIP INFO 1 display

– Press ARROW DOWN: displays the trip reset menu
X = Total distance since resetting in km or miles up to 9999.9 km
(6213.6 mi)
Z = Units: km/mi
Y = Average speed since resetting up to 99.9 km/h (62.1 mph)
shown in km/h (kilometer per hour) or mph (miles per hour)
V = Units: km/h/mph
F = Fuel consumption per unit distance since resetting, up to 99.9
in L/km or US mpg
W = Units: L/g
Trip information reset:

– Press ARROW UP: display shows TRIP INFO 2 data
– Press SELECT to reset. Trip data is now set to zero.
Instrument panels
46 Display unit
This display is shown for several seconds while the trip data is
resetting. After the trip data has reset, the display returns to the
TRIP INFO 1 display.
TRIP INFO 1 display shown after trip reset.

Setup, language and units
– Press SELECT to enter language setup.

– Press SELECT again will enter the date/time setup.
– Press ESC to return to the "Operating Information" screen.
– Use arrow key to scroll through the list of available languages.

– Confirm with SELECT.
– Press ESC to cancel the selection made.
– Press ESC again to return to the "Operating Information"
screen.
NOTE!
The standard available languages are: English, Swedish,
German, French, Spanish, Italian, Portuguese and Turkish
– Use arrow key to scroll through the list of available units.

– Confirm with SELECT.
– Press ESC to cancel the selection made and will return to the
"Operating Information" screen.
Setup, date and time
Instrument panels
Display unit 47
ALT = Alternative date / time format as shown by A following.

A = Date / time formats: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
Y= Current year
M= Current month
D= Current day
H= Current time: hours: minutes
– Press SELECT to show date/time format menu.
– Press ARROW UP to return to the setup menu.
– Press ARROW DOWN to display the fan mode setup menu.
A = Date/time formats: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
Where the date/time format available selections are:
1. year - month - day - 24 h
2. year - month - day - am/pm
3. month - day - year - 24 h
4. month - day - year - am/pm
5. day - month - year - 24 h
6. day - month - year - am/pm
Setup, fan reverse
Available fan modes are: Off – Manual – 3/30 – 1/15.

– Press SELECT to show fan mode format menu.
– Press ARROW UP to return to the date/time setup menu.
– Press ARROW DOWN to display fan sound test menu.
Cooling fan reversal (changing rotational direction) can be set to

one of four different modes as selected with the keyboard.
The arrow keys may be used to scroll through the list of available
fan modes.
- Press SELECT to select a specific fan mode and displays the
fan mode setup menu.
Instrument panels
48 Display unit
- Press ESC to cancel the selection.
- Press ESC again to return the display to the "Operating
Information" screen.
For reversing fan modes, see chart below.
Mode Basic factory setting Available reversal time duration Available interval times
M1 Manual 30 sec. 20 - 180 sec. adjustable (VCADS Pro) --
M2 30 sec / 30 min 20 - 180 sec. adjustable (VCADS Pro) 5 - 180 min adjustable (VCADS Pro)
M3 30 sec./15 min 20 - 180 sec. adjustable (VCADS Pro) 5 - 180 min adjustable (VCADS Pro)
M4 Off No reversal
Mode Operation
- M1: Fan reversal interval is controlled by the operator. When
selected, the factory setting for fan reversal duration is
30 seconds. Fan reversal duration is adjustable by VCADS
Pro.
- M2: When selected, the factory setting for fan reversal time
duration is 30 seconds with an interval of 30 minutes continued
engine operation. Fan reversal duration and interval is
adjustable by VCADS Pro.
NOTE!
If interval or duration times are changed using VCADS Pro, 30/30
identifying mode 2 will not change.
- M4: No reversal fan mode is selected.
Setup, fan sound test
– Press SELECT to show fan mode format menu.

– Press ARROW UP to return to the date/time setup menu.
– Press ARROW DOWN to display fan sound test menu.
Although the fan sound test display screen can be accessed by
the operator, it is not intended for operator use. Contact your local
Volvo dealer for activation instructions.
Alarm texts
The information to the operator is provided on the display unit in
the form of alarm texts, which are divided into four classes:
Warning, Info, Error and Service Info. For all classes at speeds
above 20 km/h (12.4 mph), the alarm text is shown for 2 seconds
and is then alternated with the previous screen which is shown
for 3 seconds. This alternate showing of the two screens
Instrument panels
Display unit 49
continues as long as the error situation remains, or until the alarm
is shown a certain number of times.
The error messages have a failure mode identifier (FMI) code at
the bottom row that is intended for the service technician.
WARNING
– Is shown regardless of which screen was shown previously.
– Alarm text will be shown for 2 seconds alternately with the
previous screen which will be shown for 3 seconds (this will be
repeated as long as the error situation remains).
– Red central warning lamp will be flashing.
– Rectify or contact authorised dealer workshop for information.
INFO
repeated three times).
– Amber central warning lamp will be flashing.
The alarm will be repeated at the next start if it is still "active."
ERROR
repeated as long as the error situation remains).
– Contact authorised dealer workshop for information.
SERVICE INFO
previous screen which will be shown for 3 seconds. Is repeated
until acknowledgement has been carried out via the menu NEXT
SERVICE or the alarm has been brought to an end in any other
way specified for the function (for example, replacing filter).
Display text messages

WARNING
WARNING - DRIVETRAIN OVERSPEED
WARNING - ENGINE PROTECTION ACTIVE
WARNING - ENGINE SHUTDOWN PENDING
WARNING - EXCESSIVE CLUTCH PEDAL USAGE
WARNING - HIGH CRANKCASE PRESSURE
WARNING - HIGH ENGINE CHARGE AIR PRESSURE
WARNING - HIGH ENGINE CHARGE AIR TEMPERATURE
WARNING - HIGH ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
WARNING - HIGH ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE
WARNING - HIGH FUEL RAIL PRESSURE
WARNING - HIGH HYDRAULIC OIL TEMPERATURE
WARNING - HIGH TRANSMISSION OIL TEMPERATURE
WARNING - HIGH VOLTAGE
Instrument panels
50 Display unit
WARNING
WARNING - JOYSTICK SYSTEM FAILURE
WARNING - LOW AWD CHARGE OIL PRESSURE
WARNING - LOW ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL
WARNING - LOW ENGINE OIL PRESSURE
WARNING - LOW HYDRAULIC OIL LEVEL
WARNING - LOW STEERING OIL PRESSURE
WARNING - LOW TRANSMISSION OIL PRESSURE
WARNING - LOW VOLTAGE
WARNING - PARKED REGENERATION REQUIRED
WARNING - PARKING BRAKE APPLIED
WARNING - SERVICE BRAKE BACKUP SYSTEM FAILURE
WARNING- SERVICE BRAKE CIRCUIT FAILURE
WARNING - SLIP IN TRANSMISSION CLUTCHES
WARNING - STOP MACHINE, APPLY PARKING BRAKE
WARNING - REGENERATION NEEDED
WARNING - REGENERATION STARTS IN 1 MINUTE
WARNING - WATER IN FUEL
INFO
INFO - APPLY PARK BRAKE TO START ENGINE
INFO - AWD FILTER BYPASSING
INFO - ENGINE AIR INTAKE RESTRICTION
INFO - ENGINE OVERSPEED PROTECTION
INFO - HYDRAULIC FILTER BYPASSING
INFO - HYDRAULIC UNLOAD ON
INFO - FAN REVERSING
INFO - KEEP MACHINE PARKED REGENERATION ONGOING
INFO - LOW ENGINE OIL LEVEL
INFO - NO REGENERATION POSSIBLE - ENGINE NOT RUNNING
INFO - NO REGENERATION POSSIBLE - ENGINE NOT WARMED UP
INFO - NO REGENERATION POSSIBLE, SERVICE NEEDED
INFO - TESTING SERVICE BRAKE BACKUP SYSTEM
INFO - REGENERATION CANCELLED
INFO - REGENERATION NOT NEEDED - SOOT LEVEL LOW
INFO - REGENERATION REQUEST
INFO - REGENERATION STARTS IN 1 MINUTE
INFO - START ENGINE IN NEUTRAL
INFO - STOP MACHINE, APPLY PARKING BRAKE
INFO - SYSTEM FAULT, NO REGENERATION POSSIBLE
INFO - TESTING SECONDARY STEERING SYSTEM
INFO - TRANSMISSION FILTER BYPASSING
SERVICE INFO - TIME FOR SERVICE
SERVICE INFO - TIME TO CHANGE ENGINE OIL
Instrument panels
Display unit 51
ERROR
ERROR - ACCELERATOR PEDAL
ERROR- ACCELERATOR CONTROL SW2708 11
ERROR- ACCELERATOR PEDAL SE2702 11 AND SE2704 11
ERROR- ACCELERATOR MODE SW2706 11
ERROR - AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR SE3802
ERROR - AWD AGGRESSION SWITCH SW4403 11
ERROR - AWD BYPASS VALVE FORWARD LEFT MA4403
ERROR - AWD BYPASS VALVE FORWARD RIGHT MA4405
ERROR - AWD BYPASS VALVE REVERSE LEFT MA4404
ERROR - AWD BYPASS VALVE REVERSE RIGHT MA4406
ERROR - AWD CHARGE OIL PRESSURE SENSOR SE9106
ERROR - AWD FILTER PRESSURE SWITCH SE9108 11
ERROR - AWD FREEWHEELING VALVE MA4402
ERROR - AWD MOTOR DISPLACEMENT VALVE MA4401
ERROR - AWD PUMP FORWARD LEFT PWM4401
ERROR - AWD PUMP FORWARD RIGHT PWM4403
ERROR - AWD PUMP REVERSE RIGHT PWM4404
ERROR - AWD PUMP REVERSE LEFT PWM4402
ERROR - CRANKCASE PRESSURE SE2509
ERROR - DIFFERENTIAL LOCK PRESSURE SENSOR SE4601
ERROR - DIFFERENTIAL LOCK VALVE MA4601
ERROR - ENGINE AIR INTAKE PRESSURE SENSOR SE2502
ERROR - ENGINE CHARGE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR SE2507
ERROR - ENGINE CHARGE AIR PRESSURE SENSOR SE2508
ERROR - ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR SE2606
ERROR - ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR SE2202
ERROR - FUEL LEVEL SE2303
ERROR - ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SENSOR SE2203
ERROR - ENGINE OIL LEVEL SENSOR SE2205
ERROR - ENGINE PREHEAT HE2501 05
ERROR- ENGINE PREHEAT RE2501
ERROR- FAN CONTROL DIRECTION MA2602
ERROR- FAN CONTROL SHUTOFF MA2603
ERROR - FAN PUMP CONTROL VALVE PWM2601
ERROR - FAN SPEED SE2607
ERROR - GEAR SHIFTER SE4201
ERROR - HYDRAULIC FILTER PRESSURE SWITCH SE9107 11
ERROR - HYDRAULIC OIL LEVEL SENSOR SE9104
ERROR - HYDRAULIC OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR SE9105
ERROR -HYDRAULIC PUMP VALVE MA9111
ERROR - IGNITION KEY SWITCH SW3301 11
ERROR - INCHING PEDAL SE4101 11 AND SE4102 11
ERROR - PARK BRAKE
ERROR - PARK BRAKE PRESSURE
Instrument panels
52 Display unit
ERROR
ERROR - PARK BRAKE PRESSURE SENSOR SE5501
ERROR - REVERSE ALARM RELAY RE4201
ERROR - SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM MO5201
ERROR - SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM RE5201
ERROR - SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM SE5201
ERROR - START RELAY
ERROR - STEERING MOTOR MO6401
ERROR - STEERING MOTOR RELAY RE6401
ERROR - STEERING OIL PRESSURE SENSOR SE6401
ERROR - TRANSMISSION
ERROR- TRANSMISSION SW4202 11
ERROR - TRANSMISSION FILTER PRESSURE SWITCH SE4215 11
ERROR - TRANSMISSION OIL PRESSURE SENSOR SE4214
ERROR - TRANSMISSION OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR SE4202
ERROR - LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SE4402 08
ERROR - RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SE4401 08
ATTENTION
ATTENTION - REDUCED COMPUTER FUNCTION
STOP
STOP! COMPUTER FAILURE STOP THE VEHICLE
STOP! REGENERATION FAILURE CALL FOR SERVICE
STOP! SERVICE NEEDED
STOP! TURN ENGINE OFF
Display unit, dual joystick

The dual joystick steering option includes a touch screen operator

interface to provide information such as:
the operating profile(1) and joystick control pattern
if the joysticks are active
if the float functions are active
if joystick steering is active
if articulation auto stop is active
system tools and settings
1. A profile is a saved set of user chosen calibration settings. For more information, see page 57.
Instrument panels
Display unit 53
Initial display
The initial display is shown at power up while the display unit is
initialising.
Initial display
Default screen
After the display unit has initialised, the initial display is replaced
by the default screen. At the top of the screen, the system name,
warning and error indicators and the name of the active operating
profile is displayed. The system name can be changed and set
by the operator. The error and warning indicators are displayed
when there are warnings or errors relevant to the operation of the
dual joystick steering system. The profile name indicates which
profile is active.
There are three icons in the middle of the screen that indicate if
joysticks are active, float functions are active and articulation auto
stop is active.
At the bottom of the screen there are buttons to provide access
to the system tools screen and help screens. Touch the tools
Default screen button to display the system tools screen. Touch the help button
1 System name to display the help screens.
2 Float icon
3 Warning and error indicators
4 Profile name
5 Articulation auto stop activation and
deactivation button
6 Articulation auto stop icon
7 Help button
8 Joysticks icon
9 Tools button
Joysticks icon
The joysticks icon indicates whether or not the hydraulic functions
are active, joysticks are active and if joystick steering is active.
The round indicator at the top right of the icon changes to yellow
when the hydraulic functions are active. The joysticks that are
shown on the icon change from gray to black when joysticks are
active. The background colour changes to blue and a wheel is
added to the icon when joystick steering is active.
Joysticks icon
1 Joysticks are inactive
2 Joysticks are active with joystick steering
inactive
3 Joysticks are active with joystick steering
also active
Instrument panels
54 Display unit
Float icon
The float icon indicates whether or not the float functions are
active. The background colour changes to blue when any of the
float functions are active. The round indicators change to yellow
to indicate which float functions are active.
Float functions icon

1 No float functions are active
2 Right float functions are active
Articulation auto stop icon

The articulation auto stop icon indicates whether or not the
articulation auto stop function is active and if auto stop has been
commanded. The button below the icon activates and deactivates
the articulation auto stop function. The round indicator at the top
right changes to yellow when the articulation auto stop function is
active. The background colour changes to blue when the
articulation auto stop function has been commanded. The
articulation auto stop causes the articulation of the machine to
stop in the centre position.
Articulation auto stop icon

1 Articulation auto stop function is not active
2 Articulation auto stop function is active
3 Deactivate button
4 Activate button
System tools screen

The system tools screens provide adjustments and custom
settings for speed of the mouldboard and auxiliary functions,
display brightness, profile naming and selection, layout
configuration of the joystick function pattern, access to the
troubleshoot screens and system information screens and
language selection. Touch the tools button on the default screen
to access the system tools screen. See page 54 for more
information on the system tools screen.
System tools screens

The system tools screen includes two pages. Use the right and
left arrow keys to move from one page to the other.
Instrument panels
Display unit 55
Page one
Touch the speed button to display the speed screen. See page
55 for more information.
Touch the brightness button to display the brightness screen.
See page 56 for more information.
Touch the profile button to display the profile screen. See page
Touch the right arrow button to go to page two of the system
tools screen.
Touch the system information button to display the system
information screen. See page 60 for more information.
Touch the troubleshoot button to display the troubleshoot
screens. See page 61 for more information.
Touch the layout button to display the layout screen. See page
Touch the close button to close the system tools screen and
go back to the default screen. See page 52 for more information
about the default screen.
System tools screen, page one
1 Speed button
2 Brightness button
3 Profile button
4 System Information button
5 Right arrow button
6 Troubleshoot button
7 Close button
8 Layout button
Page two
Touch the language button to display the language selection
screen. See page 64 for more information.
The settings and calibration buttons are for maintenance
adjustments and should be used only by qualified service
technicians.
Use the left arrow button to go back to page one of the system
tools screen.
Touch the close button to close the system tools screen and
go back to the default screen.
System tools screen, page two

1 Language button
2 Settings button
3 Calibration button
4 Left arrow button
5 Close button
Instrument panels
56 Display unit
Speed screen
The speed screen is used to adjust how fast the moldboard and
auxiliary hydraulic functions move in response to the joystick
controls. When delivered from the factory, the speed is set to 100
per cent of full speed. The moldboard speed setting equally
affects all functions that control the moldboard. The speed
settings for auxiliary hydraulic functions can be set differently for
each function.
NOTE!
Changes to the speeds apply only the active profile.
To change the speed of a function, touch the function select
button. Select the function from the dropdown list. Touch the
Speed screen speed slider and slide it to the desired speed. The speed
1 Function select button indicator value will display the new speed setting as a
2 Speed indicator value percentage of the maximum speed available.
3 Speed slider To save adjustments, touch the close button. The changes will
4 Help button
be saved and the display will return the system tools screen.
5 Close button
Function list
Brightness screen
Instrument panels
Display unit 57
The brightness screen permits the operator to adjust the daytime
and nighttime display brightness.
To adjust the brightness of the display, touch the daytime select
button to adjust the daytime brightness or touch the nighttime
select button to adjust the nighttime brightness.
Slide the brightness slider to obtain the desired brightness.
To save adjustments, touch the close button. The changes will
be saved and the display will return to the system tools screen.
Brightness screen
1 Daytime select button
2 Nighttime select button
3 Brightness value
4 Brightness slider
5 Help button
6 Close button
Profile screen
Profiles can be changed from the Profile screen.

A profile is a saved set of different combinations of calibration
settings, such as speed and brightness. The profile screen allows
the operator to select which operating profile the joysticks will use.
Up to four different profiles can be available for selection.
To select a profile, touch one of the profile selection buttons.
Profile screen
1 Change profile button
2 Profile selection buttons
3 Help screen button
4 Close button
Instrument panels
58 Display unit
Profiles can be renamed. To rename a profile, touch the change
profile button and then touch the rename button on the dropdown
menu. Use the text entry screen to change the profile name.
Change profile dropdown menu

Change name button
Layout screen
The layout screen shows which hydraulic functions are assigned

to each control on the joysticks and which functions are assigned
to the movement (forward, backward, left and right) of the
joysticks. The layout screen includes two pages. Use the right and
left arrow keys to move from one page to the other.
Layout, left joystick (pattern A)

1. Enable functions with X
2. Forward/neutral/reverse
3. Gear up
4. Gear down
5. Float for functions with ≈
6. Wheel lean left
7. Wheel lean right
8. Right arrow key
9. Circle turn
10. Moldboard lift left
11. Close button
R1. X Wheel steering
R2. Articulation
Instrument panels
Display unit 59
Page one, layout, left joystick
Page one of the layout screen shows the configuration of the left
joystick. The function of each control on the joystick is shown. See
page 52 for more information about the joystick controls and
configuration.
NOTE!
Joystick control patterns (the assignment of buttons and other
joystick switches to specific machine functions) can be changed,
but they must be changed only by a qualified service technician
with proper authorisation. Two patterns are available, pattern A
and pattern B. Pattern B is the pattern selected at the factory for
machine delivery. If the pattern is changed, the control layout
decal must be changed to reflect the active pattern.
Layout, left joystick (pattern B)
Touch the right arrow key to go the page two of the layout
1. Enable functions with X
screen.
2. Forward/neutral/reverse
3. Gear up
Touch the close button to close the layout screen and go back
4. Gear down to the system tools screen.
6.
7.
8. Right arrow key
9. Wheel steering
10. Moldboard lift left ≈
11. Close button
R1. Wheel lean
R2. Articulation
Instrument panels
60 Display unit
Page two, layout, right joystick
Page two of the layout screen shows the configuration of the right
joystick. The function of each control on the joystick is shown. See
page 52 for more information about the joystick controls and
configuration.
NOTE!
Layout, right joystick (pattern A)
8. Aux 2A Touch the left arrow key to go the page one of the layout
9. Aux 2B screen.
10. Float for functions with ≈ Touch the close button to close the layout screen and go back
11. Enable functions with O to the system tools screen.
12. Enable functions with []
13. Left arrow key
14. Moldboard slide (O Aux 4, [] Aux 6)
15. Moldboard lift right (O Aux 3, [] Aux 5)
16. Close button
R3. Moldboard tilt / [] Aux 7
R4. Aux 1 ≈
R5. Circle side shift
Layout, right joystick (pattern B)

8. Aux 1A ≈
9. Aux 1B ≈
11. Enable functions with O
12. Enable functions with []
13. Left arrow key
14. Moldboard slide (O Aux 3, [] Aux 6)
15. Moldboard lift right ≈ (O Aux 5 ≈, [] Aux
2)
16. Close button
R3. Moldboard tilt / O Aux 4 / [] Aux7
R4. Circle turn
R5. Circle side shift
System information screen

Instrument panels
Display unit 61
The system information screens provide information such as:
operating voltage of each control unit
serial number of each control unit
software version of each control unit
There may be more than one page of information. Touch the
left and right arrow buttons to change pages.
Touch the close button to return to the system tools screen.
System information screen, page one
System information screen, page two

1 Left and right arrow buttons
2 Close button
Troubleshooting screens
Access the troubleshooting screens from the system tools screen.

See 54 for more information. The troubleshoot screens provide
access to additional screens to:
view active errors
view previous errors
test inputs
test outputs
Use the left and right arrow buttons to move to different pages of
the troubleshoot screens.
Instrument panels
62 Display unit
Active errors screen
Actively occurring errors can be viewed on the active errors
screen.
To view information about a particular error, touch the error
code button for the error. Information about the error will be
displayed. There may be more than one page of information.
Use the left and right arrow buttons to view each page.
Use the close button to return to the system tools screen.
Active errors screen (example)

1 Error code buttons
3 Close button
Previous errors screen

Previous errors that have occurred can be viewed on the previous
errors screen.
To view information about a previous error, touch the error
code button for the error. Information about the error will be
displayed. There may be more than one page of information.
Use the left and right arrow buttons to view each page.
Use the erase button to delete all previous errors from the
system.
NOTE!
The erase button will delete all the previous errors from the
system.
Previous errors screen (example)

2 Erase button
3 Error code buttons
4 Close button
Instrument panels
Display unit 63
Test inputs screens
There are two test input screens that allow the operator to test the
joystick controls to verify that controls are providing input to the
joystick control system.
While viewing the test inputs 1 screen, activate a control on the
joystick to verify that it is working.
The corresponding control on the display will change to blue to
verify that the control is active.
Test inputs 1 screen (example)

1 Active controls (blue)
3 Close button
While viewing the test inputs 2 screen, activate a circuit to verify

that it is working.
A green indicator means that the control is active.
A gray indicator means that the control is inactive.
Test inputs 2 screen (example)

1 Circuit indication lights (green)
3 Close button
Instrument panels
64 Display unit
Test outputs screen
The test outputs screen lists all the hydraulic valve proportional
outputs from the system. For each output it shows the desired
output current and the actual output current.
The left and right arrows next to the output show the direction
that the output is operating.
A gray arrow means the output is inactive.
A green arrow means the output is active and no faults are
detected
A yellow arrow means that the output is active and the system
has detected an open circuit.
A red arrow means that a short circuit has been detected.
Test outputs screen (example)

1 Arrows indicating status and direction of
output signal
3 Close button
Language selection screen

The language selection screen is used to select the language for

the display unit
Use the left and right arrow buttons to move from one page to
another to find the desired language.
To select a new language, touch the desired language button.
To save the changes, touch the close button. The changes will
be saved and the display will return to the system tools screen.
Language selection screen

1 Language buttons
3 Close button
Instrument panels
Instrument panel, pedestal 65
Instrument panel, pedestal
Instrument panel, pedestal

1 Direction indicators/high beams/horn switch lever
2 Auxiliary hydraulic enable switch for electrically-actuated attachment controls (optional equipment)
3 Keyboard for display unit
4 All wheel drive aggression switch (optional on G946 and G976 models)
5 All wheel drive activation switch (optional on G946 and G976 models)
6 Transmission mode switch (optional equipment)
7 Articulation indicator gauge
8 Engine mode switch
9 Throttle mode switch
10 Throttle control switch
11 Differential lock/unlock switch
12 Four-way hazard flasher switch
1 Direction indicators, high beams and horn switch lever

a Direction indicators
NOTE!
Manually return the switch lever to the centre (OFF) position. It is
not a self-cancelling type.
Move the switch lever up to activate the right direction
indicators.
Move the switch lever down to activate the left direction
indicators.
Direction indicator actuation
b High beam
NOTE!
The blue indicator control lamp in the centre instrument panel will
light when any of the high beam lights are switched on.
Pull the switch lever toward the operator to change the
headlights from low beam to high beam.
Push the switch lever away from the operator to change
the headlights from high beam to low beam.
Low/high beam headlight change

Instrument panels
66 Instrument panel, pedestal
c Horn
Push the end of the switch to sound horn.
2 Auxiliary hydraulic enable switch for electrically actuated
attachment controls (optional equipment)
WARNING
Risk of serious injury or death by optional attachment
Horn sound
movement.
Unexpected moving of attachments may cause serious injury
or death to personnel near the machine.
Always disable auxiliary hydraulic controls when they are not
in use by ensuring that the enable switch is in the OFF position.
The optional electrically actuated auxiliary hydraulic controls
can have float capability or no float capability. Both options are
described below.
a No float capability
Press in the upper end of the switch to enable the
electrically actuated auxiliary hydraulic controls.
Press in the lower end of the switch to disable the
electrically actuated auxiliary hydraulic controls.
No float capability
b Float capability
NOTE!
When pressing the lower end of the switch for float capability, hold
the switch more than 0.5 seconds.
Press in the upper end of the switch to enable the
electrically-actuated auxiliary hydraulic controls.
Put the switch in the middle position to disable the
electrically-actuated auxiliary hydraulic controls.
Float capability switch
Press in the lower end of the switch to enable the electrically-
actuated auxiliary hydraulic float controls.
Instrument panels
3 Keyboard for display unit
The keyboard allows access to information in different areas
of the machine.
NOTE!
Functions controlled by the keyboard:
- Selecting function group by direct selection (function key)
- Browsing within a function group (the arrow keys)
- Activating and deactivating functions (on or off)
- Setting to zero, acknowledge (time, distance and cycles)
- Numerical settings (the arrow keys)
- Alpha-numerical settings (the arrow keys)
- Simpler settings (for example increase or reduce)
Keyboard for display unit a Engine
a Engine Engine speed, coolant temperature, oil pressure, air inlet
b Transmission temperature, boost temperature, boost pressure, fuel
c Hydraulics pressure, coolant level, fan reverse mode (optional)
d Service meter b Transmission
e Electrical system Transmission oil pressure, transmission oil temperature,
f Arrow up filter bypass, lever selected gear, transmission current gear,
g Arrow down
transmission mode
h Setup
i Select c Hydraulics
j Auxiliary 2 Hydraulic oil temperature, hydraulic oil level, hydraulic filter
k Auxiliary 1 bypass (optional)
l Escape d Service meter
Machine hours, engine hours
e Electrical system
System voltage, I-ECU (software version and datasets), V-
ECU (software versions and datasets), E-ECU (software
version and datasets)
f Arrow up
Scrolls up in a function group menu.
g Arrow down
Scrolls down in a function group menu.
h SETUP
Displays the menu for making changes to units and
language. See page 40.
i SELECT
Is used to change and confirm settings.
j AUX1 (machine information)
Current date and time, model, tyre size, distance,
instantaneous fuel consumption, average fuel consumption,
total fuel consumption, time to next service, next service
interval, time to next engine oil change
k AUX2 (trip measurement information)
Fuel used, time, fuel / hour, distance, average speed, fuel/
distance, reset (changes fuel, time and distance values to
zero)
l ESC
Returns the display to “Operating information”, regardless of
which menu is showing.
When in the SETUP mode, pressing ESC will bring you back
to the top of the selected menu. See page 40.
Instrument panels
4 All wheel drive aggression switch (models G946 and G976)
The momentary-type switch can be operated in 16 incremental
steps. The control is used to fine tune speed differences that
may occur between the front and rear wheels.
The aggression setting A 0–A 16 appears on the operating
information display screen. See example display showing
AWD ONA 12.
All wheel drive aggression switch (models G946 NOTE!
and G976) - A lower setting reduces the front wheel rotational speed
compared with the rear wheel rotational speed.
- A higher setting increases the front wheel rotational speed
compared with the rear wheel rotational speed.
Press in the upper end of the switch momentarily to increase
the all wheel drive aggression by one increment.
Press in the lower end of the switch momentarily to decrease
Operating information display screen the all wheel drive aggression by one increment.
5 All wheel drive activation switch (models G946 and G976)
All wheel drive is available in the following combinations:
- F1 – F7 forward gears (HTE840 transmission).
- F1 – F10 forward gears (HTE1160 transmission).
- All reverse gears (HTE840 and HTE1160 transmissions).
Press in the upper end of the switch to activate the all wheel
drive system.
Press in the lower end of the switch to deactivate the all
All wheel drive activation switch (models G946 and wheel drive system.
G976) For additional information, see page 141.
6 Transmission mode, travel, manual and auto switch (optional
equipment on all models
Three transmission modes are available.
Press the upper end of the switch to activate the travel mode.
Put the switch in the middle position to active ate the manual
mode.
Press the lower end of the switch to activate the automatic
mode.
Transmission mode switch For additional information, see page 141.
7 Articulation indicator gauge
The indicator needle displays the degree the machine frame
is articulated. The frame is straight with the needle in the
centre position.
Articulation indicator gauge
8 Engine mode, speed and power switch

Press in the upper end of the switch to activate the speed
mode.
Speed mode allows increased engine speed in lower gears.
Press in the lower end of switch to activate the power mode.
Two possible applications are available:
- Machines marketed outside of the EU and EEA will be
equipped with the engine mode, speed and power switch.
Engine mode switch When the engine is in the high range, full engine speed is
available regardless of the engine mode, speed and power
switch position.
- For machines marketed within the EU and EEA, no engine
mode, speed and power switch is installed.
Instrument panels
Engine mode operation
NOTE!
Exceeding 2200 rpm can cause machine damage.
Outside European Union (EU) / European Economic Area (EEA) market
HTE840 Engine speed Gear ranges
Speed position Full engine rpm All gears
Power position 1900 rpm limit F1, F2, F3, F4, F5 & R1, R2, R3
Full engine rpm F6, F7, F8 & R4

Speed position Full engine rpm All gears
Power position 1900 rpm limit F1, F2, F3, F4, F5, F6, F7, & R1, R2,
R3, R4
Full engine rpm F8, F9, F10, F11 & R5, R6
Within European Union (EU) / European Economic Area (EEA) market

1900 rpm limit F1, F2, F3, F4, F5 & R1, R2, R3
Full engine rpm F6, F7, F8 & R4

Power position 1900 rpm limit F1, F2, F3, F4, F5, F6, F7, & R1, R2,
R3, R4
Full engine rpm F8, F9, F10, F11 & R5, R6
9 Throttle mode, auto and hold switch
a Auto mode
Press in the upper end of the switch to activate the auto
mode.
In auto mode, the throttle control functions similar to an
automobile’s cruise control system and is used mainly for
roading the machine. It controls engine speed (rpm) rather
than road speed.
Throttle mode switch Auto mode is available at all engine speeds and all forward
gears.
If any of the following conditions occur, the auto mode is
suspended and the engine speed returns to the current
accelerator pedal position.
- The service brake pedal is depressed.
- The inching pedal is depressed.
- The throttle mode, auto and hold switch is moved to the
centre (OFF) position.
- Shifter is not in the forward (F) position.
b Off
Put the switch in the middle position to disable the auto
mode and the hold mode.
c Hold mode
Press in the Lower end of switch to activate the Hold mode.
Hold mode is used mainly under working conditions. It is
the same as auto mode except for the following conditions:
- The inching pedal has no effect on the throttle setting.
- The hold mode is available at all engine speeds and all
forward and reverse gears.
- The service brake pedal will not suspend the operation of
hold mode when the following transmission gears are
selected:
HTE840: F1, F2, F3, R1, P & N
HTE1160: F1, F2, F3, F4, R1, R2, P & N
Instrument panels
10 Throttle control, increase or decrease and resume switch
When the throttle mode switch is not in the centre (OFF)
position, pull up or down on the throttle control switch to set
the engine speed.
During activation of either the service brakes or inching pedal,
a memory function stores the throttle mode engine rpm setting
for recall.
Throttle control switch NOTE!
Exceeding 2200 rpm can cause machine damage.
Throttle control, increase engine speed
Pull up on the switch to increase the engine speed by
approximately 100 rpm.
Pull up on the switch and hold it to increase the engine speed
by approximately 600 rpm for every second the switch is held
in place until maximum engine rpm is reached.
Throttle control, decrease engine speed
Pull down on the switch to decrease the engine speed by
approximately 100 rpm.
Pull down on the switch and hold it to decrease the engine
speed by approximately 600 rpm for every second the switch
is held in place until minimum engine rpm is reached.
Throttle control, resume engine speed
When the throttle mode, auto and hold function has been
operating and is then suspended by depressing either the
service brake or inching pedal, a memory function stores the
engine rpm setting.
To recall the throttle setting, pull down on the throttle control
switch.
11 Differential lock and unlock switch
NOTE!
Lock or unlock the differential when driving at very slow speeds,
in a straight line or if the machine is stopped. Do not lock or unlock
the differential while making a turn or when the tandem wheels
on one side are spinning. Otherwise the differential may be
damaged.
Press in the upper end of the switch to activate the
differential lock.
The amber differential lock status control lamp in the centre
instrument panel and the indicator lamp on the switch will
light up when the differential lock is in the LOCK position.
Differential lock/unlock switch and lock status lamp Activate the differential lock (LOCK position) for normal
grading operations when maximum traction is required.
Press in the lower end of the switch to deactivate the
differential lock.
Deactivate the differential lock (UNLOCK position) when
differential action is required. This will reduce strain on the
rear axle and decrease tyre scuffing when operating on
paved surfaces.
Instrument panels
12 Four-Way hazard flasher switch
Press in the upper end of the switch to activate the four-way
hazard flasher lights.
If the four-way hazard flasher lights are on, the direction
indicators do not work.
The green direction indicator control lamp in the centre
instrument panel and the red indicator lamp on the switch
will flash when the four-way hazard flasher lights are
activated.
Press in the lower end of the switch to deactivate the four
hazard flasher lights.
Four-way hazard flasher switch and direction

indicator control lamp
Park brake switch

Park brake switch location

Instrument panels
Use the park brake switch to engage and disengage the park
brake.
Press in the upper end of the switch to engage the park brake.
Push up the release button and press in the lower end of the
switch to disengage the park brake.
NOTE!
The park brake switch has a locking mechanism to help prevent
unintentionally disengaging the park brake. When disengaging
the park brake, the lower half of the switch has a red release
button that must be pushed up while pressing in the lower half of
the switch.
Park brake switch

Instrument panels
Instrument panel, side 73
Instrument panel, side
V1111173
1 Rheostat, instrument lighting 15 Rear worklights and parking lights switch

2 Fan speed control switch 16 Secondary steering system test switch
3 HVAC temperature control switch 17 Hydraulic accumulator switch
4 HVAC air mix and defroster fan switch 18 Heated mirrors switch
5 Air conditioning switch 19 Extra rear warning beacon switch
6 Lower windows wiper and washer switch 20 Single rear warning beacon switch
7 Front windshield wiper and washer switch 21 Blade lift lock pin switch
8 Rear window wiper and washer switch 22 Hydraulic control enable switch (joystick steering)
9 Ignition switch 23 Unassigned
10 Front headlights and parking lights switch 24 Unassigned
11 Cab headlights and parking lights switch 25 Unassigned
12 Front worklights and parking lights switch 26 Unassigned
13 Moldboard worklights and parking lights switch 27 Unassigned
14 Upper corner worklights and parking lights
Instrument panels
74 Instrument panel, side
1 Rheostat, instrument lighting
Turn the knob to the right (clockwise) to increase the light
intensity.
Turn the knob to the left (counter clockwise) to decrease light
intensity.
NOTE!
Headlight switch must be on.
Rheostat, instrument lighting
2 Fan speed control switch (optional equipment)

The knob controls a variable speed fan.
Turn the knob to the right (clockwise) to increase the fan
speed.
Turn the knob to the left (counter clockwise) to decrease the
fan speed.
Fan speed control switch
NOTE!
For maximum cab pressurization, turn knob to highest speed and
select the outside air position of the air mix control. See item 4
below.
3 Heater or heater and air conditioner temperature control
switch (optional equipment)
Turn the knob to the right (clockwise) to increase the air
temperature (warmer).
Turn the knob to the left (counter clockwise) to decrease the
air temperature (cooler).
Temperature control switch
4 Heater and air conditioner air mix and defroster fan switch
(optional equipment)
The knob controls air mix and defroster fan activation.
The following text describes the five switch position functions
starting at the left-hand side:
Heater and air conditioner air mix and defroster fan Recirculation air position is used for initially cooling
switch
down or rapidly warming up the cab interior.
Mixed air position mixes outside air and cab
recirculation air.
Outside air position closes the cab recirculation air valve
fully. Only outside air is circulated throughout the cab for
maximum cab pressurization. Use in dusty working
conditions.
Low defroster air fan speed closes the cab recirculation
air valve fully. Only outside air is circulated throughout the
cab while defroster fan operates at low speed.
High defroster air fan speed closes the cab
recirculation air valve fully. Only outside air is circulated
throughout the cab while defroster fan operates at high
speed.
5 Air conditioning switch (optional equipment)
Press in the upper end of the switch to activate the air
conditioner unit.
Press in the lower end of the switch to deactivate the air
conditioner unit.
NOTE!
The air conditioning switch operates only if the fan speed
control switch is activated.
Air conditioning switch
Instrument panels
6 Lower windows wiper and washer switch (optional equipment)

Turn switch knob to the right (clockwise) one indexed
position for normal wiper speed.
Lower windows wiper and washer switch knob icon Turn switch knob to the right (clockwise) two indexed
positions for fast wiper speed.
Press in (spring return) switch knob to activate the
windshield washer.
7 Front windshield wiper and washer switch (optional
equipment)
Front windshield wiper and washer switch knob
icon
Turn switch knob to the right (clockwise) two indexed
positions for fast wiper speed.
windshield washer.
NOTE!
An intermittent wiper option is available.
Turn the switch knob to the right (clockwise) one indexed
position for a delayed wiper stroke. The wiper stroke speed
is adjustable from short to long delay.
Turn the switch knob to the right (clockwise) two indexed
positions for the normal wiper speed.
Turn the switch knob to the right (clockwise) three indexed
positions for the fast wiper speed.
8 Rear windshield wiper and washer switch (optional
equipment)
Rear windshield wiper and washer switch knob Turn switch knob to the right (clockwise) two indexed
icon positions for fast wiper speed.
windshield washer.
NOTE!
An intermittent wiper option is available.
Turn the switch knob to the right (clockwise) one indexed
position for a delayed wiper stroke. The wiper stroke speed
is adjustable from short to long delay.
Turn the switch knob to the right (clockwise) two indexed
positions for the normal wiper speed.
Turn the switch knob to the right (clockwise) three indexed
positions for the fast wiper speed.
9 Ignition switch
The ignition switch has five positions:
“O” is the turned off position.
In the turned off position, the engine stops immediately and
the electrical system is deactivated.
“R” is the radio position.
When the ignition key is in the radio position:
- Current is supplied to some electrical equipment.
- The engine remains shut down.
“I” is the running position and preheating position.
When the ignition key is in the running and preheating
position:
- The electrical system is turned on.
- Engine preheating can function if conditions are met. See
page 138.
- The engine runs in this position.
Ignition switch “II” is the no electrical function.
Instrument panels
The no electrical function prevents re-engagement of starter
motor from the running and preheating position when engine
is running.
“III” is the starting position.
The starter will engage with the ignition key in the starting
position.
10 Front headlights and parking lights switch
Press in the upper end of the switch to the first position to
activate the parking lights.
Press in the upper end of the switch to the second position
to activate the front headlights and the parking lights.
Press in the lower end of the switch to deactivate the front
headlights and the parking lights.
NOTE!
Front headlights and parking lights switch If the blue control lamp in the centre instrument panel is on, it
indicates that the high beam lights are switched on.
11 Cab headlights and parking lights switch
activate the parking lights.
to activate the cab headlights and the parking lights.
Press in the lower end of the switch to deactivate the cab
headlights and the parking lights.
NOTE!
Cab headlights and parking lights switch If the blue control lamp in the centre instrument panel is on, it
indicates that the high beam lights are switched on.
12 Front worklights and parking lights switch (optional equipment)
Press in the upper end of the switch to activate the front
worklights and the parking lights.
Press in the lower end of the switch to deactivate the front
Front worklights and parking lights switch
13 Moldboard worklights and parking lights switch (optional

equipment)
Press in the upper end of the switch to activate the
moldboard worklights and the parking lights.
Extra moldboard worklights and parking lights switch
Moldboard worklights and parking lights switch
activate two moldboard worklights and the parking lights.
to activate four moldboard worklights and the parking lights.
Press in the lower end of the switch to deactivate all
Instrument panels
14 Left-hand or right-hand upper corner cab worklights and
parking lights switch (optional equipment)
Press in the upper end of the switch to activate the upper
corner cab worklights and the parking lights.
Press in the lower end of the switch to deactivate the upper
corner cab worklights and the parking lights.
Left-hand or right-hand upper corner cab

worklights and parking lights switch
15 Rear worklights and parking lights switch

Press in the upper end of the switch to activate the rear
Press in the lower end of the switch to deactivate the rear
Rear worklights and parking lights switch
16 Secondary steering system test switch (optional equipment

outside EU/EEA market)
To test the secondary steering system, see page 164.
NOTE!
Do not test the secondary steering system longer than two
minutes or a thermal cut-off device will activate.
Secondary steering system test switch
17 Blade lift and circle side shift hydraulic accumulator switch

Push up and press in the upper end of the switch to activate
the hydraulic accumulators.
hydraulic accumulators.
NOTE!
The switch has a secondary release to make it operable. It also
Blade lift and circle side shift hydraulic accumulator prevents involuntary activation of the blade lift and circle side shift
switch hydraulic accumulators.
Instrument panels
18 Heated mirrors switch (optional equipment)
Press in the upper end of the switch to activate the external
cab mirrors heater.
external cab mirrors heater.
Heated mirrors switch
19 Amber rotating warning beacon switch (optional equipment)

Press in the upper end of the switch to activate the amber
rotating beacon.
Press in the lower end of the switch to deactivate the amber
rotating beacon.
Amber rotating warning beacon switch
20 Blue rotating warning beacon switch (optional equipment)

Press in the upper end of the switch to activate the blue
rotating beacon.
Press in the lower end of the switch to deactivate the blue
rotating beacon.
Blue rotating warning beacon switch
21 Blade lift lock pin switch

Push up and press in the upper end of the switch to
disengage the blade lift lock pin.
Press in the lower end of the switch to engage the blade lift
lock pin.
The amber blade lift system status control lamp in the centre
instrument panel will light up when the blade lift lock pin is
disengaged.
Blade lift lock pin switch
NOTE!
The switch has a secondary release to make it operable. It also
prevents involuntary release of the blade lift lock pin.
22 Hydraulic control enable switch

Press the upper end of the switch to enable hydraulic
function controls.
Press the lower end of the switch to disable hydraulic
function controls.
NOTE!
Ensure the hydraulic controls are disabled when leaving the
machine or roading the machine by pressing in the lower end of
Hydraulic control enable switch the hydraulic control enable switch.
23 Unassigned
24 Unassigned
25 Unassigned
26 Unassigned
27 Unassigned
Instrument panels
Instrument panel, rear 79
Instrument panel, rear

Electrical distribution panel
1 Fuses and relays
The fuse and relay printed circuit board is located behind the
panel on the rear left-hand side of the cab. The printed circuit
board houses the fuses, relays and direction indicator flasher
unit.
Instrument panels
80 Instrument panel, rear
The fuse and relay printed circuit board

Instrument panels
Instrument panel, rear 81
2 Remote 24 V electrical power source
A remote 24 V electrical power source is located next to the
fuse and relay panel on the rear left-hand side of the cab.
Example for use is VCADS Pro equipment.
24 V power source
3 Service connection (VCADS Pro)

The service connector (VCADS Pro) is located on a bracket at
the extreme left-hand side of the fuse and relay printed circuit
board.
Contact an authorised dealer workshop.
VCADS Pro service connection
4 Remote 12 V electrical power source (with optional 24 V to 12

V equalizer and converter)
A remote 12 V electrical power source is located next to the
side console on the rear right-hand side of the cab.
12 V power source
Other controls
82 Controls
Other controls
Controls
WARNING
Controls
1 Inching pedal
2 Service brake pedal
3 Accelerator pedal
4 Transmission shifter and parking brake
(Item 4 applies only to machines with conventional steering)
1 Inching pedal
Use the inching pedal when you are starting from a complete
stop. The machine will not start to move in any forward gear
higher than 5th (HTE840 transmission) or 7th (HTE1160
transmission). The machine will not start to move in any
Other controls
Controls 83
reverse gear higher than 3rd (HTE840 transmission) or 4th
(HTE1160 transmission).
Use the brake pedal to apply the service brakes when bringing
the machine to a stop.
3 Accelerator pedal
Depress the front of the accelerator pedal to increase engine
speed.
Use the accelerator pedal to override the engine speed set by
the throttle control, increase/resume switch.
4 Transmission shifter and parking brake, conventional steering
The transmission shifter is located in the console on the
operators right-hand side. The shifter knob is equipped with a
neutral lock button. The operator may only move the shifter to
either forward (F) or reverse (R) if the neutral lock button is
depressed. For additional information, see pages 40 and
141.
Use the transmission shifter to activate and deactivate the
parking brake.
To activate the parking brake, place the shifter in the neutral
(N) position. Push the shifter to the right to engage it in the
detented park (P) position.
To deactivate the parking brake, press the neutral lock
button. Push the shifter to the left to disengage from the
detented park (P) position to the neutral (N) position.
Transmission shifter and parking brake,

conventional steering
1 Shifter knob
2 Neutral lock button
Shift positions, conventional steering
Emergency braking
In an emergency situation, the parking brake may be used.
On machines with conventional steering, move the transmission
shifter into the park (P) position. This will automatically apply the
parking brake.
On machines with joystick steering, use the park switch for
emergency braking.
Park brake switch

Other controls
84 Controls
brake.
NOTE!
the switch.
Park brake switch
Control levers, description

Steering Conventional
Other controls
Controls 85
Hydraulic control levers
1 Left-hand blade lift lever 6 Right-hand blade lift lever

2 Moldboard slide shift lever 7 Control lever for scarifier or ripper
3 Circle turn lever 8 Articulation lever
4 Circle shift lever 9 Moldboard tilt lever
5 Front wheel lean lever 10 Front-mounted attachments lever
Hydraulic control levers
WARNING
Do not use float control to lower attachments. Loss of control of
machine could result.
Detent function floating position
Machines equipped with the optional float feature allow the
moldboard and/or front-mounted attachment to "float" along the
ground by following the surface contours. For front-mounted and
rear-mounted attachment float, see front-mounted attachments
lever description below.
Either or both blade lift cylinders can be put into float to allow
independent control of each end of the moldboard.
Use moldboard float to remove snow, move loose material on
hard-packed surfaces or to level loose material onto a hard
surface. (Float only the moldboard end contacting the hard
surface.)
On machines equipped with the optional float feature:
Push forward on the appropriate lever until it locks in the detent
position.
Pull back on the appropriate lever to return it to the normal
operating position.
1 Float detent position

Other controls
86 Controls
Left-hand and right-hand blade lift
WARNING
Risk of injury or death by machine moldboard movement.
Moldboard can be quickly moved in any direction while engine is
running.
Keep all personnel safely away from moldboard when engine is
running.
These levers are located on the extreme left-hand and right-hand
sides. They control the raising and lowering action of the
moldboard.
Push forward on both blade lift levers at the same time to lower
the moldboard.
Pull back on both blade lift levers at the same time to raise the
moldboard.
Push forward on the blade lift lever for the side you wish to
lower.
Pull back on the blade lift lever for the side you wish to raise.
Moldboard slide shift lever

This lever is the third lever in from the extreme left. It controls the
left-to-right sliding action of the moldboard.
Push forward on the moldboard slide shift lever to slide the
blade to the left-hand side of the machine.
Pull back on the moldboard slide shift lever to slide the blade
to the right-hand side of the machine.
Other controls
Controls 87
Circle turn lever
This lever is the fifth lever in from the extreme left. It controls the
clockwise and counter clockwise rotation of the circle and
moldboard assembly.
Push forward on the circle turn lever to rotate the circle
counterclockwise.
Pull back on the circle turn lever to rotate the circle clockwise.
Circle shift lever

This lever is the fifth lever in from the extreme right. It controls the
circle shift function.
Push forward on the circle shift lever to move the circle and
moldboard assembly to the left.
Pull back on the circle shift lever to move the circle and
moldboard assembly to the right.
Other controls
88 Controls
Front wheel lean lever
WARNING
Risk of serious accidents.
Personnel could be seriously injured due to loss of machine
control.
Use wheel lean only while grading at low speeds.
Wheel lean at high speeds produces quick and unexpected
machine reactions.
This lever is the third lever in from the extreme right. It controls
the lean of the front wheels to the left or right for a reduced turning
radius and improved machine stability while grading.
Push forward on the wheel lean lever to lean the front wheels
to the left.
Pull back on the wheel lean lever to lean the front wheels to the
right.
Control lever for mid-mounted scarifier or ripper

This lever is the second lever in from the extreme right. The
attachments lever normally controls the mid-mounted scarifier
function.
The lever also controls the ripper if the machine is not equipped
with a mid-mounted scarifier.
Push forward on the control lever to lower the attachment.
Pull back on the control lever to raise the attachment.
Other controls
Controls 89
Articulation lever
WARNING
Using the articulated frame steering when operating on steep
slopes or when travelling on roads may cause the machine to
overturn. Always angle the articulated frame to the required
degree before entering the slope.
This lever is the fourth lever in from the extreme right. The
articulation lever controls the direction of the articulation function.
Remove the articulation lock pin before attempting to articulate
the machine.
Push forward on the control lever to articulate the machine to
the left.
Pull back on the control lever to articulate the machine to the
right.
The indicator gauge in front of the operator displays the amount
of frame articulation.
Moldboard tilt lever

This lever is the fourth lever in from the extreme left. Use the
moldboard tilt feature to ensure that the grading material rolls
freely off the blade.
Push forward on the control lever to tilt the moldboard forward.
Pull back on the control lever to tilt the moldboard rearward.
Other controls
90 Controls
Front-mounted attachments lever
This lever is the second lever in from the extreme left. It controls
the raising and lowering action of the front-mounted dozer blade/
scarifier or other attachment.
Push the control lever forward to lower the attachment.
Pull the control lever back to raise the attachment.
Auxiliary hydraulic control (optional equipment)
WARNING
Risk of crushing.
Sudden movement of attachments may cause serious injury or
death to personnel near the machine.
Quick-acting controls operate the optional attachments. Operate
the controls with care.
The optional auxiliary hydraulic control paddle levers
configuration depends on the position and type of attachments
installed. The configurations available are two to five right-hand
justified control paddle levers. Machines equipped with the
optional float feature allow the attachment to "float" along the
ground following the surface contours.
The paddle levers operate proportional effect switches. The
amount of movement of the lever corresponds to the speed and
deployment of the hydraulic cylinder controlled by the lever.
Consult your dealer for instructions on how to use hydraulic
control paddle levers 1–5 with the specific front-mounted and
rear-mounted attachments installed on your machine.
Other controls
Controls 91
Hydraulic control lock
The hydraulic control lock pin prevents accidental operation of
hydraulic control levers. Ensure that the hydraulic controls lock
pin is in the locked position when exiting or roading the machine.
Lock pin in stowed position
Lock pin in locked position
Dual joystick electronic hydraulic control

Presentation of equipment
This optional equipment combines the machine’s hydraulic and
steering system with a state of the art, electronic control system.
This gives new possibilities of operator adjustments, and comfort.
All hydraulic and steering controls are operated by this system.
NOTE!
The steering wheel is the priority steering system even when
operating the machine in joystick steering mode. Joystick steering
becomes inactive after 5 seconds of steering wheel use.
Other controls
92 Controls
Operator seat with armrests and joysticks
The control joysticks are mounted in the front of the armrests. The
armrests are adjustable and also can be moved sideways.
Joystick hydraulic control activation
The joystick hydraulic controls are active when the operator is
seated in the seat, both armrests are in the down position and the
upper end of the hydraulic control enable switch is pressed in.
Joystick hydraulic control deactivation
The joystick hydraulic controls are deactivated when the lower
end of the hydraulic control enable switch is pressed in, two
seconds after lifting either armrest or two seconds after leaving
the operator’s seat. An alarm sounds to alert the operator that the
joystick hydraulic controls will be deactivated after raising the
armrests or leaving the operator’s seat.
NOTE!
When either of the armrests are lifted, the system will deactivate.
When the operator exits the machine the system should always
be deactivated, either by lifting the armrests or by pressing the
lower end of the hydraulic control enable switch.
NOTE!
The hydraulic controls can be enabled and disabled by the
hydraulic control enable switch. See 73 for more information.
Joysticks control pattern
NOTE!
Other controls
Controls 93
Function overview — joystick pattern “A” (alternate)
Joystick pattern decal location
Pattern A decal
NOTE!
When the joystick pattern is changed, a new decal that shows the
new pattern must be installed on the pedestal instrument panel.

Other controls
94 Controls
Item Description Item Description Item Description

1 Gear down 10 Aux 2 19 Enable functions, Aux 5/Aux
6/Aux 7
2 Gear up 11 Aux 2 20 Circle turn
3 Forward/Neutral/Reverse (FNR) 12 Float activation, left joystick 21 Moldboard lift left
functions
4 Roll switch steering enable 13 Articulation 22 Moldboard slide
5 Front wheel steering 14 Wheel lean right 23 Aux 4
6 Moldboard tilt 15 Wheel lean left 24 Aux 6
7 Aux 7 16 Float activation, right joystick 25 Moldboard lift right
functions
8 Unassigned 17 Circle side shift 26 Aux 3
9 Aux 1 18 Enable functions, Aux 3/Aux 4 27 Aux 5
NOTE!
Attachments controlled by Aux1 through Aux7 may vary
depending on which auxiliary control valve connections are used
during installation of the attachments.
1 Gear down
Press the button switch once for down-shifting transmission
one gear.
2 Gear up
Press the button switch once for up-shifting transmission one
gear.
3 Forward/Neutral/Reverse (FNR) transmission shifter
F (forward)
Push the toggle switch forward for the machine to go in the
forward direction.
N (neutral)
Centre the toggle switch to put the machine in neutral.
R (reverse)
Pull the toggle switch back for the machine to go in the
reverse direction.
4 Roll switch steering enable
Roll switch steering is enabled by performing all of the
following:
Sitting in the seat
Lowering both armrests
Releasing the parking brake
Positioning the FNR in “N”
Holding in the roll switch steering enable button for 1 second
NOTE!
Hold in the roll switch steering enable button for 2 seconds to
disable roll switch steering.
5 Front wheel steering
WARNING
Risk of serious injury.
Unexpected behaviour of joystick steering could cause loss of
machine control.
The steering wheel remains functional when joystick steering is
in use. Immediately begin steering with the steering wheel if
joystick steering does not respond as expected.
Activate as described in the step above.
Move the roll switch left to turn the front wheels left.
Other controls
Controls 95
Move the roll switch right to turn the front wheels right.
NOTE!
The speed of the front wheel steering is proportional with how far
the roller is moved from its centre position.
6 Moldboard tilt
Push the momentary roll switch forward to tilt the moldboard
forward.
Pull the momentary roll switch backward to tilt the moldboard
backward.
NOTE!
The speed of the moldboard tilt is proportional with how far the
roller is moved from its centre position.
7 Aux 7
8 Unassigned
9 Aux 1
10 Aux 2
11 Aux 2
12 Float activation, left joystick functions
Float activation for left joystick functions that also have float
function (for example, moldboard lift left) are activated by this
switch. The float function is activated as follows:
a Make sure the float activation switch is not pressed.
b Move the control at least 15 per cent of maximum movement
in the intended direction for float and then press the float
activation switch.
NOTE!
Any amount less than 15 per cent of maximum control movement
will not allow the float function to be activated, in order to help
prevent unintentional activation of the float function.
13 Articulation
Move the momentary roll switch to the left to articulate the
frame left.
Move the momentary roll switch to the right to articulate the
frame right.
NOTE!
The speed of the frame articulation is proportional with how far
14 Front wheel lean right
Press in the momentary button switch to lean the front wheels
right.
15 Front wheel lean left
Press in the momentary button switch to lean the front wheels
left.
16 Float activation, right joystick functions
Float activation for right joystick functions that also have float
function (for example, moldboard lift right, Aux 1, Aux 5) are
activated by this switch. The float function is activated as
follows:
b Move the control (joystick, roll switch, etc.) at least 15 per
cent of maximum movement in the intended direction for
float and then press the float activation switch.
NOTE!
17 Circle side shift
Other controls
96 Controls
Move the momentary roll switch to the left to move the entire
circle to the left.
Move the momentary roll switch to the right to move the
entire circle to the right.
NOTE!
The speed of the circle side shift is proportional with how far the
18 Enable Aux 3/Aux 4
Press in the momentary button switch just prior to operating
Aux 3 and Aux 4 right joystick functions.
19 Enable Aux 5/Aux6/Aux 7
Press in the momentary button switch just prior to operating
Aux 5 and Aux 6 right joystick functions or Aux 7 roll switch
functions.
20 Circle turn
Move the left joystick to the left to rotate the circle
counterclockwise.
Move the left joystick to the right to rotate the circle
clockwise.
NOTE!
The speed of the circle turn is proportional with how far the joystick
is moved from its centre position.
21 Moldboard lift left
Pull back the left joystick to lift the left side of the moldboard.
Push forward the left joystick to lower the left side of the
moldboard.
NOTE!
The speed of the moldboard lift is proportional with how far the
joystick is moved from its centre position.
22 Moldboard slide
Move the right joystick to the left to slide moldboard to the
left.
Move the right joystick to the right to slide the moldboard to
the right.
NOTE!
The speed of the moldboard slide is proportional with how far the
23 Aux 4
Push and hold the Enable Aux 3/Aux 4 momentary button
switch (item 18), then push the right joystick to the left or to the
right for the Aux 4 functions.
24 Aux 6
Push and hold the Enable Aux 5/Aux 6/Aux 7 momentary
button switch (item 19), then push the right joystick to the left
or to the right for the Aux 6 functions.
25 Moldboard lift, right
Pull back the right joystick to lift the right side of the
moldboard.
Push forward the right joystick to lower the right side of the
moldboard.
NOTE!
26 Aux 3
Push and hold the Enable Aux 3/Aux 4 momentary button
switch (item 18), then push the right joystick forward or pull the
right joystick backward for the Aux 3 functions.
Other controls
Controls 97
27 AUX 5
Push and hold the Enable Aux 5/Aux 6/Aux 7 momentary
button switch (item 19), then push the right joystick forward or
pull the right joystick backward for the Aux 5 functions.
Function overview — joystick pattern “B” (factory
default)
Joystick pattern decal location
Joystick pattern B decal
NOTE!
When the joystick pattern is changed, a new decal that shows the
new pattern must be installed on the pedestal instrument panel.
Other controls
98 Controls
Function overview — joystick pattern “B” (factory
default)
Function overview — joystick pattern “B” (factory default)
Item Description Item Description Item Description

1 Gear down 10 Aux 1 19 Enable, Aux 2, 6, 7
2 Gear up 11 Aux 1 20 Front wheel steering
3 FNR transmission shifter 12 Float activation, left joystick 21 Moldboard lift, left
functions
4 Joystick steering enable 13 Articulation, frame 22 Moldboard slide
5 Front wheel lean 14 Unassigned 23 Aux 3
6 Moldboard tilt 15 Unassigned 24 Aux 6
7 Aux 4 16 Float activation, right joystick 25 Moldboard lift, right
functions
8 Aux 7 17 Circle sideshift 26 Aux 5
9 Circle turn 18 Enable, Aux 3, 4, 5 27 Aux 2
NOTE!
Attachments controlled by Aux1 through Aux7 may vary
depending on which auxiliary control valve connections are used
during installation of the attachments.
1 Gear down
Press the button switch once for down-shifting the
transmission one gear.
2 Gear up
Press the button switch once for up-shifting the transmission
one gear.
3 FNR transmission shifter
“F”
Push the toggle switch forward for the machine to go in the
forward direction.
“N”
Centre the toggle switch to put the machine in neutral.
Other controls
Controls 99
“R”
Pull the toggle switch back for the machine to go in the
reverse direction.
4 Steering enable — left joystick
Left joystick steering is enabled by performing all of the
following:
Sitting in the seat
Lowering both armrests
Releasing the parking brake
Positioning the FNR in “N”
Holding in the joystick steering enable button for 1 second
NOTE!
Hold in the joystick steering enable for 2 seconds to disable
joystick steering.
5 Front wheel lean
Push the momentary roll switch left to lean the front wheels
left.
Push the momentary roll switch right to lean the front wheels
right.
NOTE!
The speed of the front wheel lean is proportional with how far the
6 Moldboard tilt
Push the momentary roll switch forward to tilt the moldboard
forward.
Pull the momentary roll switch backward to tilt the moldboard
backward.
NOTE!
The speed of the moldboard tilt is proportional with how far the
7 Aux 4
8 Aux 7
9 Circle turn
Push the momentary roll switch to the left to rotate the circle
counterclockwise.
Pull the momentary roll switch to the right to rotate the circle
clockwise.
NOTE!
The speed of the circle turn is proportional with how far the roller
10 Aux 1
11 Aux 1
12 Float activation, left joystick functions
Float activation for left joystick functions that also have float
function (for example, moldboard lift left) are activated by this
switch. The float function is activated as follows:
b Move the control at least 15 per cent of maximum movement
in the intended direction for float and then press the float
activation switch.
NOTE!
13 Articulation, frame
Pull the momentary roll switch to the left to articulate the
frame left.
Other controls
100 Controls
Push the momentary roll switch to the right to articulate the
frame right.
NOTE!
The speed of the frame articulation is proportional with how far
14 Unassigned
15 Unassigned
16 Float activation, right joystick functions
Float activation for right joystick functions that also have float
function (for example, moldboard lift right, Aux 1A, Aux 1B,
Aux 5) are activated by this switch. The float function is
activated as follows:
b Move the control (joystick, roll switch, etc.) at least 15 per
cent of maximum movement in the intended direction for
float and then press the float activation switch.
NOTE!
17 Circle sideshift
Push the momentary roll switch to the left to move the entire
circle to the left.
Pull the momentary roll switch to the right to move the entire
circle to the right.
NOTE!
The speed of the circle shift is proportional with how far the roller
18 Enable, Aux 3, 4, 5
Press and hold the momentary button switch just prior to
operating the Aux 3 or Aux 5 right joystick functions or the Aux
4 roll switch functions.
19 Enable, Aux 2, 6, 7
Press and hold the momentary button switch just prior to
operating the Aux 2 or Aux 6 right joystick functions or the Aux
7 roll switch functions.
20 Front wheel steering — left joystick
WARNING
Unexpected behaviour of joystick steering could cause loss of
machine control.
The steering wheel remains functional when joystick steering is
in use. Immediately begin steering with the steering wheel if
joystick steering does not respond as expected.
Activate with the joystick steering enable button.
Move the left joystick left to turn the front wheels left.
Move the left joystick right to turn the front wheels right.
NOTE!
The speed of the front wheel steering is proportional with how far
the joystick is moved from its centre position.
21 Moldboard lift, left
Pull back the left joystick to lift the left side of the moldboard.
Other controls
Controls 101
Push forward the left joystick to lower the left side of the
moldboard.
NOTE!
22 Moldboard slide
Move the right joystick to the left to slide moldboard to the
left.
Move the right joystick to the right to slide the moldboard to
the right.
NOTE!
The speed of the moldboard slide is proportional with how far the
23 Aux 3
Push and hold the Enable, Aux 3, 4, 5 momentary button
switch (item 18) and push the right joystick to the left and to
the right for the Aux 3 functions.
24 Aux 6
switch (item 19) and push the right joystick to the left and to
the right for the Aux 6 functions.
25 Moldboard lift, right
Pull back the right joystick to lift the right side of the
moldboard.
Push forward the right joystick to lower the right side of the
moldboard.
NOTE!
26 Aux 5
27 AUX 2
Hydraulic control enable switch
The hydraulic control enable switch prevents accidental operation
of machine hydraulics. Ensure that the hydraulic controls are
disabled when exiting or roading the machine by pressing the
lower end of the hydraulic control enable switch.
Hydraulic control enable switch

Other controls
102 Controls
Auxiliary function, description

For your convenience, make note of which auxiliary controls each

attachment installed on the machine.
Aux 1 ________________________________________________________________________________
Aux 2 ________________________________________________________________________________
Aux 3 ________________________________________________________________________________
Aux 4 ________________________________________________________________________________
Aux 5 ________________________________________________________________________________
Aux 6 ________________________________________________________________________________
Aux 7 ________________________________________________________________________________
Other controls
Operator comfort 103
Operator comfort
Accumulators (if equipped)
Some machines are equipped with blade lift and circle shift
accumulators. The accumulators absorb shock loads and protect
the system from impact damage when the machine is working in
severe applications.
In fine grading operations where a high degree of blading
tolerance is needed, the blade lift accumulators can be isolated
from the hydraulic system.
The blade lift accumulators are controlled electrically and can be
turned on and off from inside the cab.
Radio or radio/CD player (if equipped)
A factory-installed radio or radio/CD player is available as an
option. The radio console is mounted in the headliner to the left
behind the operator. Four loudspeakers are installed in the
headliner of the cab.
Refer to the instructions supplied in the package of manuals.
Interior (dome) light

There are two cab interior (dome) light installations. They are
located on the right-hand and left-hand sides at the top of the door
posts. Each installation consists of two separate lights: a main
light and a spotlight that are controlled by separate switches.
The main light switch has three positions:
Press in the left end of the switch to activate the light.
Put switch in the centre position to deactivate the light.
Press in the right end of the switch to activate the light when
door is open.
The spotlight switch has two positions:
Press in the right end of the switch to activate the light.
Press in the left end of the switch to deactivate the light.
NOTE!
The spotlights are moveable on a spherical axis.
1 Main light
2 Spotlight
Other controls
104 Operator comfort
Service meter
The gauge shows how many hours the engine has been running.
It is located at the bottom of the right hand door post.
Rear vision system, colour (if equipped)

The rear vision camera, together with the monitor in the cab,
provides the operator with a better rearward view.
The view screen should be aligned so as to provide maximum
viewing on the area behind the machine.
Align the bottom of the view screen with the top of the hood and
centre.
The lens on the rear vision camera should be cleaned with a damp
cloth when required.
1 SB/ON. With the button pressed in to the "ON" position, the
monitor is on all the time, when the ignition key is in running
position. With the button in "SB" position, the monitor will only
be on when the gear selector is in reverse. At the same time
the distance indicator is shown. This is recommended as the
normal position in order not to disturb when operating
forwards.
2 CAM/EXT. Switches between rear vision camera and external
Rear vision monitor (in cab)
signal, e.g. video.
3 CAM/SELECT. Switches between camera one, two or three,
if equiped.
4 NOR/BLC. Improves the image in strong sun light or when it
is dark. The button must be kept pressed in. Do not make any
adjustments while operating.
5 Light sensor. The sensor registers the brightness around the
monitor and adjusts the light intensity automatically for best
possible image. Do not cover over the sensor.
6 LED. Is alight when the monitor is on. Halved brightness when
the monitor is in stand-by position.
Operator seat
WARNING
WARNING
Do not adjust the operator's seat when the machine is on the
move.
The factory-installed operator seats have been tested to meet the
seat belt anchorage standards SAE J386 Nov 97 and ISO
6683-1999 and are designed to minimize whole-body vibrations
during machine operation in the best possible way. The amount
of vibration during machine operation depends on different
factors, many of which are not related to the construction of the
Other controls
machine, such as ground conditions, speed and operating
techniques. Note the following:
Adjust the seat according to operator weight and height.
The operator weight range for the standard (not EU)
mechanical seat is: 50 kg (110 lb) to 136 kg (300 lb).
The operator weight range for the standard EU mechanical
seat is: 50 kg (110 lb) to 125 kg (275 lb).
The operator weight range for the air suspended seat is: 45 kg
(100 lb) to 136 kg (300 lb).
For additional information, see page Cab.
Choose the correct operating technique and speed for the
existing circumstances.
Seat adjustment, conventional steering
A correctly adjusted operator seat increases operator comfort,
safety and visibility. An incorrectly adjusted seat may lead to
injuries.
A Back-rest extension adjustment
The extension rods on the back-rest extension are indented
and engage at predetermined intervals.
Grasp the back-rest extension.
Pull or push the extension to the desired height.
Back-rest extension adjustment
B Lumbar adjustment
Correct lumbar adjustment helps to improve seating comfort
and increase operator efficiency. The adjustment knob is
located behind the armrest on the left-hand side of the seat
back-rest.
Turn the adjustment knob to alter the lumbar support.
Lumbar adjustment knob

Other controls
C Height/weight adjustment (optional air-suspended seat only)
The height/weight setting for the optional air-suspended seat
is adjusted by operating the rocker switch on the outside of
the left-hand armrest.
Press in on the upper end of the switch to raise seat and
compensate for more weight as the air suspension inflates.
Press in on the lower end of the switch to lower seat by
gravity (no electrical activation) as the air suspension
deflates.
NOTE!
While sitting in the seat, adjust it so that the upward and
downward movement ranges are equally distributed.
Height/weight adjustment switch
D Armrest fore/aft and height adjustment

Armrest fore/aft and height adjustment is located below and
aft of the armrests.
Loosen the bolts at the right-hand and left-hand brackets to
raise/lower and move the armrests fore/aft.
Armrest fore/aft and height adjustment
E Back-rest tilt adjustment

The adjustment handle is located at the rear left-hand side of
the cushion.
Pull the handle upward and adjust the back-rest to the
desired inclination.
Back-rest tilt adjustment

Other controls
F Seat fore/aft isolator lockout (optional air-suspended seat
only)
This control locks out the seat fore/aft feature. The control
lever is located below the back-rest tilt adjustment handle.
Pull the control lever upward to deactivate the lock.
Push the control lever downward to activate the lock.
Seat fore/aft isolator lockout
G Variable damping control (optional air-suspended seat only)

The adjustment knob is located underneath the cushion on
the left-hand side of the seat suspension bellows.
Turn the adjustment knob to alter the damping control setting
(soft, medium and hard).
Variable damping control adjustment knob
H Cushion fore/aft adjustment

The adjustment handle is located at the front left-hand side of
the cushion.
Pull the handle upward and adjust the cushion to the desired
position.
Cushion fore/aft adjustment handle

Other controls
I Height/weight adjustment (mechanical version only)
Adjust the seat for the operators weight by turning the weight
adjuster knob. The adjuster knob is located underneath the
cushion on the front of the seat suspension bellows.
While sitting in the seat, turn the knob clockwise or counter-
clockwise until the upward and downward movement ranges
are equally distributed.
Height/weight adjustment knob
J Seat fore/aft adjustment

The adjustment handle is located at the front of the cushion.
Pull the handle upward and adjust the seat to the desired
position.
Release the handle to lock the seat.
Seat fore/aft adjustment handle
K Cushion tilt adjustment

The adjustment handle is located at the front of the cushion
above the seat fore/aft adjustment handle.
Pull the handle upward and adjust the cushion to the desired
position.
Cushion tilt adjustment

Other controls
L Armrest angle adjustment
Armrest angle adjustment knobs are incorporated in the
underside of both armrests.
To adjust the armrest angle, turn the wheeled knobs
clockwise or counter-clockwise to achieve the desired angle.
Armrest angle adjustment knob

Other controls
Seat adjustment, joystick steering
A correctly adjusted operator seat increases operator comfort,
safety and visibility. An incorrectly adjusted seat may lead to
injuries.
A Back-rest extension adjustment
The extension rods on the back-rest extension are indented
and engage at predetermined intervals.
Grasp the back-rest extension.
Pull or push the extension to the desired height.
Back-rest extension adjustment
B Lumbar adjustment
Correct lumbar adjustment helps to improve seating comfort
and increase operator efficiency. The adjustment knob is
located on the left-hand side of the seat back-rest.
Turn the adjustment knob to alter the lumbar support.
Lumbar adjustment knob

Other controls
C Height/weight adjustment
The height/weight setting is adjusted by operating a push/pull
switch located on the front of the seat suspension bellows.
Press the button to raise seat and compensate for more
weight as the air suspension inflates.
Pull the button to lower seat by gravity (no electrical
activation) as the air suspension deflates.
NOTE!
While sitting in the seat, adjust it so that the upward and
downward movement ranges are equally distributed.
Height/weight adjustment button
D Armrest height adjustment

The armrest height adjustment knob is located at the back of
each armrest.
Loosen the knob to raise or lower the armrest.
Tighten the knob when armrest is at the desired position.
Armrest height adjustment

Other controls
E Armrest fore/aft adjustment
Armrest fore/aft adjustment knob is located near the outside
centre of each armrest.
Loosen knob to move the armrests fore or aft.
Tighten the knob when the armrest is at the desired position.
Armrest fore/aft and height adjustment
F Armrest horizontal pivot adjustment

The horizontal pivot adjustment lever is located near the
outside centre of each armrest.
Loosen the lever to pivot the armrest.
Tighten the lever when armrest is at the desired position.
Armrest horizontal pivot adjustment

Other controls
G Armrest inboard/outboard adjustment
The inboard/outboard adjustment screws are located at the
centre joint of each armrest.
Use a 5 mm hexagon key to loosen the screws and pivot the
armrest.
Tighten the screws when armrest is at the desired position
and torque to 4 Nm (2.95 lbf ft).
Armrest horizontal pivot adjustment
H Joystick position adjustment

The joystick pivot adjustment screw is located under the front
of each armrest.
Use a 4 mm socket to loosen the screw and adjust the
joystick position on the ball joint.
Tighten the screw when joystick is at the desired position
and torque to 16 Nm (11.8 lbf ft).
Joystick position adjustment

Other controls
I Back-rest tilt adjustment
The adjustment handle is located at the rear left-hand side of
the cushion.
Pull the handle upward and adjust the back-rest to the
desired inclination.
Back-rest tilt adjustment
J Seat fore/aft adjustment

The adjustment handle is located at the front of the cushion.
Pull the handle upward and adjust the seat to the desired
position.
Seat fore/aft adjustment handle

Other controls
K Cushion tilt adjustment
The adjustment handle is located at the front left-hand side of
the cushion.
Pull the handle upward to adjust the cushion.
Cushion tilt adjustment
L Cushion fore/aft adjustment

The adjustment handle is located at the front right-hand side
of the cushion.
Pull the handle upward and adjust the cushion.
Cushion fore/aft adjustment handle

Other controls
M Variable damping control
The adjustment knob is located underneath the cushion on
the left-hand side of the seat suspension bellows.
Turn the adjustment knob to alter the damping control setting
(soft, medium and hard).
Variable damping control adjustment knob
N Seat fore/aft isolator lockout

This control locks out the seat fore/aft feature. The control
lever is located below the back-rest tilt adjustment handle.
Pull the control lever up to deactivate the lock.
Push the control lever down to activate the lock.
Seat fore/aft isolator lockout
Seat belt
The seat belt complements the ROPS/FOPS and must be used
to protect the operator from being thrown out of the cab in case
the machine should roll over. A fastened seat belt also aids the
operator in maintaining control of the machine in case of violent
swaying or other machine movements.
The seat belt and its assemblies should be inspected regularly.
Replace the complete seat belt assembly immediately if
damage such as worn or damaged hardware, nicked or frayed
strap, buckle or retractor malfunction, or loose stitching is
found.
Replace the seat belt if the machine has been involved in an
accident where the belt has taken excessive strain to cause
deformation.
Other controls
Replace the seat belt every third year regardless of its
condition.
Modifications on the seat belt or its mountings must never be
made.
The seat belt is intended for one adult person only.
Keep the seat belt retracted when not in use.
To clean, use warm water only. No soaps or lubricants. Allow
the seat belt to dry while it is fully pulled out, before retracting
it. Make sure the seat belt is installed in a correct way.
Steering wheel, adjusting

Pedestal tilt pedal
To move the pedestal forward or backward:
Grasp the steering wheel.
Push down on the pedal located at the bottom of the
pedestal column.
Move the pedestal to the desired position and release the
pedal.
Pedestal tilt pedal
Steering wheel tilt lever

To tilt the steering wheel:
Grasp the steering wheel and lift the lever located on the
upper right-hand side of the pedestal column.
Move the steering wheel and control head to one of the four
positions.
Release the lever and ensure that it latches securely.
Steering wheel tilt lever

Other controls
118 Climate control system
Climate control system

Heating, ventilation, and air conditioning controls
NOTICE
Do not operate the machine for long periods without ventilation or
with the cab fully closed without having the fan turned on.
Poor ventilation can cause tiredness (lack of oxygen).
The controls for the HVAC are located on the right side console.
Filtered, fresh air is distributed through the upper, lower and rear
level ventilation nozzles of enclosed cabs.
Cab air temperature is controlled using the fan and temperature
controls.
Turn the switch knobs to increase or decrease the temperature
and regulate the fan speed.
Operate the air conditioning switch to turn the air conditioner
unit on and off.
Cab air distribution

1 Upper level ventilation nozzles
2 Rear level ventilation nozzles
3 Lower level ventilation nozzles
General information
In an enclosed cab, keep the doors and windows closed to
provide efficient heating and air conditioning.
Direct air flow away from unprotected skin.
Adjust the fan speed until the air flow in the cab feels
comfortable. Select the air mix knob in the third (outside air)
position for maximum cab pressurization.
Cab air distribution
Upper level ventilation nozzles are located in the door post
covers. There are three nozzles, one facing forward, one facing
centre and one facing rearward.
Rear ventilation nozzles are located on the right-hand and left-
hand sides of the rear cab wall.
Lower level ventilation nozzles are located at the bottom right-
hand and left-hand sides of the side console door post covers.
Climate control system, adjusting

Adjusting heating and ventilation without air
conditioning
The instructions below are basic recommendations. Each
operator should experiment to achieve the best possible working
environment in the cab, i.e., the right temperature without a
draught.
Other controls
Climate control system 119
For the best temperature control in the cab try to have as many
nozzles as possible open.
How to achieve ...
... maximum warmth:
All nozzles fully open
Fan control knob turned fully clockwise
Temperature control knob turned fully clockwise
Air mix knob at the outside air position
In case of misting, see "... demisting/defrosting all windows."
Fan control Temperature Air mix control
knob control knob knob
... maximum cooling:

Temperature control knob turned fully counter clockwise
Air mix knob at the outside air position

... comfortable working temperature:

Temperature control and fan control knobs regulated until the
required temperature is achieved
Air mix knob at the second (mixed air) position
... demisting all windows:
All front facing ventilation nozzles fully open and directed
towards the front side windows
All rear facing ventilation nozzles fully open and directed
towards the rear window and rear side windows
Temperature control knob turned fully clockwise
knob control knob knob Air mix knob at the appropriate defroster fan speed (low/high)
position if the machine is equipped with the defroster fan
option. For machines without this option, select the third
(outside air) position.
Provide for good ventilation
Do not operate the machine for long periods without ventilation or
with the cab fully closed without having the fan turned on.
Poorly ventilated air can cause tiredness from lack of oxygen.
Adjusting heating and ventilation with air conditioning
How to achieve...
... rapid cooling:
All ventilation nozzles fully open
Temperature control knob turned fully counter clockwise
Air mix knob at the recirculation air position
Upper end of air conditioning switch pressed in, i.e., air
conditioner unit turned on
Other controls
120 Climate control system
... demisting all windows:
All front facing ventilation nozzles fully open and directed
towards the front side windows
All rear facing ventilation nozzles fully open and directed
towards the rear window/rear side windows
Temperature control knob turned fully clockwise.
knob control knob knob Air mix knob at the appropriate defroster fan speed (low/high)
position if the machine is equipped with the defroster fan
option. For machines without this option, select the third
(outside air) position.
Upper end of air conditioning switch pressed in, i.e. air
conditioner unit turned on
NOTE!
The temperature is regulated with the temperature and fan
controls to obtain the desired temperature. Select the air mix knob
in the third (outside air) position for maximum cab pressurization.
Doors and windows
NOTICE
Make sure that the cab door is locked in the fully open or fully
closed position. It may otherwise come into contact with the front
tandem tyre and be lifted off the hinges.
The cab can also be ventilated by opening the doors and optional
hinged front or sliding side windows.
Secure the doors in the fully open position by pushing them all
the way until they latch against the stop on the side of the cab.
Open the optional hinged front windows by releasing the latch
handle. The amount of swing can be controlled by securing the
knob on the adjuster quadrant.
NOTE!
Do not operate lower wipers when front lower hinged windows are
open.
Open or close the optional sliding side windows by releasing the
side latch pins and sliding the window pane to the desired
position.
NOTE!
In certain conditions dirt and debris can build up and become
trapped between the cab vent windows and door seals, allowing
unwanted moisture and dust to enter the cab. Clean any dirt and
debris from the seals and sealing surfaces periodically to ensure
proper performance. See page 246.
121
This chapter contains rules which must be followed in order to
operate the machine safely. However, these rules are to be
followed in conjunction with laws or other national regulations
applicable to road safety and labour welfare.
Alertness, judgement and respect for applicable safety
regulations are conditions for avoiding risk of accidents.
Running-in instructions
During the first 100 hours, the machine should be operated with
particularly great care. During the running-in period it is important
to check oil and fluid levels often. Check system pressures
regularly.
Wheel bolts should be check-tightened after 8 hours operation,
see page 282.
122 Safety rules when operating
Safety rules when operating

Danger zone
The danger zone of this machine is the immediate area or zone
surrounding the machine, machine accessories or extensions
which would allow contact with the machine if the machine,
machine accessories or extensions were to move. Trained and
authorised personnel must first notify the operator of their
presence and are permitted within the danger zone during
machine operation. No other persons are permitted in the danger
zone during machine operation.
Danger zone
Safety, general
Before starting the engine and operating or maintaining the
machine, read and understand this manual.
Contact the manufacturer’s local authorised dealer or distributor
with any questions. Never guess about how to safely operate and
maintain this equipment.
Make sure the machine is operated and maintained only by
safety-conscious persons who have been authorised, properly
trained, and have the required skills and tools to do their jobs. All
personnel must be alert to, recognize, and avoid potential hazards
associated with performing their work.
Always wear or use proper personal protective equipment while
operating or maintaining the machine.
Operate the machine only when it is in good condition. Any
functional disorders, especially those affecting the safety of the
machine, must be corrected immediately. The machine must be
used in accordance with its designated use as described in this
manual.
Make sure the machine is used only as intended by the
manufacturer. Use of the machine for any other purpose, such as
for towing other vehicles or equipment, is contrary to its
designated use. See page 7 for an explanation of the intended
use. The manufacturer and local authorised dealer or distributor
cannot be held responsible for any damage resulting from such
use. The risk of such misuse lies entirely with the user.
Selection and qualification of personnel
Make sure only qualified personnel work on and with the machine.
Statutory minimum age limits must be observed.
Describe clearly the responsibilities of individuals who operate,
setup, maintain and repair the machine.
Define the machine operator responsibilities for safe machine
operation, including observing traffic regulations. The operator
should have the authority to refuse instructions by third parties
that are contrary to safe practices.
Safety rules when operating 123
Do not allow persons being trained or instructed in the operation
or maintenance of the machine to work without continuous
supervision by an experienced person.
Allow only skilled electricians, or persons instructed by them, to
work on the electrical system or electrical components of the
machine. All electrical work must be performed in accordance
with electrical engineering guidelines and local regulations.
Be sure that work on the machine chassis, brake, hydraulic and
steering systems is performed only by skilled personnel trained
to perform such work.
Organizational measures
Always make this Operator’s Manual available where the
machine is used. Store it in the compartment provided on the
machine.
Observe and instruct users of the machine in all generally
applicable legal and mandatory regulations relevant to accident
prevention and environmental protection. These compulsory
regulations may also deal with the handling of hazardous
substances, the issuing or wearing of personal protective
equipment and observing traffic regulations.
Supplement operating instructions with detailed work instructions
for specific work activities and locations.
Always be sure that persons who operate or work on the machine
have read the operating instructions and especially, the safety
information. Reading the instructions after work has begun is too
late. This is especially important for persons who only
occasionally work on the machine, such as during set up or
maintenance.
Make sure personnel work in compliance with the operating
instructions and are alert to risks and safety factors.
Be aware of personal safety hazards. Always tie back or
otherwise secure long hair and wear close-fitting garments. Avoid
wearing jewellery such as rings, bracelets and necklaces. Injury
may result from clothing, hair or jewellery being caught in the
machinery.
Use personal protective equipment whenever required by work
circumstances or by law.
Observe all safety instructions in this Operator’s Manual and on
decals attached to the machine.
Be sure all safety warning and instruction decals attached to the
machine are complete and readable.
Stop the machine immediately in the event of any malfunction.
Report the malfunction to the proper supervisory personnel. The
continued operation of a machine that is not working properly may
cause extensive damage to the machine or significantly increase
hazards to operating personnel due to abnormal operating
conditions.
Never perform service or maintenance on the machine in any
manner other than that which is described in this manual.
Never make any modifications, additions or conversions to the
machine without the manufacturer’s approval in writing. This
applies to the installation and adjustment of safety devices and
valves as well as to welding work on load-bearing components.
Always adhere to prescribed intervals listed in the operating
instructions and maintenance instructions for routine checks,
inspections and maintenance procedures. Performing scheduled
preventive maintenance consistently will extend the life of the
machine.
Observe all fire fighting procedures.
Mandatory safety measures
Never clean, lubricate or service the machine when it is running.
Do not operate the machine while under the influence of drugs or
alcohol.
Always use personal protective equipment, such as hard hats,
safety shoes, eye and ear protection, while operating or
maintaining the machine.
Do not wear radio or music headphones while operating the
machine.
Do not wear jewellery while operating the machine.
Replace any guards and shields removed, mount them securely
and clear all maintenance tools before starting the engine after
maintenance.
Contact supervisor, or any manufacturer’s authorised dealer or
distributor, if there are any questions about the operation or
maintenance of this machine. Never guess – always check!
Remember, failure to adhere to these safety instructions may
result in serious injury or even death.
Pre-start inspection
Inspect the machine daily. Ensure that routine maintenance and
lubrication procedures are dutifully performed.
Repair or replace any malfunctioning, broken or missing parts.
Refer to the preventive maintenance schedule located in
maintenance instructions in this manual.
Verify that all safety warning and instruction decals are in place
and readable. These instructions are as important as any other
equipment on the machine. Refer to the decal location drawing in
the safety section of this operation and maintenance manual at
safety related decals.
Ensure that all safety and protective devices are in place and in
good working order.
Never fill the fuel tank with the engine running or while the
machine is located near an open flame. Smoking is prohibited
within 15 m (50 feet) of the machine while refuelling.
Always fill the fuel tank either outside or in an adequately
ventilated area.
Always wipe up any spilled fuel.
Check for any maintenance and repair warning tags placed on
the machine. Do not operate the machine until repairs have been
made and the warning tags have been removed by authorised
personnel.
Remove any dirt, debris or foreign material from the operator
platform to reduce the danger of slipping.
Know the location of the emergency stop switches and safety
devices on the machine.
Know the capabilities and limitations of the machine with respect
to speed, gradeability, steering and braking.
Be aware of the dimensions of the machine. This includes the
height and width of the overall machine, as well as the transporter
dimensions and weight.
Safety when working in dangerous areas

Check for dangerous conditions in the work area, such as holes,
banks, underground culverts, manhole covers, water melt pits, or
kerb and street boxes. Avoid any operation that might sacrifice
safety.
This machine should only be brought into service where the
machine is applicable to the situation and conditions of the
construction site. This includes the stability and condition of the
ground, width of the driving lane, and any objects which would
interfere with the movement of the machine both above ground
level and below ground level such as kerbs or ditches.
Safety when starting

Always use hand rails and steps to get on and off the machine.
Always maintain a three-point contact when climbing on or off the
machine as shown.
Always wear the seat belt when operating the machine.
Read and follow all safety warning and instruction decals.
Turn on the lighting system in conditions of poor visibility and after
dark.
Check the surrounding area for pedestrians. Make sure no one is
in danger or at risk before starting the engine or setting the
machine in motion.
Before attempting to start the engine, ensure that the FSR lever
is in the stop position.
Watch the indicators during start-up and shutdown procedures in
accordance with the operating instructions. See operating
instructions in this manual.
Before starting the engine, ensure that the parking brake is
engaged. On machines with conventional steering, see 82 for
parking brake control details. On machines with joystick steering,
see page 83 for parking brake control details.
Start the engine only while in the operator seat.
Three-point contact
Safety when operating

Avoid any operating mode or procedure that might sacrifice
safety.
Avoid any operation that might risk machine stability.
Ensure that all necessary precautions are taken to ensure that
the machine is used only when in a safe and reliable condition.
Operate the machine only if all safety and protective devices
originally provided by the manufacturer are in place and in good
condition. This includes removable safety devices, emergency
shutdown equipment, soundproofing elements and exhausts.
Make sure there is sufficient clearance when moving the machine
through tunnels, underpasses, and under power lines.
Make sure bridges are rated to hold the weight of the machine
before crossing them.
Check the machine at least once each shift for damage and report
damage to your supervisor. If the machine is not operating
properly, shut down the engine immediately. The continued
operation of a machine that is not working properly may cause
additional damage to the machine or significantly increase the
hazards to operating personnel due to abnormal operating
conditions.
Check the surrounding area for pedestrians. Make sure no one is
in danger or at risk before starting the engine or setting the
machine in motion.
Check that braking, steering, signalling and lighting systems are
fully functional before moving the machine or starting work.
Check that accessories have been safely stowed away before
setting the machine in motion.
Observe all the valid traffic regulations when traveling on public
roads. Always make sure the machine is in a condition that meets
those regulations.
Always keep a safe distance away from the edges of building pits
and slopes.
Always secure the machine to prevent inadvertent movement and
unauthorised use before leaving it.
Provide an observer when loading and unloading the machine
from a transporter or lifting it with a crane.
Make sure no person or obstruction is in your line of travel before
moving the machine.
Look in all directions before changing your direction of travel.
Never climb on or off the machine while it is operating or moving.
Use extreme caution and be observant when operating the
machine in close quarters or in congested areas.
Never carry passengers.
Know the hand signals used (required) for particular machine
operations and machine travel, and know who has the
responsibility for signalling.
Know the area in which you are working. Familiarise yourself with
work site obstructions and any other potential hazards in the area.
Always remain seated with the seat belt on during machine
operations, travelling or loading and unloading.
Close all sound baffles during operation.
Do not work in the vicinity of overhanging banks or on grades that
could cause the machine to slide or roll over.
Avoid side hill travel. Always operate up and down slopes. Never
change to a lower gear on a slope; always change to a lower gear
before reaching a slope. Always keep the transmission shifter in
low speed range close to the stop position when climbing or
descending hills.
Never allow anyone to stand within the machine’s articulation
area when the engine is running.
Control the machine travel speed with the transmission shifter.
Control engine speed with the accelerator pedal.
Do not tow the machine except as explained in the operating
instructions of this manual.
Do not run the engine in a closed building for an extended length
of time. Exhaust fumes can kill.
Read and follow all safety warning and instruction decals.
Emergency cab exit
On machines with enclosed cabs, in case of emergency and a
blockage of the normal cab exit occurs, exit the cab through the
window identified with the “Emergency Exit” label, located at the
right side of the cab. Exit through the front or rear window if
blockage occurs at the normal and emergency exits.
Machine operator safety
Always use the seat belt.
Always sit in the operator's seat with the seat belt fastened when
starting the engine and when operating levers and switches.
Check that the seat belt is not worn, see page 248.
The machine must be operational. Faults which can cause
accidents must be corrected.
Suitable clothing for safe handling and a hard hat should be worn.
A loose mobile telephone must not be used, as it may interfere
with important electronics. The mobile telephone must be
connected to the electrical system of the machine and have a
fixed external aerial installed according to the instructions of the
manufacturer, see 21, and 21.
Keep your hands away from areas where there is a risk of
crushing, e.g. covers, door and windows.
Use three-point contact — two hands and one foot or two feet and
one hand — and steps and handholds when entering or leaving
the machine. Always face the machine – do not jump!
All doors, safety gates, ladders and cover plates must be secured
during machine operations.
Vibration (shaking) which arises when operating may be harmful
to the operator. Reduce vibration by:
Three-point contact
- adjusting the seat and tightening the seat belt

- adapting the travelling speed.
The machine is designed for the protection of the machine
operator and it meets the requirements for roll over protective
structures (ROPS) according to the testing standard ROPS.
Therefore, hold firmly onto the steering wheel if the machine
should roll over — do not jump!
The machine is designed for the protection of the machine
operator and it meets the requirements for falling objects
Seatbelt
protective structures (FOPS) if so equipped, the weight of which
agrees with testing methods according to FOPS.
Only walk and stand on surfaces which have slip protection.
Do not enter or leave the machine during a thunderstorm.
- If you are not on the machine, keep a good distance away from
the machine until the thunderstorm has passed.
- If you are on the machine, remain seated with the machine
stationary until the thunderstorm passes. Do not touch any
controls or anything made of metal.
Safety when boost starting
WARNING
Risk of explosion.
Boost-start can cause flammable gas emission from the battery.
Sparks near the battery can cause an explosion resulting in
serious injury.
Avoid short-circuits, open flame or electrical spark. The machine
being boost-started must not come in contact with the supplying
machine.
NOTE!
Never boost-start a frozen battery, it will explode.
Be aware that lead acid batteries generate explosive gases while
charging. Keep sparks, flames and lighted smoking materials
away from batteries.
Always wear eye protection when working on or near batteries,
and never lean over the battery during the boost-start.
Keep metal objects away from the top of the battery — rings,
watch straps, hand tools, clips or stray wires just brushing a
battery post can cause a massive spark, possibly exploding the
battery and releasing battery acid.
WARNING
Risk of crushing.
Unexpected machine movement can cause serious injury.
Never boost-start the engine by connecting directly to the starter
motor.
Follow these procedures when boost-starting the engine.
1 Connect the positive (+) terminal of the booster battery to the
positive (+) terminal of the discharged battery.
2 Connect the negative (–) terminal of the booster battery to the
best ground point on the machine, away from the battery.
3 Follow all recommended engine starting procedures.
4 Remove the booster cables in the reverse order of their
connection as soon as the engine has started.
Safety when stopping

Always park the machine on solid level ground. If this is not
practical, park the machine at a right angle to the slope and block
the wheels.
Reduce the travel speed by down-shifting transmission shifter. To
stop the machine, apply the service brake pedal. Apply the
parking brake. Allow accelerator pedal to return engine to idle.
Turn ignition switch to off, and lock all lockable compartments.
Always be sure that all control switches are in the off position and
that the engine is shut down before leaving the machine.
Always retract the seat belt fully before leaving the operator
station.
Always mount and dismount the machine using walkways, steps
and handrails provided. Never jump from the operator platform to
the ground.
Always maintain a three-point contact when climbing on or off the
machine, see page 125.
Use proper flags, barriers, and warning devices to warn others of
the machine, especially when parking in areas of heavy traffic.
Safety when transporting, towing and roading

Securing the machine for transport – When securing the machine
for transport, use only the designated tie-down locations to fasten
the disabled machine to the transport vehicle. Decals on the
machine indicate the locations to tie the machine down. Use only
properly rated tie-downs and securing equipment. Place blocks
at the front and rear of the machine while securing to the transport
vehicle. If the transport vehicle will be stationary for an extended
period of time without being moved, do not remove the blocks until
transporting the machine.
Use only appropriate means of transport and lifting gear of
adequate capacity.
Entrust to experienced persons only the fastening of loads and
the instructing of crane operators. The personnel giving the
instructions must be within sight or sound of the operator.
Do not attempt to load the machine on the transporters without
knowledge and experience with the operation of the machine.
Always use a ramp when loading the machine on the transporter.
Be sure ramps are of adequate strength, low angle and proper
height and width.
Be sure that the transporter is on level ground when loading the
machine.
Use proper blocks in front and rear of the wheels of the transporter
when loading the machine.
Ensure the transporter is on level ground. Approach the
transporter loading ramps squarely to make sure the machine
does not drop off the side of the ramp.
Keep the transporter deck clean of clay, oil, mud, ice, frost and
other material that can become slippery.
Secure the machine once it is loaded onto the transporter. Block
the drum, wheels, or tracks of the machine with appropriate
chocks.
Shut down the engine, apply the parking brake and lock all
lockable compartments.
Ensure the articulation lock is secured in the locked position
before transporting the machine.
Know the overall height of the machine and transporter. Observe
height and weight regulations, and be sure you can safely pass
over bridges and under overhead structures. Refer to operating
instructions of this manual for proper brake release procedures.
Obey all traffic regulations and be sure that the proper clearance
flags, lights and warning signs, including the “Slow Moving
Vehicle” emblem, are properly displayed when moving the
machine on public access roads.
Know the approximate stopping distance at any given speed.
Never turn corners at excessive speeds. Look in all directions
before reversing direction of travel.
Position the machine on the transporter centered from side to side
and apply the brake.
See page 174 for specific towing instructions for this machine.
Safety when operating on public roads

Road signs, traffic restricting arrangements and other safety
devices, which may be required when considering traffic speed
and intensity or other local conditions, must be used. When
moving a machine with a suspended load, special attention must
be observed. When required, a signalman must be used.
Rotating warning beacon may be used:
- on vehicle during road maintenance work or snow clearing
- on attached or connected implement, which is wider than the
vehicle itself
- when the vehicle constitutes a hindrance or impedes other
traffic
- when working on or by the side of the roadway.
Electrocution hazard
DANGER
Risk of electrocution
Working near or making contact with overhead power lines may
lead to electrical flash-over and electrocution.
Always keep the minimum clearance from overhead power lines.
Operating the machine near overhead power lines requires
special precautions. Electrical flash-over may occur and cause
serious injury to the operator and may also damage the machine
and attachments even at great distances from the overhead
power lines. See page Power lines, minimum clearance for
overhead power line minimum clearances and procedures when
operating near overhead power lines.
Safety during maintenance

Follow the start-up and shutdown procedures set forth in the
operating instructions before performing any work on the
machine. This includes the operation, conversion or adjustment
of the machine and its safety oriented devices, and any work
related to maintenance, inspection and repair.
Ensure that the maintenance area is adequately secured as
outlined below.
Secure machine in the service position if the engine is shut down
for maintenance and repair work. See page 232 for procedure to
secure the machine in the service position.
Check de-energized parts for the presence of power. Ground or
short circuit any parts found to contain residual power. Insulate
adjacent live parts and elements.
Check and inspect machine electrical equipment at regular
intervals. Faults, such as loose connections or scorched cables,
must be corrected immediately.
Lifting the machine – When raising the machine off the ground,
apply the parking brake. Install the articulation lock, if equipped.
Attach the lifting apparatus only to the machine’s designated
lifting points using properly rated lifting straps, cables or chains.
Use spreader bars to ensure equal weight distribution during
lifting as well as to avoid contact with the machine.
Use care when attaching and securing lifting tackle to individual
parts and large assemblies being moved for replacement
purposes to avoid the risk of accidents. Use lifting gear that is in
proper operating condition and with adequate lifting capacity.
Never work or stand under suspended loads.
NOTE!
Lifting the machine must only be carried out by trained personnel.
Perform maintenance and repair work only if the machine is
positioned on stable and level ground and has been secured to
prevent movement.
Keep all platforms and standing surfaces free from debris. Keep
them clean!
Always use the correct tools and workshop equipment when
performing maintenance on the machine.
Clean the machine at the end of each workday while it is still
warm.
Clean the machine, especially connections and threaded unions,
of any traces of oil, fuel or preservatives before carrying out
maintenance or repair. Never use aggressive detergents. Use lint
free cleaning cloths.
Cover or tape all openings which, for safety and functional
reasons, must be protected against water, steam or detergent
penetration before cleaning the machine with water, steam jet
(high pressure cleaning) or detergents. Special care must be
taken with electric motors and switch gear cabinets.
Ensure during cleaning of the machine that temperature sensors
do not come into contact with hot cleaning agents.
Remove all covers and tapes applied for that purpose after
cleaning the machine.
Examine all fuel, lubricant and hydraulic oil lines for leaks, loose
connections, chafe marks and damage after cleaning.
Repair or replace faulty parts immediately.
Tighten any threaded connections that have been loosened
during maintenance and repair.
Replace and check any safety devices removed during setup,
maintenance or repair activities. Do this immediately upon
completion of the maintenance and repair activity.
Avoid servicing, cleaning, or examining the machine with the
engine running, whenever possible.
Do not perform service or maintenance on the machine unless it
is secured to prevent movement, see page 232. Place the
articulation lock in the locked position, if equipped. Block the
drum, wheels, or tracks of the machine with appropriate chocks.
Never fill the fuel tank of the machine with the engine running. Do
not permit sparks, open flames or smoking within 15 m (50 ft) of
the machine while refuelling. Always wipe up any spilled fuel.
Do not alter the engine governor settings from those indicated in
the engine manual and the engine option plate.
Always replace damaged or lost warning and instruction decals.
It is dangerous to operate the machine without these decals.
Refer to the parts manual for the proper location and part number
of all decals.
Disconnect the battery cables when working on the electrical
system.
Be sure the battery area is well ventilated (clear of fumes) should
it be necessary to connect a booster battery or battery charger.
Fumes from the battery can ignite by a spark and explode.
Be sure the battery charger is turned off when making the
connections if battery charging is required.
Inspect and check the machine’s electrical equipment at regular
intervals. Faults, such as loose connections or scorched cables,
must be corrected immediately.
Visually inspect hydraulic hose assemblies at regular intervals.
Replace hydraulic hose assemblies if they show signs of chafing,
cracking, brittleness, deformation, blistering, leakage, fitting
separation, corrosion or other damages which may affect their
function and strength.
Inspect hydraulic hoses and threaded connections regularly.
Look for leaks and signs of damage. Replace faulty parts
immediately.
Remember that hot hydraulic oil will cause serious burns. Wait for
hot hydraulic oil to cool down before disconnecting hydraulic oil
lines.
Do not work on hydraulic oil lines while the engine is running and
the system is under pressure. The hydraulic oil remains under
pressure long after the engine has been shut down. Do not work
on any hydraulic hose or fitting until the hydraulic oil pressure has
been relieved correctly.
Never use your hands to check for hydraulic leaks when
inspecting an hydraulic system. Use a piece of cardboard to
check for leaks, and always wear gloves and eye protection while
checking.
Remember that hydraulic oil penetration from a pin-hole leak can
cause serious injury or death. Get immediate treatment if
hydraulic oil has been injected under your skin.
Depressurise the hydraulic system sections to be serviced before
servicing them. Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for the
specific equipment involved.
Lay and fit hydraulic lines properly. Ensure that no connections
are interchanged. The fittings, lengths and quality of the hoses
must comply with the technical requirements.
Observe all product related safety regulations when handling oil,
grease and other chemical substances.
Ensure that all consumable and replaced parts are disposed of in
an environmentally safe manner and in accordance with local
guidelines and regulations.
Use only original fuses with the specified current rating. Shut
down the engine immediately if trouble occurs in the electrical
system.
Allow only a skilled electrician, or instructed person working under
the supervision and guidance of a skilled electrician, to work on
the electrical system of the machine. All work must be done in
accordance with electrical engineering guidelines and local
regulations.
Remove electrical power to components of the machine before
performing inspection, maintenance and repair work. Follow
established lockout, tagout procedures.
Be careful when handling hot fluid or parts to avoid burning or
scalding. Wear appropriate personal protective equipment.
Use only genuine original equipment manufacturer’s replacement
parts. This will protect the warranty and ensure the safe operation
and optimum performance of the machine.
Suffocation hazard
DANGER
Risk of suffocation.
Exhaust fumes from internal combustion engines contain carbon
monoxide, a colourless, odorless gas, which is fatal when inhaled
in a confined area.
Avoid internal combustion engine operation in any area without
proper ventilation.
Breathing exhaust fumes from internal combustion engines can
lead to loss of consciousness, carbon monoxide poisoning and
suffocation. Avoid breathing exhaust fumes.
Never operate internal combustion engines in an enclosed area
with poor ventilation.
Failure to obey this instruction could result in carbon monoxide
poisoning, suffocation and death.
Safety when welding

NOTE!
Risk of machine damage.
Before starting any electric welding, disconnect the battery
connections. Disconnect connections to the control units (ECU).
Connect the welding unit's ground cable as close as possible to
the welding point.
Proper welding procedures are necessary in order to avoid
damage to the electronic controls and to the bearings.
Allow only qualified and authorised personnel to weld, flame cut
or perform any grinding work on the machine. There may be a risk
of explosion and fire.
Clean the machine before starting welding, flame cutting and
grinding operations. Remove dust and other flammable
substances and make sure that the premises are adequately
ventilated to avoid the risk of fire and explosion.
Make sure all welding work is carried out by fully trained,
instructed, qualified and authorised personnel. All regulations and
safety stipulations must be strictly adhered to as well as the
generally recognised standards for performing welding work.
Disconnect the battery cables when welding on the machine.
Ensure the clamp on the earth cable (ground) has a good contact
near the joint to be welded.
Ensure that the welding current does not flow through any
bearings.
Safety when handling hazardous materials
The following information is provided to assist the machine
owners and operators. Further information may be obtained by
contacting the local manufacturer’s authorised distributor. The
following substances are contained in or emitted by this machine
and may be hazardous to health if exposed to or used incorrectly.
Substance Precaution
Avoid ingestion, skin contact and
Antifreeze breathing fumes
Hydraulic oil Avoid ingestion, skin contact and
breathing fumes
Engine lubricating oil Avoid ingestion, skin contact and
breathing fumes
Preservative grease Avoid ingestion, skin contact and
breathing fumes
Rust preventive Avoid ingestion, skin contact and
breathing fumes
Engine fuel Avoid ingestion, skin contact and
breathing fumes
Battery electrolyte Avoid ingestion, skin contact and
breathing fumes
SAE gear oil Avoid ingestion, skin contact and
breathing fumes
The following substances may be produced during the operation
of this machine and may be hazardous to health.
Substance Precaution
Engine exhaust fumes Avoid breathing fumes
Engine exhaust fumes Avoid buildup of fumes in confined
spaces
Electric motor dust Avoid breathing during maintenance
(brushes, insulation)
Battery disposal
WARNING
Risk of chemical burns.
Contact with battery acid causes serious chemical burns.
Always wear personal protective gloves, goggles and clothing
when handling batteries.
Batteries contain substances dangerous to your health and the
environment. Dispose of batteries marked with the symbol shown
according to local and national regulations. Remember battery
electrolyte is corrosive. Do not dispose as general trash.
Battery disposal symbol
Travelling on public roads
The use of SMV-plate (Slow Moving Vehicle) is recommended.
It should be placed in a position at the rear on the machine
where it is clearly seen, not inside the rear window or any other
window.
All working lamps and any rotating warning beacon should be
switched off.
Hazard flashers must not be used.
SMV-plate
Periodic replacement of critical parts for safety

To ensure safety at all times when operating or driving the
machine, the operator of the machine must always carry out
periodic maintenance. To further improve safety, the operator
should also carry out periodic replacement of the parts given in
the table.
These parts are closely connected to safety and fire prevention.
With these parts, the material changes as time passes, or they
easily wear or deteriorate. However, it is difficult to judge the
condition of the parts simply by periodic maintenance, so they
should always be replaced after a fixed time has passed,
regardless of their condition. It is necessary to ensure that they
always maintain their function completely.
However, if these parts show any abnormality before the
replacement interval has passed, they should be repaired or
replaced immediately. If the hose clamps show any deterioration,
such as deformation or cracking, replace the clamps at the same
as the hoses. When replacing the hoses, always replace the O-
rings, gaskets, and other related parts at the same time. Ask your
Volvo dealer when replacing the critical parts for safety.
Inspection interval Item

Weekly Fuel/hydraulic/brake hose - leakage of hose and end
fittings
Monthly Fuel/hydraulic/brake hose - leakage, damage of hose
and end fittings
Yearly Fuel/hydraulic/brake hose - leakage, damage,
deformity and aging of hose and end fittings
Safety critical parts for periodic replacement Replacement interval

Engine Fuel hose Every 4 years or 4000 hours, which occurs first
Turbocharger
lubricating oil hose
Seat belt Every 3 years
Measures before operating 137
Measures before operating

After operating
Fill the fuel tank, as this will counteract the formation of
condensation water.
WARNING
For safety, observe the following rules.
- Read this Operator's Manual.
- Carry out the daily service, see page 302. In cold weather,
make sure the freezing point of the coolant is sufficiently low
and the lubricating oil is intended for winter use.
- Check for faulty, loose parts or leaks, which can cause
damage. Repair or replace as necessary.
V1065709
- Check for cracks on the frame.
- Check the condition of the attachments (if equipped).
- Check the steps and handholds for damage or loose parts.
Repair or replace as necessary.
- Clean the debris around the engine, battery and coolers.
- Check the level of hydraulic oil, refill if required.
- Check the battery disconnect switch is switched on.
- Remove the articulation pin and stow it properly.
- Make sure the fire extinguisher, if equipped, is fully charged.
- Check that hoods and covers are closed and secure.
- Check the wheels are not chocked or obstructed.
- Remove ice from windows, if necessary.
- Adjust and clean the mirrors.
- Inspect the working and other lights for proper operation.
- Check fuel level.
- Check for malfunction of the gauges in the instrument panel.
- Adjust the operator seat and fasten the lap type seat belt. The
seat belt must fit snug and low around the hips. The tether strap
must be adjusted to suit the seat suspension. See page 104.
- Check there are no persons in the vicinity of the machine.
- Check the back-up alarm for proper function (if equipped).
- Perform daily service brake checks. See page 278.
Temperature, ambient air

The defined operating range of this machine is –40 °C (–40 °F) to
+50 °C (+122 °F).
138 Starting engine
Starting engine
WARNING
The engine may only be started with the ignition in the cab.
1 Ensure the parking brake is engaged.
2 Insert the ignition key in the switch. Turn the key clockwise to
the running position (I) so that a system test can take place,
the duration of which is 4–5 seconds.
3 At the same time ensure that all control lamps light up and that
the gauges show a reading.
4 Turn the ignition key clockwise to the starting position (III).
Release the key when the engine starts.
5 If the engine does not start, turn the key counter clockwise to
the (O) position before making a new starting attempt. Leave
the engine running at low idle for approx. 30 seconds to ensure
satisfactory lubrication of components like the turbocharger.
6 Ensure that all control and warning lamps are extinguished.
Starting engine with electrical preheat
WARNING
This machine is equipped as standard with an electrical
preheating element. Starting fluid (ether etc.) must not be used
on machines equipped with an electrical preheating element.
The preheating function will automatically activate when the
coolant temperature is below 0 °C (32 °F) on G930, G940, G960
& G946 models. For G970, G990 & G976 models the preheating
function will activate when it is 12 °C (54 °F) at sea level.
Activating temperature varies depending on barometric pressure.
1 Insert the ignition key in the switch. Turn the key clockwise to
the running position (I).
2 The preheating is now activated and the control lamp lights up.
After 10–50 seconds (the time depends on the coolant
temperature), the preheating element will automatically
deactivate and the lamp will go out.
NOTE!
If the preheat control lamp continues to light for longer than 50
seconds, the preheating circuit is still connected. In this case, do
not operate the machine as there is a risk of overheating. Have
the function of the element checked by a qualified service
technician.
Starting engine 139
3 When the control lamp goes out, turn the ignition key clockwise
to the starting position (III). Release the key when the engine
starts.
4 The afterheating function automatically activates if the coolant
temperature is below 0 °C (+32 °F) G930, G940, G960 & G946
models. For G970, G976 & G990 models the afterheating
function will activate when it is 12 °C (54 °F) at sea level. Acti-
vating temperature varies depending on barometric pressure.
Duration of afterheat is related to coolant temperature; 20
seconds minimum to 200 seconds maximum. Afterheat
function starts when the engine has reached the running state
(above 750 rpm with the ignition key in the running position).
When the afterheat function is activated, the preheat control
lamp lights up.
NOTE!
When the engine reaches a running state, the preheater could be
re-activated for afterheat. If the preheat control lamp continues to
light for longer than 200 seconds, the afterheating circuit is still
connected. In this case do not operate the machine, as there is a
risk of overheating. Have the element checked by a qualified
service technician.
NOTE!
Using immersion heaters to warm coolant and oil in the engine is
highly recommended. If possible store the machine inside a
heated facility.
Leave the engine running at low idle for 30 seconds so that the
oil in the engine, transmission and hydraulic system has warmed
up and become sufficiently fluid to provide proper lubrication.
NOTICE
Racing the engine immediately after it has been started may
damage the turbocharger.
Ether cold start (optional equipment)
Engine ether cold start will automatically actuate when the engine
temperature is below 0° C (32° F).
NOTE!
Machines equipped with either cold start will not have a
preheating element or switch on the console. The ether cold start
bottle is on the left-hand side of the rear of the hydraulic tank.
Perform starting of the engine according to steps 1 to 6 listed
above.
Ether cold start option
Fuel heater, optional equipment

A fuel heater option is available for machines which operate in
cold climates. The heater is controlled by an internal thermostat
and operates when the ignition switch is in the running (I) position.
140 Starting engine
Cold weather start-up, transmission and hydraulic
systems
When operating in temperatures below -10 °C (14 °F), store the
machine inside a heated facility or use immersion heaters in the
transmission case and hydraulic tank. You can use the
recommended oils provided the following conditions are met:
- Before start-up, the oil is preheated to a temperature above the
minimum value for the indicated oil and viscosity range.
- The operating temperature stays above the minimum value in
the applicable range.
See page 307.
Failure to comply with these requirements may result in a
malfunction or a reduced life of the transmission or hydraulic
components.
Unload function
To decrease the hydraulic load during cold weather start up, the
main hydraulic pump and hydraulic fan pump are limited to a
minimum displacement when the ignition key is turned to the
starting position (III).
Activation of the unload function will occur if the hydraulic oil
temperature is below 10 °C (50 °F). The text, “INFO...hydraulic
unload on” -, appears on the display unit.
When the engine is started and the ignition key is in the running
position (I), a time delay is started to keep the unload function
activated. The length of delay is dependent on the hydraulic oil
temperature. Each Celsius degree from 10 °C to 0 °C will add 1
second of delay. Each Celsius degree from -1 °C and lower will
add 2 seconds of delay. The unload function is deactivated after
the delay time has passed.
NOTE!
If oil in the hydraulic circuit is cold, hydraulic functions may move
slowly. Do not attempt to operate the hydraulic functions until the
hydraulic oil is warmed up otherwise hydraulic pump damage may
result.
Cycle all hydraulic cylinders through their working range several
times until the hydraulic functions operate normally.
Gear shifting 141
Gear shifting
Steering Conventional
WARNING
Risk of runaway machine.
Leaving the transmission in neutral when driving downhill could
lead to loss of machine control and fatal accidents.
Always have a forward gear engaged when driving downhill.
NOTICE
cause damage to the power transmission.
Foot pedal controls

1 Inching pedal
3 Accelerator pedal
Starting from a complete stop

When starting from a stop, always use the inching pedal.
NOTE!
The inching pedal requires very low effort to operate, to reduce
operator fatigue. Be careful the first couple of times before getting
accustomed to the comfort of the pedal operation.
NOTE!
The machine will not start to move in any forward gear higher than
5th (HTE840 transmission) or 7th (HTE1160 transmission). The
machine will not start to move in any reverse gear higher than 3rd
(HTE840 transmission) or 4th (HTE1160 transmission).
142 Gear shifting
Starting out
1 Raise the moldboard and all attachments off the ground.
2 If roading the machine, position the moldboard inside the
tyres. Steer the front wheels to make sure they do not strike
the moldboard.
3 Depress the inching and service brake pedals.
4 Press the transmission shifter neutral lock button. Move the
shifter to the left to disengage the lever from the park (P)
position. This action releases the parking brake.
5 Press the neutral lock button and move the shifter into either
the forward (F) or reverse (R) position.
6 Select the starting gear by nudging the shifter to the right or to
the left. Digital text in the centre instrument display unit
indicates which gear the transmission is in.
7 Release the service brake pedal, then slowly release the
inching pedal and accelerate as required.
NOTE!
Do not rest your feet on the inching or service brake pedals when
driving the machine. This can cause unnecessary wear and
premature failure.
Centre instrument panel display/transmission

shifter
A Forward
B Reverse
C Neutral lock button
Changing gears
WARNING
Risk of fatal accidents.
Coasting the machine down a steep grade will cause excessive
speed and loss of machine control resulting in accidents with
serious injury or death.
Always keep gear shifter engaged.
Never engage inching pedal while going down a steep grade.
After the machine is in motion, you do not have to use the inching
pedal to change gears. The best shift quality can be obtained by
maintaining consistent engine speed (rpm).
Gear shifting 143
To shift to a higher gear, nudge the shifter to the right and
release it.
To shift to a lower gear, nudge the shifter to the left and release.
NOTE!
When travelling down steep grades it is important to protect the
power train from overspeed possibilities. Select an appropriate
lower gear before descending the steep grade. Monitor the engine
rpm and apply the brakes as required to maintain a proper engine
rpm and a safe travel speed.
Transmission shifter, changing gears

A Shift to higher gear
B Shift to lower gear
Continuous ground speed matching

Ground speed matching is a standard feature, which is active in
manual mode. To activate ground speed matching, depress the
inching pedal more than half way or press on the brake pedal.
The machine will down shift from any forward or reverse gear to
the default inching gear F3 and R2 (HTE840 transmission) or F5
and R3 (HTE1160 transmission).
Whenever the operator lifts up the inching pedal the transmission
will always be at the best matched gear, regardless of the
machine speed or engine rpm. After coming to a complete stop
the machine will start from the default inching gear.
During continuous ground speed matching conditions, the
function will be cancelled if the driver does an up shift.
NOTE!
The continuous ground speed matching function will down shift
when necessary even though the machine is in manual
transmission mode.
Overspeed Protection
Overspeed protection is a standard feature, which is active when
the inching pedal is depressed more than half way. This function
will up shift the transmission if there is a risk of drivetrain
overspeed. When the inching pedal is released no protection up
shifts will be made.
Engine anti-stall protection
NOTE!
Engine anti-stall protection is included only on machines that have
a transmission with the “S” designation added to the transmission
model name (HTE840S and HTE1160S).
Engine anti-stall protection is a standard feature with the
HTE840S and HTE1160S transmissions. The purpose of this
feature is to prevent the engine from stalling due to excessive
drivetrain load.
When the engine is operating and the transmission is in forward
(F) or reverse (R) and the machine senses that the engine will
144 Gear shifting
stall due to excessive drive line load, the transmission will
automatically shift to neutral (N).
To re-engage the transmission, fully press the inching pedal. The
transmission will select the appropriate gear based on ground
speed matching and overspeed-protection. Release the inching
pedal normally and the machine will resume normal operation.
Changing directions using inching pedal
1 Depress the inching pedal and bring the machine to a
complete stop using the service brakes.
2 Press the neutral lock button and move the shifter forward (F)
for forward travel or backward (R) for reverse travel.
3 Select an appropriate gear for starting depending on your
working conditions. Starting in too high a gear may cause the
engine to stall. Release the service brake pedal, then slowly
release the inching pedal and accelerate as required.
Transmission shifter, changing direction

A Forward
B Reverse
Memory gear feature

The memory gear feature allows the operator to customize the
shift patterns of the transmission to suit the job conditions. To
obtain different shift patterns, such as F2 and R1, you must
manually shift the transmission to that gear.
The memory feature remembers the selected gear that was last
used in either forward or reverse, and upon returning to that
direction, the vehicle electronic control unit ( V-ECU)
automatically selects that gear. You only have to select the
required gears in either forward or reverse, no other programming
action is needed.
After you have obtained a valid memory gear combination, you
can ‘shuttle-shift’ between forward and reverse. If a selected
combination of forward and reverse gears is not valid, the V-ECU
automatically selects the default gear.
You must make a complete shift sequence (i.e., F-N-R or R-N-F)
to use the memory gear function. If you make an incomplete shift
sequence (i.e., F-N-F or R-N-R), the transmission returns to the
previous forward and reverse gear selection.
Gear shifting using the inching pedal and memory
gears
NOTE!
The function allows the operator to change machine direction
using the inching pedal. A memory gear feature allows the
operator to customize the shift pattern according to the job
conditions.
Gear shifting 145
HTE840 Manual shift (Note: Transmission mode switch in manual position only)
Forward to reverse Memory gears Shifting
Creep Creep, R1, R2 Shift to selected reverse memory gear.
F1 R1, R2 NOTE!
F2 If previous reverse gear was not a memory gear, shift is made to the
default gear.
F3
F4 NOTE!
The operator may increase the reverse gear to the maximum allowable
F5 inching gear (R3).
F6 R2 (default gear)
F7 Shift to reverse default gear.
F8 NOTE!
inching gear (R3).
Reverse to forward Memory gears Shifting
Creep Creep Shift to selected forward memory gear.
R1 Creep, F1–F3 NOTE!
R2 If previous forward gear was not a memory gear, shift is made to the
maximum allowable inching gear.
R3 F1–F3
R4
Creep Creep, R1, R2, R3 Shift to selected reverse memory gear.
F1 R1, R2, R3 NOTE!
default gear.
F3
F4 NOTE!
F6
F8 R3 (default gear) NOTE!
F9 The operator may increase the reverse gear to the maximum allowable
inching gear (R4).
F10
F11
maximum allowable inching gear (F5).
R3 F1–F5
R4
R5
R6
146 Gear shifting
Changing directions using the shuttle shift function
1 The shuttle shift function automatically controls the direction
change of the machine without the operator having to use the
inching pedal.
2 Press the neutral lock button and move the transmission
shifter to the opposite direction of travel.
3 The machine will downshift appropriately (proportional to the
gear selected). Do not reduce throttle rpm. Shuttle shifting will
control the engine speed and transmission activation.
4 The shuttle shift feature is cancelled if the shifter is held in the
Neutral (N) position for more than half a second.
Transmission shifter, changing direction

A Forward
B Reverse
Gear shifting using shuttle shifting and memory gears

NOTE!
without using the inching pedal. A memory gear feature allows
the operator to customize the shift pattern according to the job
conditions.
A shuttle shift from a forward gear to a reverse gear or a reverse
gear to a forward gear will take place according to the following
table depending on the transmission model installed.
Gear shifting 147
HTE840 Automatic shuttle shift (Note: Transmission mode switch in manual position only)
Forward to Memory gears Shuttle shifting
reverse
Creep Creep, R1, R2 Direct shuttle shift to selected reverse memory gear.
F1 R1, R2
F2
F3
F4 Automatically down shifts to a gear where the speed is below 10 km/h (6.2
F5 mph) before a reverse gear is allowed during a shuttle shift.
F7
F8
Reverse to Memory gears Shuttle shifting
forward
Creep Creep Direct shuttle shift to selected forward memory gear.
F1 Creep, F1–F3
F2
F3 F1–F3 Automatically down shifts to a gear where the speed is below 10 km/h (6.2
F4 mph) before a forward gear is allowed during a shuttle shift.
reverse
Creep Creep, R1, R2, R3 Direct shuttle shift to selected reverse memory gear.
F1 R1, R2, R3
F2
F3
F4
F5
F9
F10
F11
forward
F1 Creep, F1–F5
F2
F4 F1–F5 mph) before a forward gear is allowed during a shuttle shift.
F5
F6
148 Gear shifting
Transmission modes
Three modes are available when controlling transmission shifting.
A Manual mode
The manual transmission operation is controlled by the
operator using the transmission shift lever to manually shift
up or down. Manual mode is activated by the transmission
mode switch located on the pedestal instrument panel, see
page 65.
NOTE!
Only available on machines with enhanced transmission
feature. When activated, an “M” is indicated in the centre
instrument panel display.
Default inching/starting gears in manual mode are F3 and R2
(HTE840 transmission) or F5 and R3 (HTE1160
transmission). Higher inching/starting gears can be manually
selected.
Maximum inching/starting gears are F5 and R3 (HTE840
transmission) F7 and R4 (HTE1160 transmission).
Lower inching/starting gears down to F1 and R1 can also be
manually selected; they can also be used as memory gears,
see Memory gear feature.
B Automatic mode (optional)
The automatic transmission mode allows the operator to let
the transmission automatically shift up or down, both in
forward and reverse. The activation of automatic mode is
made by the transmission mode switch located on the
pedestal instrument panel.
See page 65.
When activated, an “A” is indicated in the centre instrument
panel display, when the shifter is in the neutral or park
position. The wanted gear is displayed when the shifter is in
the forward or reverse position.
Default inching/starting gears in automatic mode are F2 and
R1 (HTE840 transmission) or F3 and R2 (HTE1160
transmission).
When activating the automatic mode, the highest selected
working gear is remembered from the last time Automatic
mode was used. If the current gear is higher than the highest
selected working gear, the highest selected working gear will
be set to the current gear. By up shifting or down shifting with
the shift lever a new highest working gear can be selected.
In automatic mode the transmission will do automatic up-
shifts and down shifts between the selected highest working
gear and the lowest working gear. The automatic shifting is
determined by engine load, machine speed and engine rpm.
Under severe load conditions the transmission may perform
double down shifts.
If the highest selected working gear is set to the lowest
working gear or lower, no automatic up shift or down shift will
be done, i.e. the current gear will be fixed to the highest
selected working gear (manual behaviour).
NOTE!
When doing a shuttle shift in automatic mode, the transmission
will always begin from the default inching/starting gear. Then
depending on load, speed and engine rpm up-shift to highest
selected working gear.
C Travel mode (optional)
Travel mode is mainly intended for roading, or driving the
machine without a lot of stops and starts. However travel
Gear shifting 149
mode is also possible to use during higher speed operations
like snow cleaning or road maintenance, where the operator
wants to better control the up and down shifting with the
accelerator pedal and engine rpm.
Travel mode automatically shifts the transmission up or down
in the forward direction. In reverse, up or down shifting has to
be done manually. The activation of travel mode is made by
the transmission mode switch located on the pedestal
instrument panel. When activated a “T” is indicated in the
centre instrument panel display.
See page 65.
Default inching/starting gears in travel mode are F3 and R2
transmission).
The highest inching/starting gear that can be manually
selected in reverse is R3 (HTE840 transmission) or R4
(HTE1160 transmission). Lower inching/starting gears in
reverse down to R1 can be manually selected.
The working range in travel mode is between F3 and F8
(HTE840 transmission) or F5 and F11 (HTE1160
transmission).
In travel mode the transmission will do automatic up-shifts
and down shifts in forward direction within the working range,
depending on speed and engine rpm. Under rapid speed
variation, the transmission may perform double shifts.
All Wheel Drive models
All wheel drive (AWD) is a hydrostatic drive system used to
increase tractive effort and steering control at the front wheels
during slippery conditions. Two electronically controlled, variable-
displacement hydraulic pumps power the system in a closed loop
circuit. Each pump supplies one front wheel motor. The wheel
motors are a two-speed, high torque, radial piston, cam lobe type.
Each wheel motor has a separate speed sensor. All wheel drive
responds in forward gears 1 to 7 (HTE840 transmission) or 1 to
10 (HTE1160 transmission) and all reverse gears.
Memory gear feature – All wheel drive models
WARNING
Coasting the machine down a steep grade with the all wheel drive
system engaged will cause excessive speed and loss of machine
control resulting in accidents with serious injury or death.
Always keep gear shifter engaged while going down a steep
grade.
With the all wheel drive system engaged, switching to creep mode
will eliminate any previously selected memory gear combination.
The memory gear feature allows you to shift between normal all
wheel drive and creep mode. For example, a shift between creep
mode forward and second gear reverse.
All wheel drive applications
Side loading
You can counteract the side loads encountered when working
across a slope or when grading heavy material by using all
wheel drive. Driving the front wheels against wheel side loading
maintains directional control.
Traction and steering control
150 Gear shifting
When traction is poor and the rear wheels of the machine are
slipping, use all wheel drive to transfer power to the front
wheels. By counteracting rear wheel slip, all wheel drive allows
the machine to carry a greater load on the blade, reduces rear
tire wear and reduces shock loads on the primary drifting. All
wheel drive can also provide better steering control on low
traction surfaces by supplying full power to both front wheels
during turns.
System operation
F1 – F7 forward gears (HTE840 transmission)
All reverse gears (HTE840 and HTE1160 transmissions)
Activate the system by pressing the upper end of the switch on
the pedestal instrument panel.
If AWD is switched on when the machine is moving, the
machine must be slowed below 4th gear (HTE840
transmission) or 6th gear (HTE1160 transmission) for the
system to engage. The AWD mode information on the display
unit (“XXX”) will flash until the system engages.
When up shifting, the system automatically switches to tandem
Centre instrument panel display screen drive only in 8th gear, and back to AWD in 7th gear when down
shifted (HTE840 transmission).
drive only in 11th gear, and back to AWD in 10th gear when
down shifted (HTE1160 transmission).
System deactivation
The all wheel drive system automatically enters into certain
modes according to the following conditions:
When the AWD switch is placed in the OFF position, the AWD
system is off.
When the shifter is placed in neutral (N), the AWD system is in
neutral.
When the shifter is placed in the 8th gear forward (HTE840
transmission) or the 11th gear forward (HTE1160
transmission), the AWD system is on stand-by.
When the inching or service brake pedal are depressed, the
AWD system is on stand-by.
When the hydraulic oil temperature in the reservoir is above
normal operating range, the AWD system is off.
When the oil level in the hydraulic tank is too low, the AWD
system is off.
When the charge pressure is too low, the AWD system is off.
Creep mode
Creep mode uses hydrostatic front wheel drive to power the
machine from 0–4 km/h (0–2.5 mph). The rear wheels are not
driving when creep mode is activated.
In creep mode, the engine speed is limited to 1600 rpm.
NOTE!
Selecting creep mode eliminates any memory gear combination
previously used.
With the AWD system engaged and the transmission in forward
(F) or reverse (R), switch to creep mode by operating the
transmission shifter to 1st gear. Make one more shift to a lower
gear (holding for one second) to activate creep mode and the
machine will move in the direction previously selected.
Gear shifting 151
Increase engine speed above 880 rpm to start moving. Use
engine rpm to adjust to desired ground speed.
To stop the machine or change direction, depress the inching
pedal and reduce the engine speed below 880 rpm.
Up shifting the transmission will place the system into normal
AWD mode. Shift between a normal AWD gear combination
and creep mode.
NOTE!
If the AWD switch is turned off while the machine is operating in
creep mode, and if the ground speed is less than 0.5 km/h (0.3
mph) for greater than one second, the transmission shifts to
neutral (N), which is the default position. You must move the
inching pedal beyond 90 percent to engage F1.
NOTE!
creep mode, and if the ground speed is greater than 0.5 km/h (0.3
mph) then the transmission shifts directly to F1. You do not have
to move the inching pedal.
Two options are available to select an operating gear:
1 Depress and release the inching pedal. First gear will activate
in the direction that the shifter has been selected.
2 Move the shifter into the neutral (N) position. Depress the
inching pedal and move the shifter into forward (F) or Reverse
(R). The transmission will shift to the default gear (F1 or R1).
Select the appropriate gear for the job and release the inching
pedal.
AWD aggression
Different tractive conditions are often encountered by the front
and the rear of the machine. The AWD aggression switch is used
to fine tune rotational speed differences that may occur between
the front and the rear wheels when grading under diverse
conditions with the all wheel drive system engaged. Sixteen
positions are available.
Depending on conditions, a setting between 6 and 11 adjusts the
front wheel speed to match the rear.
A lower setting slows the front wheel speed compared to the rear.
A higher setting increases the front wheel speed compared to the
rear.
Gear shifting
152 Gear shifting
WARNING
lead to loss of machine control and fatal accidents.
NOTICE
cause damage to the power transmission.
NOTE!
When joystick steering is active, the gear selection is limited to a
maximum of 6th gear in the forward direction and 3rd gear in the
reverse direction (HTE840 transmission) or a maximum of 8th
gear in the forward direction and 4th gear in the reverse direction
(HTE1160 transmission).
Starting from a complete stop
When starting from a stop, always use the inching pedal.
NOTE!
The inching pedal requires very low effort to operate, to reduce
operator fatigue. Be careful the first couple of times before getting
accustomed to the comfort of the pedal operation.
NOTE!
The machine will not start to move in any forward gear higher than
5th (HTE840 transmission) or 7th (HTE1160 transmission). The
Foot pedal controls
machine will not start to move in any reverse gear higher than 3rd
(HTE840 transmission) or 4th (HTE1160 transmission).
1 Inching pedal
3 Accelerator pedal
Gear shifting 153
Starting out, using conventional or joystick steering
1 Raise the moldboard and all attachments off the ground.
2 If roading the machine (travel mode), position the moldboard
inside the tyres. Steer the front wheels to make sure they do
not strike the moldboard.
3 Depress the inching and service brake pedals.
4 Disengage the parking brake by pressing the lower half of the
park brake switch.
NOTE!
Joystick steering cannot be enabled while in travel mode or if the
machine is moving faster than 0.5 km/h (0.3 mph).
Park brake switch
5 If joystick steering control is desired, press the joystick
steering enable button. The joystick steering indicator will light.
6 Move the FNR transmission shifter switch to the forward (F) or
reverse (R) position.
7 Select the starting gear by pressing the gear up switch or gear
down switch. Digital text in the centre instrument display unit
indicates which gear the transmission is in.
8 Release the service brake pedal, then slowly release the
inching pedal and accelerate as required.
NOTE!
Do not rest your feet on the inching or service brake pedals when
driving the machine. This can cause unnecessary wear and
premature failure.
Left joystick
1 Gear down switch
2 Gear up switch
3 FNR transmission shifter switch
4 Joystick steering enable button
5 Joystick steering indicator
Changing gears
WARNING
Coasting the machine down a steep grade will cause excessive
speed and loss of machine control resulting in accidents with
serious injury or death.
Always keep gear shifter engaged.
Never engage inching pedal while going down a steep grade.
After the machine is in motion, you do not have to use the inching
pedal to change gears. The best shift quality can be obtained by
maintaining consistent engine speed (rpm).
To shift to a higher gear, press and release the gear
transmission up switch.
154 Gear shifting
To shift to a lower gear, press and release the gear
transmission down switch.
NOTE!
When travelling down steep grades it is important to protect the
power train from overspeed possibilities. Select an appropriate
lower gear before descending the steep grade. Monitor the engine
rpm and apply the brakes as required to maintain a proper engine
rpm and a safe travel speed.
Continuous ground speed matching
Ground speed matching is a standard feature, which is active in
manual mode. To activate ground speed matching depress the
inching pedal and the function performs down shifts from any
forward or reverse gear down to the default inching gear F3 and
transmission).
Whenever the operator lifts up the inching pedal the transmission
will always be at the best matched gear, regardless of the
machine speed or engine rpm. After coming to a complete stop
the machine will start from the default inching gear.
During continuous ground speed matching conditions, the
function will be cancelled if the driver does an up shift.
Overspeed Protection
Overspeed protection is a standard feature, which is active when
the inching pedal is depressed. This function will up shift the
transmission if there is a risk of drivetrain overspeed. When the
inching pedal is released no protection up shifts will be made.
Engine anti-stall protection
NOTE!
Engine anti-stall protection is included only on machines that have
a transmission with the “S” designation added to the transmission
model name (HTE840S and HTE1160S).
Engine anti-stall protection is a standard feature with the
HTE840S and HTE1160S transmissions. The purpose of this
feature is to prevent the engine from stalling due to excessive
drivetrain load.
When the engine is operating and the transmission is in forward
(F) or reverse (R) and the machine senses that the engine will
stall due to excessive drive line load, the transmission will
automatically shift to neutral (N).
To re-engage the transmission, fully press the inching pedal. The
transmission will select the appropriate gear based on ground
speed matching and overspeed-protection. Release the inching
pedal normally and the machine will resume normal operation.
Gear shifting 155
Changing directions using inching pedal
1 Depress the inching pedal and bring the machine to a
complete stop using the service brakes.
2 Move the FNR transmission shifter switch forward (F) for
forward travel or backward (R) for reverse travel.
3 Select an appropriate gear for starting depending on your
working conditions. Starting in too high a gear may cause the
engine to stall. Release the service brake pedal, then slowly
release the inching pedal and accelerate as required.
FNR transmission shifter and gear selection

1 Gear down switch
2 Gear up switch
Memory gear feature

The memory gear feature allows the operator to customize the
shift patterns of the transmission to suit the job conditions. To
obtain different shift patterns, such as F2 and R1, you must
manually shift the transmission to that gear.
The memory feature remembers the selected gear that was last
used in either forward or reverse, and upon returning to that
direction, the vehicle electronic control unit ( V-ECU)
automatically selects that gear. You only have to select the
required gears in either forward or reverse, no other programming
action is needed.
After you have obtained a valid memory gear combination, you
can ‘shuttle-shift’ between forward and reverse. If a selected
combination of forward and reverse gears is not valid, the V-ECU
automatically selects the default gear.
You must make a complete shift sequence (i.e., F-N-R or R-N-F)
to use the memory gear function. If you make an incomplete shift
sequence (i.e., F-N-F or R-N-R), the transmission returns to the
previous forward and reverse gear selection.
Gear shifting using the inching pedal and memory
gears
NOTE!
using the inching pedal. A memory gear feature allows the
operator to customize the shift pattern according to the job
conditions.
156 Gear shifting
Creep Creep, R1, R2 Shift to selected reverse memory gear.
F1 R1, R2 NOTE!
default gear.
F3
F4 NOTE!
F7 (1) Shift to reverse default gear.
F8 (1) NOTE!
inching gear (R3).
maximum allowable inching gear.
R3 F1–F3
R4
Creep Creep, R1, R2, R3 Shift to selected reverse memory gear.
F1 R1, R2, R3 NOTE!
default gear.
F3
F4 NOTE!
F6
F8 R3 (default gear) NOTE!
F9 (2) The operator may increase the reverse gear to the maximum allowable
inching gear (R4).
F10 (2)
F11 (2)
maximum allowable inching gear (F5).
R3 F1–F5
R4
R5
R6
1. When joystick steering is active, the gear selection is limited to a maximum of 6th gear (HTE840 transmission).
Gear shifting 157
Changing directions using the shuttle shift function
1 The shuttle shift function automatically controls the direction
change of the machine without the operator having to use the
inching pedal.
2 Move the FNR transmission shifter to the opposite direction of
travel.
3 The machine will downshift appropriately (proportional to the
gear selected). Do not reduce throttle rpm. Shuttle shifting will
control the engine speed and transmission activation.
4 The shuttle shift feature is cancelled if the shifter is held in the
Neutral (N) position for more than half a second.
FNR tranmission shifter and gear selection

1 Gear down switch
2 Gear up switch
Gear shifting using shuttle shifting and memory gears

NOTE!
without using the inching pedal. A memory gear feature allows
the operator to customize the shift pattern according to the job
conditions.
A shuttle shift from a forward gear to a reverse gear or a reverse
gear to a forward gear will take place according to the following
table depending on the transmission model installed.
158 Gear shifting
reverse
Creep Creep, R1, R2 Direct shuttle shift to selected reverse memory gear.
F1 R1, R2
F2
F3
F7 (1)
F8 (1)
forward
F1 Creep, F1–F3
F2
F3 F1–F3 Automatically down shifts to a gear where the speed is below 10 km/h (6.2
F4 mph) before a forward gear is allowed during a shuttle shift.
reverse
Creep Creep, R1, R2, R3 Direct shuttle shift to selected reverse memory gear.
F1 R1, R2, R3
F2
F3
F4
F5
F9 (2)
F10 (2)
F11 (2)
forward
F1 Creep, F1–F5
F2
F4 F1–F5 mph) before a forward gear is allowed during a shuttle shift.
F5
F6
Gear shifting 159
Transmission modes
Three modes are available when controlling transmission shifting.
A Manual mode
The manual transmission operation is controlled by the
operator using the transmission shift lever to manually shift
up or down. Manual mode is activated by the transmission
mode switch located on the pedestal instrument panel, see
page 65.
NOTE!
Only available on machines with enhanced transmission
feature. When activated, an “M” is indicated in the centre
instrument panel display.
Default inching/starting gears in manual mode are F3 and R2
transmission). Higher inching/starting gears can be manually
selected.
Maximum inching/starting gears are F5 and R3 (HTE840
transmission) F7 and R4 (HTE1160 transmission).
Lower inching/starting gears down to F1 and R1 can also be
manually selected; they can also be used as memory gears,
see Memory gear feature.
B Automatic mode (optional)
The automatic transmission mode allows the operator to let
the transmission automatically shift up or down, both in
forward and reverse. The activation of automatic mode is
made by the transmission mode switch located on the
pedestal instrument panel.
See page 65.
When activated, an “A” is indicated in the centre instrument
panel display, when the FNR transmission shifter is in the
neutral position. The wanted gear is displayed when the
shifter is in the forward or reverse position.
Default inching/starting gears in automatic mode are F2 and
transmission).
When activating the automatic mode, the highest selected
working gear is remembered from the last time Automatic
mode was used. If the current gear is higher than the highest
selected working gear, the highest selected working gear will
be set to the current gear. By shifting up or down with the FNR
transmission shifter a new highest working gear can be
selected.
In automatic mode the transmission will do automatic up-
shifts and down shifts between the selected highest working
gear and the lowest working gear. The automatic shifting is
determined by engine load, machine speed and engine rpm.
Under severe load conditions the transmission may perform
double down shifts.
If the highest selected working gear is set to the lowest
working gear or lower, no automatic up shift or down shift will
be done, i.e. the current gear will be fixed to the highest
selected working gear (manual behaviour).
NOTE!
When doing a shuttle shift in automatic mode, the transmission
will always begin from the default inching/starting gear. Then
depending on load, speed and engine rpm up-shift to highest
selected working gear.
C Travel mode (optional)
160 Gear shifting
Travel mode is mainly intended for roading, or driving the
machine without a lot of stops and starts. However travel
mode is also possible to use during higher speed operations
like snow cleaning or road maintenance, where the operator
wants to better control the up and down shifting with the
accelerator pedal and engine rpm.
Travel mode automatically shifts the transmission up or down
in the forward direction. In reverse, up or down shifting has to
be done manually. The activation of travel mode is made by
the transmission mode switch located on the pedestal
instrument panel. When activated a “T” is indicated in the
centre instrument panel display.
See page 65.
Default inching/starting gears in travel mode are F3 and R2
transmission).
The highest inching/starting gear that can be manually
selected in reverse is R3 (HTE840 transmission) or R4
(HTE1160 transmission). Lower inching/starting gears in
reverse down to R1 can be manually selected.
The working range in travel mode is between F3 and F8
(HTE840 transmission) or F5 and F11 (HTE1160
transmission).
In travel mode the transmission will do automatic up-shifts
and down shifts in forward direction within the working range,
depending on speed and engine rpm. Under rapid speed
variation, the transmission may perform double shifts.
All Wheel Drive models
All wheel drive (AWD) is a hydrostatic drive system used to
increase tractive effort and steering control at the front wheels
during slippery conditions. Two electronically controlled, variable-
displacement hydraulic pumps power the system in a closed loop
circuit. Each pump supplies one front wheel motor. The wheel
motors are a two-speed, high torque, radial piston, cam lobe type.
Each wheel motor has a separate speed sensor. All wheel drive
responds in forward gears 1 to 7 (HTE840 transmission) or 1 to
10 (HTE1160 transmission) and all reverse gears.
Memory gear feature – All wheel drive models
WARNING
Coasting the machine down a steep grade with the all wheel drive
system engaged will cause excessive speed and loss of machine
control resulting in accidents with serious injury or death.
Always keep gear shifter engaged while going down a steep
grade.
With the all wheel drive system engaged, switching to creep mode
will eliminate any previously selected memory gear combination.
The memory gear feature allows you to shift between normal all
wheel drive and creep mode. For example, a shift between creep
mode forward and second gear reverse.
All wheel drive applications
Side loading
You can counteract the side loads encountered when working
across a slope or when grading heavy material by using all
wheel drive. Driving the front wheels against wheel side loading
maintains directional control.
Gear shifting 161
Traction and steering control
When traction is poor and the rear wheels of the machine are
slipping, use all wheel drive to transfer power to the front
wheels. By counteracting rear wheel slip, all wheel drive allows
the machine to carry a greater load on the blade, reduces rear
tire wear and reduces shock loads on the primary drifting. All
wheel drive can also provide better steering control on low
traction surfaces by supplying full power to both front wheels
during turns.
System operation
All reverse gears (HTE840 and HTE1160 transmissions)
Activate the system by pressing the upper end of the switch on
the pedestal instrument panel.
If AWD is switched on when the machine is moving, the
machine must be slowed below 4th gear (HTE840
transmission) or 6th gear (HTE1160 transmission) for the
system to engage. The AWD mode information on the display
unit (“XXX”) will flash until the system engages.
Centre instrument panel display screen drive only in 8th gear, and back to AWD in 7th gear when down
shifted (HTE840 transmission).
drive only in 11th gear, and back to AWD in 10th gear when
down shifted (HTE1160 transmission).
System deactivation
The all wheel drive system automatically enters into certain
modes according to the following conditions:
When the AWD switch is placed in the OFF position, the AWD
system is off.
When the shifter is placed in neutral (N), the AWD system is in
neutral.
When the shifter is placed in the 8th gear forward (HTE840
transmission) or the 11th gear forward (HTE1160
transmission), the AWD system is on stand-by.
When the inching or service brake pedal are depressed, the
AWD system is on stand-by.
When the hydraulic oil temperature in the reservoir is above
normal operating range, the AWD system is off.
When the oil level in the hydraulic tank is too low, the AWD
system is off.
When the charge pressure is too low, the AWD system is off.
Creep mode
Creep mode uses hydrostatic front wheel drive to power the
machine from 0–4 km/h (0–2.5 mph). The rear wheels are not
driving when creep mode is activated.
In creep mode, the engine speed is limited to 1600 rpm.
NOTE!
Selecting creep mode eliminates any memory gear combination
previously used.
With the AWD system engaged and the transmission in forward
(F) or reverse (R), switch to creep mode by operating the
transmission shifter to 1st gear. Make one more shift to a lower
162 Gear shifting
gear (holding for one second) to activate creep mode and the
machine will move in the direction previously selected.
Increase engine speed above 880 rpm to start moving. Use
engine rpm to adjust to desired ground speed.
To stop the machine or change direction, depress the inching
pedal and reduce the engine speed below 880 rpm.
Up shifting the transmission will place the system into normal
AWD mode. Shift between a normal AWD gear combination
and creep mode.
NOTE!
creep mode, and if the ground speed is less than 0.5 km/h (0.3
mph) for greater than one second, the transmission shifts to
neutral (N), which is the default position. You must move the
inching pedal beyond 90 percent to engage F1.
NOTE!
creep mode, and if the ground speed is greater than 0.5 km/h (0.3
mph) then the transmission shifts directly to F1. You do not have
to move the inching pedal.
Two options are available to select an operating gear:
1 Depress and release the inching pedal. First gear will activate
in the direction that the shifter has been selected.
2 Move the shifter into the neutral (N) position. Depress the
inching pedal and move the shifter into forward (F) or Reverse
(R). The transmission will shift to the default gear (F1 or R1).
Select the appropriate gear for the job and release the inching
pedal.
AWD aggression
Different tractive conditions are often encountered by the front
and the rear of the machine. The AWD aggression switch is used
to fine tune rotational speed differences that may occur between
the front and the rear wheels when grading under diverse
conditions with the all wheel drive system engaged. Sixteen
positions are available.
Depending on conditions, a setting between 6 and 11 adjusts the
front wheel speed to match the rear.
A lower setting slows the front wheel speed compared to the rear.
A higher setting increases the front wheel speed compared to the
rear.
Differential locks 163
Differential locks
NOTE!
Lock or unlock the differential ONLY when driving at slow speeds,
in a straight line or if the machine is stopped. Do not lock or unlock
the differential while making a turn or when the tandem wheels
on one side are spinning. Damage to the differential could result.
The differential lock/unlock switch is located in the pedestal
instrument panel on the lower right-hand side. An amber control
lamp in the centre instrument panel and the indicator lamp on the
switch will light up when the differential lock is in the LOCK
position.
Press in the upper end of the switch to activate the differential
lock (LOCK position) for normal grading operations when
maximum traction is required. The control lamp will light up.
Press in the lower end of the switch to deactivate the differential
lock (UNLOCK position) when differential action is required.
A Differential lock/unlock switch This will reduce the turning radius and decrease tire scuffing
B Differential lock control lamp (amber) and strain on the drivetrain when operating on paved surfaces.
The control lamp will go out.
164 Steering
Steering
The machine has front wheel steering controlled by a closed-
centre, load sensing hydrostatic steering system. Turn the
steering wheel to steer the machine to the left or right. Maximum
6.2 revolutions lock to lock.
WARNING
When the engine stalls, the steering system does not operate.
A disabled steering system will cause loss of machine control.
This may result in fatal accidents with serious injury or death.
Stop the machine immediately.
NOTE!
The steering wheel is the priority steering system even when
operating the machine in joystick steering mode. Joystick steering
becomes inactive after 5 seconds of steering wheel use.
NOTE!
The primary steering system operates only when the engine is
running.
The secondary steering system, standard equipment on
machines in the EU/EEA, provides the operator with steering
assistance for up to 1 minute after loss of engine power. Steer the
machine to a safe location and stop the machine.
The secondary steering is optional in other markets. If the engine
stalls on a machine not equipped with the secondary steering
option stop the machine immediately. Engage parking brake.
Restart the engine, if possible. If the engine cannot be started,
have the engine repaired by a qualified service technician.
Secondary steering system (optional equipment
outside EU/EEA)
This auxiliary hydraulic system allows the operator to make
steering corrections more easily in the event of loss of hydraulic
flow to the steering unit. The ignition key must be in the running
(I) position to operate the system.
Operate the system long enough to bring the machine to a stop
in a safe location - maximum one minute.
In the event of low steering oil pressure, the primary steering
system control lamp and the secondary steering system control
lamp will light up, accompanied by a buzzer, text display and a
flashing red central warning lamp.
A Control lamp (red) primary steering system

B Control lamp (amber) secondary steering
system
C Text display
D Central warning lamp (flashing amber)
Steering 165
Testing the secondary steering system
1 Insert and turn the ignition key to the (I) (running) position. Do
not start the engine.
2 Press and hold the upper end of the secondary steering
system test switch on the side console instrument panel to
activate the system. The primary and secondary control lamps
light up. At the same time, the amber central warning lamp
flashes and information text shows on the display unit.
Secondary steering system test switch
3 Check the system by turning the steering wheel.
4 If the steering wheel does not turn easily, there is a fault in the
system.
5 Start the engine. The warning lights will extinguish and the
alarm will stop sounding to indicate that the system is ready if
the engine stalls.
6 If the warning lights stay on and alarm continues to sound with
Central warning lamp (flashing amber) the engine running, do not drive the machine. The system is
faulty and must be repaired by a qualified service technician.
Control lamp (red) primary steering system and

Control lamp (amber) secondary steering system
Front wheel lean
WARNING
Risk of serious accidents.
Personnel could be seriously injured due to loss of machine
control.
Use wheel lean only while grading at low speeds.
Wheel lean at high speeds produces quick and unexpected
machine reactions.
Under poor traction conditions, you can reduce the turning circle
of the machine by leaning the front wheels. Lean the wheels in
the direction of the turn. Position the front wheels vertically again
after completing the turn.
For additional information, see page 84 and page 91.
Ensure that the pedestal hydraulic control rod lock is installed
when roading the grader. Install the pedestal hydraulic control rod
lock pin in the lock position.
166 Steering
Front wheel lean lock
Ensure that the front wheel lean locks are installed when roading
the grader.
1 Position the wheel lean so the front tires are in the centre
position.
2 Remove the front axle wheel lean lock pin via the front access
hole.
3 Remove the wedge and bottom plate.
4 Position the spindle stop in the lock position.
5 Install the wedge and bottom plate, align the holes and insert
the pin.
NOTE!
The pin ring should be located toward the wheels.
Free position
Locked position
C. Bottom plate
D. Wedge
E. Lock pin
F. Spindle stop
Steering 167
Steering using articulation
WARNING
Use the articulation lever to further reduce the machine’s turning
circle. Before articulating, remove the articulation lock pin. Do not
use at high speeds. Reaction is quick. For additional information,
see page 84.
Ensure that the articulation lock pin is installed when roading the
grader. Ensure that the control switch for locking the rear axle
differential is in the UNLOCK position before turning the machine.
This will reduce the turning radius and decrease tire scuffing when
operating on paved surfaces. For additional information, see page
65.
Articulation lock pin
168 Braking
Braking
Service brake
WARNING
Brake system failure during operation could cause serious injuries
or death.
If the brake warning lamp illuminates and the alarm sounds:
• Bring machine to a safe stop.
• Do not drive the machine.
• Call for repair by a qualified Volvo service technician.
Push down on the brake pedal to apply the service brakes.
The service brake system has two separate brake circuits. The
system provides reduced braking capability in the event of a brake
line rupture or other failure in one circuit. Each of the two circuits
function on one front and opposite rear tandem wheel.
Should one circuit fail, braking remains effective on all tandem
wheels through the tandem chains. Increased service brake pedal
effort will be required to reduce stopping distance.
A Service brake pedal In the event of a service brake circuit failure, the service brake
B Central warning lamp (red) warning lamp (red) illuminates. At the same time, the central
C Service brake warning lamp (red) warning lamp (red) flashes and the display unit displays,
D Alarm text on display unit “WARNING: Service Brakes Circuit Failure.” The buzzer sounds
“WARNING: Service Brake Circuit Failure” if the parking brake is not engaged.
During normal operation, a brake charge system maintains
pressure in a bank of accumulators which supply pressure for the
brake circuits.
In the event of engine or hydraulic pump failure, the bank of
accumulators provide hydraulic pressure for the brake circuits.
The accumulators provide power for braking at a reduced level
and automatically restore to normal operation when hydraulic oil
flow and pressure is restored. Increased service brake pedal
effort will be required to reduce stopping distance.
Braking capability is still available when the engine is not running
or the key is not inserted in the ignition switch.
Braking 169
Parking brake
NOTE!
Only apply the parking brake when the machine has stopped.
Always apply the parking brake if the machine is to be left
unattended.
The red warning lamp lights when the parking brake is applied. If
the brake is applied when the machine is in motion above 0.5 km/
h (0.3 mph), the red central warning lamp flashes, the buzzer
sounds and the alarm text shows on the display unit. The red or
amber central warning flashes depending upon on parking brake
error condition. The display unit displays, “WARNING: Service
Brake Circuit Failure.”
With the ignition key in the running (I) position and the parking
brake released, the brake will be automatically applied if the
switch is moved to the radio (R) or turned off (O) positions.
The parking brake is self-adjusting. For additional information see
page 280.
A Parking brake applied warning lamp (red)

B Central warning lamp (red)
C Alarm text on display unit
“WARNING: Service Brake Circuit Failure”
Shift positions, conventional steering
Park brake switch

170 Braking
brake.
NOTE!
the switch.
Park brake switch
Emergency braking
In an emergency situation, the parking brake may be used.
On machines with conventional steering, move the transmission
shift lever into the park (P) position. This will automatically apply
the parking brake.
WARNING
Risk of serious injury by runaway machine.
The parking brake could fail to stop the machine.
After using the parking brake to stop the machine in an
emergency situation, the parking brake must be serviced by
authorised Volvo service technicians before placing the machine
back in service.
Stopping 171
Stopping
WARNING
Always use the three-point approach to access or leave the cab,
i.e., two hands and one foot or one hand and both feet. Use
stepping surfaces and handholds. Always face the machine when
entering or stepping down from the machine. Do not jump off!
1 Lower the engine speed.
2 Slowly depress and hold down the inching and brake pedals.
Depressing only the inching pedal may not stop the machine.
3 Use brake pedal to hold machine when transmission is in gear,
inching pedal depressed and engine is running.
4 Engage the parking brake.
5 Release the inching and brake pedals.
6 Lower the moldboard and all attachments to the ground.
7 Run the engine at low idle a couple of minutes before stopping
it in order to safeguard the lubrication and cooling of the
turbocharger.
8 Turn the ignition key counter clockwise to the turned off (O)
position so that the control lamps go out and the engine stops.
9 Use entry/exit handles to exit the machine.
If the operator has to leave the cab while the engine is running,
care must be taken so as not to turn the steering wheel or move
the hydraulic control levers unintentionally.
NOTE!
Ensure the hydraulic controls are disabled when leaving the
machine or roading the machine. On machines with conventional
steering, the controls can be locked using the hydraulic controls
lock, see page 84. On machines with joystick steering, the
controls can be disabled by pressing in the lower end of the
hydraulic control enable switch, see 73.
NOTE!
The interior of the cab is equipped with two additional handholds.
They are welded to the bar at the bottom of the front windshield.
You will find these handholds useful when entering or leaving the
machine.
As an additional safety feature at night, refer to and move the cab
interior (dome) light switch to the appropriate position for allowing
the interior lights to illuminate when either door is opened.
172 Parking
Parking
1 Park the machine on level ground, if possible. Otherwise the
wheels should be blocked to prevent the machine from starting
to roll. Lower the attachment to the ground.
2 Check that all switches and controls are 'Off' or in neutral.
3 Apply the parking brake after the machine has come to a
complete standstill.
4 Remove the keys.
5 Turn off the electric power with the battery disconnector if the
machine is to be parked unattended for a long time.
6 Make sure that there is enough anti-freeze in the cooling
system (see page 267) and in the washer fluid at
temperatures below 0 °C during parking.
7 Lock all hoods, hatches, windows, and the door.
Keep in mind that the risk of theft and break-ins can be minimized
if:
- the start key is removed when the machine is left unattended.
- doors and hatches are locked at the end of the work day.
- the electric power is turned off with the battery disconnector
and then removing the handle.
- avoids parking the machine in places with high risk of theft,
break-ins and malicious damage.
- all valuables are removed from the cab, e.g., cell phone,
computer, radio, and bags.
- the machine is chained down.
It is easier to identify stolen machines if PIN-number or
registration number is etched into the windows.
Long-term parking
NOTICE
If the machine is not going to be used every day, all cylinders
should be protected against corrosion.
The temperature may not be below -40 °C or above +70 °C.
Check that the batteries are fully charged.
Take actions according to the above.
Wash the machine and touch-up the paint on damaged
surfaces to prevent rust.
Use anti-corrosion agents on exposed parts, lubricate the
machine thoroughly, and grease unpainted surfaces (lift and tilt
cylinders, etc.).
Fill the fuel tank and hydraulic oil tank to max. markings.
Cover the exhaust pipe (outdoor parking).
Remove the fuse for the voltage converter. Otherwise the
batteries may be discharged.
Check the tires' air pressure and protect them from strong
sunlight.
Parking 173
Check after long-term parking
All oil and fluid levels
All belt tensions
Air pressures
Air cleaner
NOTE!
If a preservative has been used on the machine to prepare it for
long term storage, follow the manufacturer's instructions for any
necessary safety precautions and the method of removal.
174 Retrieving and towing
Retrieving and towing
WARNING
Before taking any actions for towing or recovering, the parking
brake must be applied and the wheels blocked so that the
machine cannot start to roll. Be extremely careful when towing or
recovering to avoid personal injuries or, at worst, fatalities.
WARNING
If it's not possible to start the engine, braking and steering
functions will be limited. In this situation, towing should only be
Shift positions, conventional steering performed in emergencies, over the shortest possible distance
and by trained personnel (see towing). If possible, transport the
machine on a trailer.
Measures when retrieving or towing
If possible, the engine should be running to make the brakes and
steering operational.
If the engine runs, ensure that the transmission shift lever is in
neutral (N). Tow the machine with the engine running. On all
wheel drive models, make sure the all wheel drive system is
switched OFF.
Some local laws prohibit or limit the use of tow chains on public
roads. Check state and local regulations.
If the rear axle is damaged, do not tow the machine.
Do not attempt to start the engine by towing. Damage to the
transmission will result.
Towing or retrieving, maximum forces
Maximum forces when towing or retrieving, kg (lb)
Tow point/model G930 G940 G946 G960 G970 G976 G990
Front 31170 31170 31170 32490 32490 32490 32490
(68725) (68725) (68725) (71639) (71639) (71639) (71639)
Rear (at tow hitch) 5292 5292 5292 5292 5292 5292 5292
(11667) (11667) (11667) (11667) (11667) (11667) (11667)
Rear (at tie down lugs) 58320 58320 58320 58320 58320 58320 58320
(128571) (128571) (128571) (128571) (128571) (128571) (128571)
NOTE!
If the grader has a ripper installed, a sling can be wrapped around
the welded box frame for towing or retrieving.
Retrieving and towing 175
Parking brake, mechanical release
WARNING
Always block the wheels before mechanically releasing the
parking brake to prevent the machine from rolling.
WARNING
If the machine is left without restoring the parking brake function,
this must be indicated clearly with a tag on the steering wheel with
information that the parking brake function has been disabled.
The machine may not be used until the parking brake is restored,
which must be done at a workshop authorized by Volvo CE.
NOTE!
If, for any reason, the parking brake cannot be released by
hydraulic pressure, release the brake using the manual override
method.
NOTE!
Turning the adjusting screws evenly prevents the brake piston
from twisting.
1 Place the machine in the service position. See page 232.
2 Loosen the two adjusting screw locknuts.
3 Turn the two adjusting screws inward in an even manner until
the cup spring preload is overcome and the brake pack
released.
4 To restore the parking brake, turn the adjusting screws
outward to their original position in an even manner to ensure
the parking brake has engaged fully. Tighten the locknuts
1 Parking brake housing

2 Adjusting screws and locknuts
Retrieving
Install an appropriate chain through the hole in the nose plate and
tow the machine to a suitable place or a trafficable road. To avoid
oblique loading, pull the machine straight forward.
To avoid side loading, pull the machine straight rearward.
Hole in nose plate for tow chain.

176 Retrieving and towing
Towing
Precautions to follow before towing:
- Install the articulation lock pin.
- Turn the hazard lights and rotating beacon on.
- Secure the moldboard and all attachments. Use chains or
cables that are in good condition.
Lifting and tie-down point on the rear frame.
After retrieving or towing

Before the towbar, wire rope or chain is removed, the following
safety measures should be taken:
1 If possible, place the machine on level ground.
2 Block the wheels to prevent the machine from rolling.
NOTE!
If the machine is left with a disabled parking brake, this must be
indicated by a label attached to the steering wheel.
Optional rear-mounted tow hitch and attachment

point for tow bar.
Transporting machine 177
Transporting machine
WARNING
If the machine is to be driven from a loading dock onto the platform
of a truck trailer or railway car, make sure that the vehicle is
securely braked, for example, wheels blocked. Make sure that
there is no risk that the vehicle cannot roll over or sway in a
dangerous manner when the machine is driven on.
NOTE!
Do not transport the machine with the engine running. There is a
risk of fire and significant equipment and property damage.
Loading on to a vehicle
Ensure that the transport vehicle is adequate to hold the weight
and size of the machine. For additional information, see page
331.
Ensure that the combined height of the transport vehicle and the
top of the machine cab is lower than local height restrictions or
any bridges, overpasses or overhead obstructions expected to be
encountered during transport. For additional information, see
page 332.
The rotating warning beacon can be lowered for increased
clearance.
If the machine is to be lifted up onto another vehicle, the
articulation lock pin must be installed.
Use attaching points intended for lifting.
If the machine is to be driven up onto another vehicle, do not install
the articulation lock pin until the machine is to be tied down.
Tie down the machine securely.
Tying down machine

Before tying down, position the machine on the transport vehicle
as follows:
2 Lower the moldboard lengthwise under the machine onto
wooden blocks. Do not apply down pressure.
1 Wooden blocks
3 Install chocks at the front and rear tandem wheels. Wedge and
nail the chocks in place.
4 Relieve residual hydraulic pressure by operating all the
hydraulic control levers.
1 Wheel chocks
178 Transporting machine
6 Cover the exhaust opening with suitable protection (not
plastic) to avoid air being forced into the engine and possibly
damaging the turbocharger.
Tie down the machine using attaching points intended for this
purpose so that it cannot tip or begin to roll.
1 Exhaust opening
Lifting machine
If the machine is to be lifted up, the articulation lock pin must be
installed.
Lift the machine using only the attaching points intended for this
purpose.
Tie-down points
Position: A, B, C, D, E
Transporting machine 179
Lifting points
Position: F, G
NOTE!
The machine cannot be lifted with attachments except for a ripper
and/or a push block.
Notes:
- Denotes centre of gravity
- Ship and lift with articulation pin installed.
- All tie-down cables are attached at 45° from vertical.
- Do not lift with rear, side or front attachments installed other
than ripper or push block.
- Some details of grader is omitted for clarity.
- Spreader bar is required to provide clearance between cables
and engine cowling.
- Obtain weight of machine before lifting.
- Lower the moldboard and all attachments to the ground before
tying down. Do not apply down pressure.
180
The following pages contain advice and instructions on how to
operate the machine and examples of how the most common
attachments are used. It is important that the correct operating
techniques are used to carry out the work in a safe and efficient
way.
The machine is equipped with load-sensing hydraulics, which
means that a low engine speed is sufficient for all handling, as full
oil flow is always available. The system, therefore, uses less fuel
and provides a higher operator comfort.
Watch for bystanders and never allow anyone to be near the
machine and its attachments while operating.
WARNING
Risk of crushing by falling attachments.
Hydraulic or mechanical failure may cause the attachments to fall,
resulting in severe personal injury or death.
Always support any attachment before adjusting or servicing it.
WARNING
Risk of crushing injury or death.
Do not use moldboard or attachments to raise and support
machine.
Machine can lower unexpectedly resulting in crushing injuries.
Always use suitable supports for the machine.
Accidents
Accidents and also incidents should be reported to the site
management immediately.
If possible, move the machine away from the traffic area of the
job site. Park and secure the machine.
Only take necessary action so as to reduce the effect of damage,
especially personal injuries. Avoid action which may make an
investigation more difficult.
Wait for further instructions from the site management.
181
Turning the machine
Turning around using articulation
WARNING
Ensure the control switch for the differential lock is in the UNLOCK
position before turning the machine. This will reduce strain on the
rear axle and decrease tire scuffing when operating on paved
surfaces.
1 Articulation indicator gauge Remove the articulation lock pin before attempting to articulate
2 Differential lock / unlock switch the machine.
Articulate the grader in the direction you wish to turn.
The indicator gauge in front of the operator displays the amount
of frame articulation. Install the articulation lock pin when not
using the articulation function, travelling in traffic or at roading
speeds.
1 Fully raise the moldboard and attachments before you turn the
machine around.
2 Position the moldboard so it will not contact the front tandem
tires when articulating as severe damage can occur.
3 With the machine moving forward, turn the wheels left and
articulate the frame left.
4 Upon completing the turn, turn the wheels right and articulate
the frame straight.
Articulation lock pin
Making a three point turn

Understand and obey all traffic laws, road signs and signals.
When turning on a narrow road or highway, use your own
judgement for the amount of area the machine requires to turn
around.
If you consider it necessary to use the articulation function,
remove the articulation lock pin before attempting to articulate the
182
machine. Install the articulation lock pin when not using the
articulation function.
1 First manoeuvre
a Fully raise the moldboard and attachments before you turn
the machine around.
b Lean the wheels slightly in the direction you are turning.
c Travel as far forward as possible.
2 Second manoeuvre
a Lean and turn the front wheels in the opposite direction.
b Select reverse gear and back up the machine as far as
possible.
3 Third manoeuvre
a Lean and turn the wheels to the new travel direction.
b Straighten the wheels after the turn is completed.
c Position the moldboard so it will not contact the front tandem
tires when articulating as severe damage can occur.
Moldboard
NOTE!
The moldboard and its supporting structure is designed to work
in a forward direction. Do not use excessive down force or place
heavy loads on the moldbord when dragging material backwards.
If work must be performed working in a backwards direction,
rotate the moldboard 180° to properly use the cutting edge and
to protect its mounting hardware when grading in reverse.
NOTE!
Using the moldboard for scraping hard surfaces will generate heat
and may result in sharp strips of metal separating from the
moldboard edges. These can damage tyres of the grader or other
vehicles. Frequent inspection and care is required to avoid this
condition. Extra care is required to ensure that excessive down
force is not used as rapid edge ware will occur under these
conditions.
Familiarize yourself with the terms used in this manual.
Moldboard angle is usually 15° to 75° from the centre line of
the frame. The greater the moldboard angle, the more material
is carried across the moldboard allowing for deeper cuts and
heavier grading. The material moved by the moldboard creates
a side thrust on the machine. The operator can counteract this
side thrust by leaning the front wheels in the direction the
material is moving along the moldboard.
Moldboard pitch for normal grading, should be tilted slightly
forward from the vertical position. Tilting the moldboard forward
allows material to roll for spreading or compacting. Tilting the
Typical road cross-section moldboard backward increases the cutting ability and reduces
1 Backslope the rolling action of the material.
2 Foreslope Moldboard toe is the point of the moldboard closest to the front
3 Ditch wheels.
4 Wearing surface Moldboard heel is the point of the moldboard farthest away
5 Road surface (travelled way) from the front wheels.
6 Shoulder Moldboard angle is the angle of the moldboard as measured
7 Roadbed from the moldboard toe to the centre line of the front frame of
8 Roadway (road right-of-way)
the machine.
183
Grading terms, moldboard
A Left-hand grading 1 Moldboard toe

B Right-hand grading 2 Moldboard heel
3 Moldboard angle
4 Centre line of frame
Moldboard blade lift procedure – right-hand side

NOTE!
Perform the following steps before attempting any of the
moldboard blade procedures.
1 Observe all moving parts to prevent damage to the machine
when using the blade lift system.
2 Park the machine.
4 Position the moldboard at 90 degrees to the frame.
5 Centralize the circle, drawbar and moldboard with the frame.
6 Fully lower the moldboard and all attachments. Do not apply
down-pressure.
7 Ensure that there are no persons or vehicles near the
machine.
This procedure describes how to manoeuvre the moldboard into
the right side high bank sloping position. The blade lift system
provides a total blade position range.
184
1 Operate the blade lift lock pin switch on the side console panel
to release the blade lift lock pin.
Press in and up on the upper end of the switch to disengage
the blade lift lock pin.
The amber blade lift lock status lamp in the centre instrument
panel will light up when the blade lift lock pin is disengaged. If
the status lamp does not light up, slowly operate both the right
and left blade lift controls until the blade lift lock pin fully
retracts and the lamp lights up.
A. Blade lift lock pin switch

B. Blade lift lock pin status lamp (amber)
2 Observe the pointer on the bracket and indicator dimples on

the right arm. Retract the left blade lift cylinder and extend the
right blade lift cylinder to move the blade lift lockbar to the right.
This action pivots the blade lift arms around their pins. Pivot
the blade lift arms until the lowest indicator dimple on the right
arm aligns with the right pointer.
3 Operate the blade lift lock switch on the side console panel to
engage the blade lift lock pin.
lock pin.
The blade lift lock status lamp will go out to indicate that the
lock pin has engaged. If the status lamp does not go out, slowly
operate both the right and left blade lift cylinder controls until
the blade lift lock pin fully engages and the lamp goes out.
4 Slide the moldboard as far to the right as possible.

185
5 Rotate the circle so that the end of the moldboard is close to
the front tyre.
6 Retract the right blade lift cylinder approximately 60 cm (2 ft).

Fully extend the left blade lift cylinder and the circle shift
cylinder. Retract the right blade lift cylinder until the moldboard
reaches the desired position. Observe all moving parts to
prevent damage to the machine when using the blade lift
system.
7 Rotate the circle to allow the end of the moldboard to clear the
ground.
8 Reverse this procedure to return the moldboard to the normal
grading position.
186
Moldboard blade lift procedure – left-hand side
NOTE!
Perform the following steps before attempting any of the
moldboard blade procedures.
1 Observe all moving parts to prevent damage to the machine
2 Park the machine.
4 Position the moldboard at 90 degrees to the frame.
5 Centralize the circle, drawbar and moldboard with the frame.
6 Fully lower the moldboard and all attachments. Do not apply
down-pressure.
7 Ensure that there are no persons or vehicles near the
machine.
This procedure describes how to manoeuvre the moldboard into
the left-hand side high bank sloping position. The blade lift system
provides a total blade position range.
1 Operate the blade lift lock pin switch on the side console panel
to release the blade lift lock pin.
Press in and up on the upper end of the switch to disengage
the blade lift lock pin.
The amber blade lift lock pin status lamp in the centre
instrument panel will light up when the blade lift lock pin is
disengaged. If the status lamp does not light up, slowly operate
both the right and left blade lift cylinder controls until the blade
lift lock pin fully retracts and the lamp lights up.
A. Blade lift lock pin switch

B. Blade lift lock pin status lamp (amber)
2 Observe the pointer on the bracket and the indicator dimples

on the left arm. Retract the right blade lift cylinder and extend
the left blade lift cylinder to move the blade lift lockbar to the
left. This action pivots the blade lift arms around their pins.
Pivot the blade lift arms until the lowest indicator dimple on the
left arm aligns with the left pointer.
187
3 Operate the blade lift lock switch on the pedestal instrument
panel to engage the blade lift lock pin.
lock pin.
The blade lift lock status lamp will go out to indicate that the
lock pin has engaged. If the status lamp does not go out, slowly
operate both the right and left blade lift cylinder controls until
the blade lift lock pin fully engages and the lamp goes out.
4 Slide the moldboard as far to the left as possible.
5 Rotate the circle so that the end of the moldboard is close to

the front tyre.
6 Retract the left blade lift cylinder approximately 60 cm (2 ft).

Fully extend the right blade lift cylinder and retract the circle
shift cylinder. Retract the left blade lift cylinder until the
moldboard reaches the desired position.
Observe all moving parts to prevent damage to the machine
188
7 Rotate the circle to allow the end of the moldboard to clear the
ground.
8 Reverse this procedure to return the moldboard to the normal
grading position.
Grading around an object

Note and avoid all hazards and obstructions such as overhangs,
ledges, slide areas, power lines, underground cables, water
mains, gas lines, etc.
When operating close to power lines, underground cables, water
mains or gas lines, contact the responsible authority and request
assistance.
1 First manoeuvre:
Reduce your speed.
Use the accelerator to slowly manoeuvre the machine
around the object.
Drive as close as possible to the object to reduce the amount
of hand shovelling required.
2 Second manoeuvre:
Move the moldboard to follow the shape of the object.
3 Third manoeuvre:
Slide the moldboard back to its original position after you
have passed the object and continue grading.
Grading on an ‘S’ curve shoulder

189
Slowly approach the first right curve.
Lean the front wheels slightly to the left to counteract side
thrust.
Turn right and follow the edge of the shoulder nearest the ditch.
Position the toe of the moldboard behind and outside the front
right wheel. Always have the toe of the moldboard positioned
on the edge of the shoulder nearest the ditch while grading.
Lean wheels
1 Moldboard toe
When finishing the right curve, turn straight.
Lean wheels
1 Moldboard toe
As you approach the second curve, follow the edge of the

shoulder nearest the ditch and turn left.
Complete the curve and continue grading.
If a windrow has been created, make a cleanup pass to remove
the windrow and reshape the shoulder.
Lean wheels
1 Moldboard toe
Articulate the machine in the direction of the curve and follow

the edge of the shoulder nearest the ditch. Slide and position
the moldboard as required. Do not allow the moldboard to
contact the front tandem tires when articulating as severe
damage can occur.
Right-hand levelling
Offset the circle and drawbar slightly to the left of the frame.
190
Rotate the circle and tilt the moldboard depending on the
amount of material to be moved.
Position the moldboard angle according to the desired depth
of the cut. Deposit the windrow outside the left tandem wheels.
Lean the front wheels to the left to overcome the side thrust.
Lean wheels
Articulate the frame to the right. If the drive wheels lose traction,
reduce the articulation angle. This will decrease the cutting
angle and side thrust allowing the drive wheels to regain
traction. Deposit the windrow between the tandem wheels.
Spread the windrow over the new surface until it is smooth.
Left-hand levelling
Offset the circle and drawbar slightly to the right of the frame.
Rotate the circle and tilt the moldboard depending on the
amount of material to be moved.
Position the moldboard angle according to the desired depth
of the cut. Deposit the windrow outside the right tandem
wheels.
191
Lean the front wheels to the right to overcome the side thrust.
Articulate the frame to the left. If the drive wheels lose traction,
reduce the articulation angle. This will decrease the cutting
angle and side thrust allowing the drive wheels to regain
traction. Deposit the windrow between the tandem wheels.
Spread the windrow over the new surface until it is smooth.
Road construction
Right-hand ‘V’ ditching
1 Place a line of stakes to define where the ditch will be
constructed.
2 Position the moldboard with the toe just outside the front right
wheel and the moldboard heel just ahead of the left tandem
wheels.
3 Tilt the moldboard back and raise the heel to carry the material
inside the left tandem wheels.
4 Lean the front wheels left to counteract side thrust.
5 Make the marking pass slowly.
6 On a firm surface, keep the frame straight.
7 If the surface is loose, articulate the frame to keep the drive
wheels on firm ground.
Lean wheels left
8 Make the second pass with the front right wheel on the bottom
of the first cut. Cut a 3 to 1 slope.
Second pass cut

192
9 A clean-up pass may be required as the windrow builds up on
the roadside. Side shift the circle towards the ditch. Carry the
material well inside the toe of the moldboard to prevent
spillage back into the ditch.
Carrying material inside the toe
10 Cut the ditch back slope by using the blade lift system to move
the moldboard to the right side of the machine. Rotate the
circle counter clockwise and lower the left blade lift cylinder
while the circle is rotating.
For additional information, see moldboard blade lift
procedure.
Preparing to cut ditch back slope
11 Centre the moldboard heel in front of the right tandem wheels.

Drive the machine with the tandem wheels in the ditch. Deposit
the material in the ditch.
12 When you have completed the back slope procedure, position
the moldboard to complete the clean-up pass. This spreads
the windrow created by the back slope and builds up the road
surface.
13 Repeat these procedures to cut the ditch on the other side of
the road.
Depositing material in the ditch
High bank cutting

1 Establish a level platform surface for machine operation.
2 If the platform surface is hard, make a pass cutting into the
platform. This pass should slope slightly towards the bank to
stop the machine from sliding away while cutting into the bank
slope.
Establishing a level platform surface

193
3 Prepare the machine for cutting the bank slope by side shifting
the circle and moldboard as far as possible to the side of the
machine where you will be working.
4 Rotate the circle and moldboard counter clockwise and lower
the left blade lift cylinder at the same time. See moldboard
blade lift procedure.
5 Lower or raise the circle shift cylinder to position the heel of
the moldboard at the bottom of the bank slope and aligned with
the inner edge of the tandem wheels.
6 Move the machine slowly towards the bank. Check to see if
the moldboard is angled correctly before actually cutting into
Preparing to cut bank slope the bank.
7 While cutting the slope, ensure the tandem wheels are near
the base of the bank slope.
8 The depth of cut or degree of slope required can be
accomplished easily by raising or lowering the moldboard,
tilting the moldboard or leaning the front wheels.
9 Keep the platform surface clean by moving the windrow after
each pass on the bank slope.
Cutting bank slope
10 On the level platform surface, articulate the front frame

towards the bank slope and allow the front wheels to ride the
bank slope and position the moldboard as required. The
tandem wheels must be kept on the level platform surface.
Bank slope final pass
Flat bottom ditching – gravel roads

If no ‘V’ ditch exists, see ‘V’ ditching procedure and cut a ditch to
the desired depth.
1 The first step is to cut the ditch fore slope.
2 With the frame straight, operate the machine with the right
wheels riding at the bottom of the ‘V’ ditch.
3 Position the moldboard toe behind the front right wheel, and
the heel outside and in front of the left tandem wheels.
4 Tilt the moldboard forward.
5 Lower the moldboard toe to the bottom of the ditch.
6 Raise or lower the heel to the required ditch fore slope and
lean the front wheels to the left.
7 Deposit the material onto the shoulder.
Cutting the ditch fore slope
1 Back slope
2 Fore slope
3 Windrow
194
8 Reposition the moldboard to cut a second ‘V’ ditch closer to
the road and not as deep as the first ‘V’ ditch cut. Deposit the
material onto the shoulder.
Cutting the second “V” ditch

1 Back slope
2 Fore slope
3 Windrow
9 Reposition the moldboard to make a clean-up pass for the

material built up on the road shoulder. Side shift the circle
towards the ditch. Carry the material well inside the toe of the
moldboard to prevent spillage back into the ditch.
10 Spread the material to the centre of the road to create a crown.
See Crowning a road procedure.
Carrying material inside the toe

1 Spread out material
2 Back slope
3 Fore slope
4 Windrow
11 If the back slope is insufficient or if you are building a new road,

make a pass to cut the back slope. See ‘V’ ditching
procedure.
Backslope cutting pass

1 Cut back slope
2 Back slope
3 Fore slope
12 To begin a flat bottom cut, operate the machine with its right
side wheels riding in the first ‘V’ ditch cut.
13 Position the moldboard toe at the bottom of the ditch back
slope and the heel at the bottom of the ditch fore slope.
14 Tilt and lower the moldboard for the required depth.
15 Make a horizontal cut and lean the front wheels to the left.
Cutting a flat bottom ditch

1 Flat bottom cut
2 Back slope
3 Windrow
4 Fore slope
195
16 Reposition the moldboard to make a cleanup pass to spread
the windrow created by the flat bottom cut up onto the
shoulder. Spread this material and finish the final grade.
Speading the material for final grade

1 Clean-up pass
2 Spread out material
3 Back slope
4 Fore slope
5 Windrow
Crowning a road
Crowning a road is simply constructing a road surface so that the
centre of the road is higher than the road edge. This allows water
to drain into the ditches as quickly as possible. If the crown is not
built properly, water is trapped and breaks up the road crust to
produce potholes and washboards. The amount of crown is the
amount of slope on the road. For good drainage, a road should
have a crown of 8–13 mm for every 305 mm (0.3–0.5 in for every
12 in) of width measured from the centre of the road to the outside
edge where the road meets the shoulder.
Example of road section

A Road surface width
B Lane width
C Crown height
D Edge of road surface
E Shoulder
F Height from edge of road
1 After the ditches have been constructed, grade the excess

material to the centre of the road, creating a windrow.
2 Position the moldboard parallel to the front axle.
3 Drive the machine straight down the centre of the windrow,
keeping the moldboard high on the windrow to feather the
material to both sides of the machine.
Moldboard high on windrow
4 Construct the crown slope by tilting the moldboard forward and

position 60°–75° with the centerline of the frame. Place the
transmission in a higher gear to increase your speed. Raise
the heel of the moldboard slightly to allow the material to be
feathered. Work both sides of the road constructing the slope
at the same time.
5 When you reach the shoulders, align the heel of the moldboard
with the tandem wheels to compact the excess material.
Raise heel and tilt moldboard forward

196
Cul-de-sac using articulation
1 Start grading at the perimeter of the cul-de-sac in a circular
pattern and work the material towards the centre. Angle the
moldboard to deposit the material outside the tandem wheels.
Grading a cul-de-sac
2 Articulate the frame and lean the wheels in the direction you
are turning to increase steering control as you approach the
centre of the cul-de-sac.
Grading toward cul-de-sac center — windrowing

out
3 To begin the finished grade of the cul-de-sac, drive the

machine opposite to the direction you were previously
operating at the outside edge and form a windrow towards the
centre.
4 Tilt the moldboard forward and move the windrow towards the
centre of the cul-de-sac
5 Check the slope as you grade the windrow towards the centre,
making the centre the highest point.
Grading cul-de-sac — opposite direction
6 When you have completed circling, grade the excess material

out the cul-de-sac entrance.
Finish pass
197
Finishing a gradual slope using articulation
WARNING
1 If possible, it is best to start from the top of the slope and finish
your grading at the bottom.
2 Work back and forth across the slope.
3 Always extend the moldboard down slope.
4 Articulate the machine.
5 Lean the front wheels vertically and position the uphill front
wheel on the edge of the windrow created from the previous
pass. This provides stability and allows you to create an even
grade.
Finishing a gradual slope using articulation
1 Work across slope
2 Start from the top and finish at the bottom
6 Position the toe of the moldboard outside and behind the uphill
wheel so that the heel of the moldboard deposits the material
outside the downhill tandem wheels.
7 When you have completed grading the slope, spread the
remaining material to make a smooth finished grade.
Depositing material down slope

1 Windrow deposited outside tandem wheels
2 Uphill front wheel
3 Moldboard toe
Road maintenance – gravel roads

Check the road surface material. If it is dry, use water to dampen
it. This results in a better finished surface.
Washboard road surface or potholes need reshaping because of
the effects of weather and traffic. Reshaping involves cutting and
re-mixing aggregates and fines
1 Start at the edge of the shoulder and cut the material into a
windrow. Deposit the material towards the centre of the road
and outside the tandem wheels.
2 Ensure that the circle is centred and the moldboard is angled
at 30° to the frame centre line.
3 Tilt the moldboard back for maximum cutting to remove the
ridges and potholes.
198
4 Lean the front wheels towards the heel side of the moldboard
as you work towards the centre of the road.
5 Repeat these procedures for the other side of the road surface.
6 In general, tilt the moldboard forward for spreading material
and back for ditching.
Lean wheels toward heel

1 Tilt moldboard back
7 Build the road surface by moving half the windrow towards the
shoulder. Feather the material over the road surface as you
check the crown and work towards the shoulder with each
pass.
Feathering windrow material
8 As you make a final pass at the edge of the shoulder, raise the
heel of the moldboard to feather the material and use the
tandem wheels to compact any remaining material.
Raise heel of moldboard
Right side ditch clean-up

1 Position the moldboard toe behind the front right wheel.
2 Lower the right blade lift cylinder to position the moldboard to
the depth of the ditch.
3 Move the left blade lift cylinder to position the heel of the
moldboard. This delivers the material onto the fore slope
between the tandem wheels without cutting the fore slope.
4 Lean the front wheels slightly left to counteract side thrust.
Moldboard toe behind the front right wheel
5 For the next pass, reposition the moldboard as required to

move the material up the fore slope and onto the shoulder.
6 On the next pass spread the material to finish the shoulder
grade.
Moving material up the right fore slope

199
Left side ditch clean-up
1 Position the moldboard toe behind the front left wheel.
2 Lower the left blade lift cylinder to position the moldboard to
the depth of the ditch.
3 Move the right blade lift cylinder to position the heel of the
moldboard. This delivers the material onto the fore slope
between the tandem wheels without cutting the fore slope.
4 Lean the front wheels slightly right to counteract side thrust.
Moldboard toe behind the front left wheel

1 Moldboard toe
5 For the next pass, reposition the moldboard as required to

move the material up the fore slope and onto the shoulder.
6 On the next pass spread the material to finish the shoulder
grade.
Moving material up the left fore slope
Cleaning a wet ditch

1 Remove the articulation lock pin before attempting to articulate
the machine. Install the articulation lock pin when not using the
articulation function.
2 Articulate the machine so that the front wheels are in the ditch.
3 Keep the tandem wheels on the shoulder to prevent wheel
slippage in the wet or soft material of the ditch.
4 Side shift the circle and drawbar assembly towards the ditch.
First pass cleaning wet ditch
5 Tilt and angle the moldboard as required to move the material

out of the ditch and to deposit it between the tandem wheels.
Depositing material between the tandem wheels

200
6 For the next pass, straighten the frame, side shift the circle
and drawbar assembly and centre it under the frame. Position
and angle the moldboard as required to spread the wet
material over the shoulder.
Depositing wet material over the fore slope
Dragging a shoulder (right side)

1 Check the material you will be grading. If it is dry, use water to
dampen it. This results in a better finished surface.
2 Position the right toe of the moldboard in line with the outer
edge of the front right wheel.
3 Angle the moldboard 30° to 45° from the centre line of the
frame. Tilt the moldboard forward to drag the material, not to
cut it.
4 Lean the front wheels to the left to counteract side trust.
5 Deposit the material outside the left tandem wheels onto the
edge of the road.
Lean wheels left
6 On the next pass, collect the windrow from the edge of the
road and feather the material back onto the shoulder surface.
Remember to adjust the moldboard to create a gentle slope
towards the ditch.
7 Ensure that you clean up the road surface before allowing
traffic to use the roadway.
8 Procedures and illustrations shown are for right side grading.
For left side grading, lean the front wheels and position the
moldboard opposite to the description and illustrations shown.
Feathering the material

Whole-body vibrations 201
Whole-body vibrations
Whole-body vibrations generated by construction machinery are
affected by a number of factors, such as the working mode,
ground conditions, and machine speed.
To a large extent the operator can influence the actual vibration
levels, because the operator controls the speed of the machine,
its working mode, the travel path, etc. Therefore, this may result
in several different vibration levels for the same type of machine.
For cab specifications, see page 328.
Guidelines for reducing vibration levels on
earthmoving machines
Use the proper type and size of machine, with optional
equipment and attachments for a certain application.
Make sure that the ground is kept in good condition.
- Remove larger stones and obstacles.
- Fill in any ditches and holes.
- Provide equipment and schedule time for maintaining terrain
conditions.
Adjust the machine speed and chose a suitable travel path to
minimise the vibration level.
- Travel around obstacles and uneven ground.
- Reduce the speed when it is necessary to go over rough
terrain.
Maintain machines according to the manufacturer's
recommendations.
- Tire pressures.
- Brake and steering systems.
- Controls, hydraulic system and linkages.
Make sure that the operator seat is maintained and correctly
adjusted:
- Adjust the seat and its suspension according to the operator
weight and height.
- Inspect and maintain the operator seat suspension and
adjustment mechanism.
- Use the seat belt and adjust it correctly.
Steer, brake, accelerate, shift gears, and move the
attachments smoothly.
Minimise vibrations during long work cycle or long distance
travelling.
- Use Boom Suspension System if the machine is equipped
with such a system.
- If the machine is not equipped with Boom Suspension
System, lower the speed to avoid bouncing.
- Transport machines when there are long distances between
worksites.
Back pain associated with whole-body vibrations may be caused
by other risk factors. The following guidelines can be effective to
minimise risks of back pains:
- Adjust the seat and controls to achieve good posture.
- Adjust the mirrors to minimise twisted posture.
- Provide breaks to reduce long periods of sitting.
- Avoid jumping down from the machine.
- Minimise repeated handling and lifting of heavy objects.
202 Working within dangerous areas
Working within dangerous areas

Do not operate too close to the edge of a quay, ramp, etc.
Operate slowly where space is tight and check that there is
enough room for the machine and load.
When operating under ground special equipment is needed,
e.g., certified engine, within EU and EEA-countries. Contact
your dealer.
When operating in poor light conditions, e.g., indoors and in
tunnels, use the machine's lights.
Do not work with or operate the machine when visibility is poor,
such as in thick fog, heavy snowfall or rain.
The machine must be especially equipped for work in
contaminated environments or health-hazardous areas.
Contact your dealer. Also check the local regulations before
you enter the area with the machine.
High voltage overhead power line
DANGER
Always contact the facility owner before working lead to electrical flash-over and electrocution.
near a high-voltage facility. Always keep the minimum clearance from overhead power lines.
High voltage is lethal and may be powerful enough to destroy both
the machine and attachment. Always contact the responsible
power company before starting to work near high voltage power
lines. Review the special instructions that the power company has
issued for working or being close to power lines.
Consider all power lines to be 'live' with electric power, even those
that are supposed to be without electric power. At any time,
working when the machine or its load is closer to the power line
than the minimum safety distance entails a very serious risk, see
the table below.
Voltage Distance
Volt (V) m ft
~50,000 3 10
50,000~69,000 4.6 15
69,000~138,000 5 16.4
138,000~250,000 6 20
250,000~500,000 8 26
500,000~550,000 11 35
550,000~750,000 13 43
750,000~ 14 46
Remember that the voltage in the power line determines the
safety distance. Electrical flashovers may damage the machine
and injure the operator at relatively great distances from the
power line.
Find out what actions need to be taken if an operator has been
exposed to an electrical flashover.
Working within dangerous areas 203
NOTICE
When transporting the machine also take overhead power lines
into consideration.
Railroad overhead contact system
DANGER
lead to electrical flash-over and electrocution.
Always keep the minimum clearance from overhead power lines.
Loading and unloading is only permitted between the designated
limit signs. The signs may be installed on the contact line or on
special posts.
Contact authorised railroad personnel for permission to load or
unload.
After a break in the work, always take new contact with railroad
personnel.
Electrical magnetic field (EMF)

Working in areas exposed to electromagnetic fields,
EMF
WARNING
Machines equipped with Comfort Drive Control (CDC) or electric
servo may not be used in areas where there is are static or low-
frequency magnetic fields, for example, aluminum smelter plants.
In these areas there may be interference with safety-related
functions. If you are unsure if there are low-frequency magnetic
fields on your work site, ask your employer.
The site management has an obligation to know whether there
are areas where there are strong electromagnetic fields and to
inform the machine operator about these.
The operator should seek information whether the work site
may be exposed to strong electromagnetic fields.
Electromagnetic fields, EMF, may affect the machine, if it is
equipped with electric servo lever control and comfort drive
control (CDC). For Comfort Drive Control, see page Comfort
Drive Control, CDC (optional equipment).
Underground cables and pipes

Make sure that authorities or companies responsible for cables
and pipes have been contacted and that their instructions are
followed. Also check which rules apply to ground personnel
regarding exposing cables and pipes. Normally only the service
companies' own personnel may expose and arrange provisional
suspension of cables.
Make use of a signal man when you cannot see the actual point
where you are working or when the position of the pipe or cable
is critical, see page 230.The position of the pipe or cable may
deviate from the drawing or distances may be incorrectly
determined. Regard all electrical cables as live.
Working on slopes
WARNING
Risk of injury or death.
Machine could become unstable while operating on slopes or
steep grades resulting in loss of control, tipover or rollover.
Operate machine up or down slope. Avoid turning and operating
across the slope. Exercise extreme caution when working on a
steep grade.
The use of the machine on slopes can be split into two categories,
moving up or down the slope, or moving sideways along the
slope. When operating up or down, (parallel) to the slope the
factors influencing gradeability and braking are most critical to
safe operation. When operating across (perpendicular) to the
slope, factors influencing lateral stability (resistance to rolling
over) are most critical. In both categories, the factors that
influence how tires, blade and attachments interact with the
ground are important.
The most important of all the factors is the skill and training of the
operator. Read and understand all the material in the Operator’s
Manual. Operate on steeper slopes only after you have been
instructed and mastered use of the machine and its features and
attachments on level and slightly sloped areas. Once well trained,
the operator will be able to observe and evaluate the operating
environment, the task to be completed, the condition and the feel
of the machine to assess the job and make safe and effective
operating decisions.
Considerations when working on grades
Speed of travel
At higher speeds, forces of inertia tend to make the machine
less stable. Operate the machine and functions slowly and
smoothly.
Roughness of terrain or surface
The machine may be less stable or have reduced ability to
climb or stop with uneven terrain.
Type and condition of surface material
New material may not be compacted and give way
unexpectedly. Rocky surfaces may roll or slide under the tires
and cause the machine to slide downhill or overturn. Wet soil
and loose rocks may greatly increase the chance of sliding.
Weather conditions
When working on a steep grade, pay attention to weather and
ground conditions, as they may change through the day.
Cab door
Be careful when opening the cab door as it may be more
difficult to control when the machine is on a slope. When
closing the door, make certain the door is completely closed
and latched.
Approach
When approaching or beginning a downhill grade, operate
slowly with the differential lock engaged.
Gear selection
Do not operate faster or in a higher gear down grade than you
would if you were climbing the grade.
Direction change
Do not change direction while on a grade. Avoid travelling
across a grade, when possible.
Machine sliding
Working within dangerous areas 205
If the machine begins to slide downhill, lower the blade
immediately.
Engine stall
If the engine stops while the machine is on a grade and cannot
be restarted, apply the parking brake and lower the blade to
the ground before leaving the machine.
Wheel slide and tire spin
Avoid operation on grades where the wheels slide or the tires
spin.
Machine attachment interface
Each attachment changes the behaviour of the machine in a
different way. Understand how plows, snow wings, rippers and
other attachments affect the machine’s performance on a slope
before beginning a task. Remember that their use may also
require additional weights and counterweights that will further
change how the machine reacts on a slope.
Component orientation
Orientation of the standard machine components may change
how the machine behaves. Stability will be affected by the
wheel lean angle, articulation angle, and position of the
drawbar, circle and blade.
Frame articulation
Articulating the frame so the centre of the machine is uphill from
the front and rear of the machine can improve lateral stability.
Machine balance
Use of the blade or implements may change the wheel loading
and the balance and traction of the machine.
Component wear
Slope operation may increase wear on some components.
Adjust the inspection and service intervals accordingly.
Special equipment
Use of the machine on extreme slopes may require special
equipment.
NOTE!
Maximum permitted angle of operation is determined by the limits
of lubrication for the engine and other components. Machine
damage may occur if these angles are exceeded.
Maximum permitted angles of operation
Longitudinal (A) Lateral (B)
Continuous Momentary Continuous Momentary
operation operation operation operation
A = 22° (40%) A = much B = 18.4° (33%) Operation
greater than Contact your across steep
22° (40%) Volvo grades
Operation at Construction requires
Maximum permitted angle
well over 22° Equipment extreme
A Machine affected in the longitudinal direction (40%) is dealer if your caution and a
B Machine affected in the lateral direction possible, application highly skilled
slope is requires operator,
limited by operation on especially
engine steeper slopes. during
lubrication. momentary
operation.
Working in water and on boggy ground

Be very careful when operating the machine in a body of water or
crossing a stream, especially if the water is dark, cloudy, or turbid.
The water course may have hidden obstacles under the surface
or the depth may change suddenly, endangering the operator and
the machine. Refrain from operating in the area if you are not sure
that you can do so without taking risks.
After working in water, the lubrication points on the
undercarriage, which have been under water, must be
lubricated, so that the water is driven out.
Heavy timber mats can be used to support the machine when
working on boggy ground. The mats should be kept as flat and
clean as possible.
Working in cold weather
WARNING
Risk of crushing injury.
The hydraulic system could respond slowly at low temperatures
and cause unexpected machine movements.
Operate carefully until the hydraulic system has reached
operating temperature.
Read the advice for start, see page 138.
The windows should be free from ice and snow before starting to
use the machine.
Watch out for slippery parts on the machine. Only step on slip-
protected areas.
Use an ice scraper to remove ice from the windows. If needed,
use a scraper with a long handle or a ladder.
WARNING
Risk of frostbite.
Bare skin can freeze stuck to cold metal which could cause injury.
Use personal protective equipment when handling cold objects.
DANGER
Risk of electrical shock.
Personal injury results if a body part comes into contact with a
machine that conducts electric power.
Disconnect the electrical engine heater before working on the
machine.
Attachments 207
Attachments
WARNING
Do not use attachments for lifting or transporting a person or
persons. Personal injuries may result.
Using the correct attachment for each job is a decisive factor
when it comes to the machine's capacity.
Always follow Volvo recommendations when selecting
attachments. Follow the instructions in the Operator's Manual.
According to the EU machine directive there must be a CE-
marking on the machine's product plate as well as a "Declaration
of Conformity". The marking also covers the attachments that are
designed by Volvo and adapted to Volvo machines, since they
are an integrated part of the machine and are adapted for the
same.
Attachments of the category "interchangeable equipment"
(attachments that can be changed by the operator), designed by
Volvo, are CE-marked, adapted to Volvo machines, and are
supplied with a "Declaration of Conformity" as well as instructions.
The machine owner is responsible for making sure that the
attachments are approved for installation on the machine. The
machine owner is responsible for the safety of the machine and
attachment combination.
For more detailed information on selecting attachments, contact
a Volvo dealer to obtain the attachment catalogue.
The machine is prepared for a wide range of different
attachments. To connect these hydraulically to the machine, the
hydraulics must be depressurized.
The machine's stability may vary depending on the
attachments.
Transporting attachments with another vehicle on
highway and by ship:
Follow instructions according to standard SS-EN 12195-1, as well
as local transport rules.
208 Attachments, connecting and disconnecting
Attachments, connecting and

disconnecting
The installation and removal of optional equipment must be done
by trained service personnel.
Attachments, installing 209
Attachments, installing
Attachments, installing
Scarifier, installing
The attachment is attached with four pins, see installation manual.
NOTE!
This attachment requires that the parallel lift attachment frame kit
is installed.
Dozer blade, installing
NOTE!
is installed.
Push block, installing
NOTE!
is installed.
Parallel lift attachment frame kit, installing

Foreword
The mechanic must always read the instructions in the Service
Manual's booklet "Safety and Environment" booklet before
proceeding.
The equipment must be assembled by an authorised person at
an authorized workshop.
The Installation Instruction is based on the use of special tools,
E-tools and standard tools generally available.
Regarding bolted joints which are not listed here, see "Volvo
standard tightening torques".
Volvo Construction Equipment will accept no responsibility if other
tools or work methods than those described in this publication are
used.
Volvo works with continuous improvement of the machine's
environmental performance.
Description
This document provides detailed instructions for proper
installation of a parallel lift attachment frame kit. When properly
installed, the kit is designed to carry front mounted attachments
on the nose of the machine.
210 Attachments, installing
Contents of the parallel lift attachment frame kit
10
12
1
4
7 8 3
11
7
7
6
9 5
7
7
2
6
11
7
13
15
17 16
14
15
V1056901
Parallel lift attachment frame kit, contents

Item Qty Description

1 8 Grease fitting
2 1 Lock pin
3 1 Lock pin
4 1 Parallel lift cylinder
5 10 Washer
6 10 Patch screw
7 8 Lock pin
8 2 Link arm
9 1 Lifting arm (right side)
10 1 Base plate
11 2 Spacer
12 N/A S/N plate (N/A)
13 1 Hose assembly
14 1 Hose assembly
15 2 Hydraulic adapter, straight
16 1 Hydraulic adapter, elbow
17 1 Hydraulic adapter, elbow, long
Work description:
1 Place the machine in the Service Position. See page 232.
WARNING
Only use lifting devices with adequate capacity.
2 Using a suitable lifting device, position the base plate onto the
nose plate. Weight 318 kg (700 lb).
3 Install the necessary hexagon screws, washers and nuts.
4 Centre the base plate and torque the hardware to
specification. Refer to the standard tightening torques in the
Service Manual.
5 Remove any paint, dirt or debris from the pin bores.
V1056910
Positioning the base plate onto the nose plate.

WARNING
6 Using a suitable lifting strap, position and install the lifting arm
onto the base plate. Weight of lifting arm 136 kg (299 lb).
7 Install the lock pins and the patch screws, washers and
spacers. Torque the patch screws to specification. Refer to the
standard tightening torques in the Service Manual.
WARNING
V1056912
Positioning and installing the lifting arm onto the

base plate.
8 Using a suitable lifting strap, install the parallel lift cylinder onto
the base plate. Weight of parallel lift cylinder 56 kg (125 lb).
Install the lock pin, patch screw, washer and spacer. Torque
the patch screw to specification. Refer to the standard
tightening torques in the Service Manual.
WARNING
V1056913
Positioning and installing the parallel lift cylinder
9 Using a suitable lifting strap, position the lifting arm and align
it with the parallel lift cylinder. Install the lock pin and a patch
screw, washer and spacer. Torque the patch screw to
specification. Refer to the standard tightening torques in the
Service Manual.
V1056914
Aligning and installing the lifting arm with the

parallel lift cylinder
WARNING
10 Using a suitable lifting strap, install the link arms to the base
plate. Weight of each link arm 45 kg (100 lb). Install the lock
pins and the patch screws, washers and spacers. Torque the
patch screws to specification. Refer to the standard tightening
torques in the Service Manual.
11 Install the fittings in the parallel lift cylinder and torque to
specification. Refer to Hydraulic connections, tightening
12 Install the hydraulic adapters and hose assemblies. Torque to
specification. Refer to Hydraulic connections, tightening
V1056915
13 Install the grease fittings into the pin bores and apply lubricant
Installing the link arms
to the assembly.
14 Place the machine back in service.
Mid mount scarifier, installing

Foreword
The mechanic must always read the instructions in the Service
proceeding.
The Installation Instruction sometimes refers to information in the
Service Manual.
The equipment must be assembled by an authorised person at
an authorised workshop.
E-tools and standard tools generally available. Regarding bolted
joints which are not listed here, see "Volvo standard tightening
torques".
used.
Description
installation of a mid mount scarifier kit. When properly installed,
the kit is designed to be useful for breaking up hard surfaces such
as asphalt, rocky subgrade and ice to prepare for grading.
Contents of mid mount scarifier kit
Main assembly diagram for kit

Main assembly diagram for kit

1 2 Attachment bracket
2 2 Pivot anchor
3 4 Ball stud
4 1 Arm (left side)
5 1 Box
6 1 Lifting arm (left side)
7 1 Cross shaft
8 1 Arm (right side)
9 1 Lifting arm (right side)
10 4 Ball cap
11 2 Pillow block assembly
12 36 Washer
13 4 Washer
14 16 Lock nut
15 10 Hexagon screw
16 4 Hexagon screw
17 4 Washer
18 4 Lock nut
19 2 Grease fitting
20 8 Hexagon screw
21 8 Washer
22 4 Hexagon nut
23 5 Tooth
24 2 Pin
25 2 Washer
26 2 Hexagon screw
27 8 Hexagon screw
28 2 Spherical plain bearing
29 2 Retaining ring
30 6 Grease fitting
31 1 Hexagon screw
32 1 Hexagon screw
33 1 Cylinder mount
34 16 Shim
35 4 Shim (0.10 mm)
36 12 Shim (0.20 mm)
37 1 Hydraulic cylinder
38 2 Hydraulic adapter, elbow
39 2 Hydraulic adapter, straight
40 1 Hose assembly
41 1 Hose assembly
Work description:
1 Place machine in the service position. Refer to the Service
Manual.
2 Remove the lower and centre hose covers on the nose.
3 Remove any traces of paint from the bearing contact surfaces
on the kit components.
WARNING
4 Using a suitable lifting device, install the attachment brackets
onto the frame of the machine. Secure with the provided
hexagon screws, washers and lock nuts. Tighten and torque.
Weight 31.03 kg (83.13 lb).
5 Install the pivot anchors to the frame securing them with the
hexagon screws and washers. Tighten and torque. Refer to
illustrations for proper orientation.
6 Install the cylinder mount onto the nose plate, securing it with
hexagon screws and washers. Tighten and torque.
7 Position the lower pillow block sections onto the attachment
brackets and insert the hexagon screws. Apply grease to the
lower pillow block sections.
8 Install the ball studs into the cross shaft and secure with lock
nuts. Tighten and torque.
WARNING
9 Using a lifting strap and suitable lifting device, insert the cross
shaft into the lower pillow bock sections.
10 Apply grease to the upper pillow block sections. Remove the
hexagon screws from the lower pillow block sections. Mate the
corresponding upper and lower pillow block sections and
secure to the attachment brackets with the hexagon screws,
washers and lock nuts. Do not tighten the hexagon screws at
this time.
11 Insert shim packs between the upper and lower pillow blocks
(4 shims per pack). Snug the hexagon screws to ensure the
shim packs remain secured between the pillow blocks. Ensure
that the pillow blocks are still able to shift freely on the
attachment brackets.
12 Install spherical plain bearings into the arms and secure with
the retaining rings.
WARNING
13 Using a suitable lifting device and a 1 m lifting strap, position
the arms on the machine and secure them to the pivot anchors
with the pins, hexagon screws and washers. Weight per arm:
Inserting a shim between the pillow blocks 88.14 kg (194.37 lb).
1 Upper pillow block
2 Lower pillow block
3 Shim
4 Hexagon screw
WARNING
5 Washer Only use lifting devices with adequate capacity.
6 Lock nut
14 Using a suitable lifting device, position the box under the
machine. Weight: 194.19 kg (428.12 lb).
15 Secure the box to the arms with the ball studs, washers and
lock nuts. Tighten and torque.
16 Select the desired box pitch by inserting the hexagon screw
through the selector hole on the box and secure it to the arm
with the washers and lock nuts. Tighten and torque.
17 Install the ball caps to each end of the lifting arms with the
hexagon screws, hexagon nuts and washers. Do not tighten
the hexagon screws at this time. Install the lifting arm
assemblies onto the cross shaft ball studs.
Securing the box to the arms

1 Box
2 Arm
3 Ball stud
4 Box pitch selector holes
18 Insert three 0.20 mm thick shims between the ball stud and
lifting arm. Tighten the hexagon screws and ensure that the
lifting arm will pivot on the ball stud without binding. If
necessary, adjust the shim pack with 0.10 mm thick shims
provided to achieve the necessary pre-load.
19 Loosen the hexagon screws securing the lifting arms to the
cross shaft ball studs and remove the shim packs. Disconnect
the lifting arms from the cross shaft ball studs and attach the
opposite end of the lifting arms to the box ball studs.
20 Insert three 0.20 mm thick shims between the ball stud and
lifting arm. Tighten the hexagon screws and ensure that the
lifting arm will pivot on the ball stud without binding. If
necessary, adjust the shim pack with 0.10 mm thick shims
provided to achieve the necessary pre-load.
Inserting shims between the ball stud and lifting
arm
1 Arm
WARNING
2 Ball cap Only use lifting devices with adequate capacity.
3 Shim
4 Lifting arm 21 Using a suitable lifting device, raise the box to allow the lifting
5 Hexagon screw arms to be re-connected to the cross shaft ball studs. Re-insert
6 Washer the pre-calculated shim packs into the ball caps and tighten
7 Lock nut the hexagon screws.
WARNING
22 Using a suitable lifting device and a 1 m lifting strap, position
the hydraulic cylinder onto the cylinder mount. Secure the
hydraulic cylinder (barrel end) to the cylinder mount using the
hexagon screw, washers and lock nut. Note: Ensure that the
lock nut is not over tightened preventing the hydraulic cylinder
from pivoting on the hexagon screw.
23 Remove the plugs in the hydraulic cylinder and extend the
cylinder rod so that it can be attached to the cross shaft.
Secure the hydraulic cylinder to the cross shaft with the
hexagon screw, washers and lock nut. Note” ensure that the
lock nut is not over tightened preventing the hydraulic cylinder
from pivoting on the hexagon screw.
24 Install the elbow hydraulic adapters into the hydraulic cylinder
and the straight hydraulic adapters into the bulkhead. Tighten
and torque.
25 Connect the hose assembly from the bulkhead fittings to the
hydraulic cylinder.
26 Raise and lower the scarifier several times using the hydraulic
cylinder to seat the cross shaft in the pillow blocks. Torque the
hexagon screws securing the cross shaft and pillow block
assembly to the attachment brackets. Leave the scarifier in the
raised position.
27 Install the ripper shanks into the box and secure with the
wedges.
28 Using a soft-faced hammer, tap the teeth onto the tapered
ripper shank.
29 Insert grease nipples into the pillow blocks, pins and ball caps.
30 Apply grease to all necessary points on the scarifier.
31 Re-install the lower nose cover to the frame.
Installing the shanks and wedges into the box

1 Shank
2 Wedge
Ripper, installing
Foreword
The Mechanic must always read the instructions in the Service
proceeding.
The Installation Instruction sometimes refers to information in the
Operators and Service Manual.
The equipment must be assembled by an authorized person at
an authorized workshop.
E-tools and standard tools generally available. Regarding bolted
joints which are not listed here, see "Volvo standard tightening
torques".
used.
Description
installation of a ripper kit. When properly installed, the kit is
designed to aid in dislodging large rocks and tree stumps as well
as breaking up asphalt pavement.
Ripper kit contents for G930
6 2
4
3
7
4
8 1615
13
12
1
10
11
17 14 9
V1056861
Ripper kit contents (G930 shown)

1 1 Ripper
2 2 Hydraulic adapter
3 2 Hydraulic adapter, union
5 1 Hose assembly
6 1 Hose assembly
7 1 Hose assembly
8 1 Hose assembly
9 4 Washer
10 6 Washer
11 6 Hexagon screw
12 4 Shim (1.5 mm)
13 2 Shim (2 mm)
14 4 Hexagon screw
15 2 Washer
16 2 Hexagon screw
17 2 Link arm
Ripper kit contents for G940, G946, G960

1 1 Ripper
5 1 Hose assembly
6 1 Hose assembly
7 1 Hose assembly
8 1 Hose assembly
9 4 Washer
10 6 Washer
11 6 Hexagon screw
12 4 Shim (1.5 mm)
13 2 Shim (2 mm)
14 4 Hexagon screw
15 2 Washer
16 2 Hexagon screw
17 2 Link arm
Ripper kit contents for G970, G976, G990

1 1 Ripper
5 1 Hose assembly
6 1 Hose assembly
7 1 Hose assembly
8 1 Hose assembly
9 4 Washer
10 6 Washer
11 6 Hexagon screw
12 4 Shim (1.5 mm)
13 2 Shim (2 mm)
14 4 Hexagon screw
15 2 Washer
16 2 Hexagon screw
17 2 Link arm
Work description:
1 Place machine in the service position. Refer to the service
manual.
2 Unpack the kit and verify the contents according to the
assembly diagram and description of the kit contents.
3 Install the support arch. Refer to rear attachment support arch
mounting kit installation instruction.
4 Secure the ripper box to the rear ripper frame before lifting it
off the shipping container.
5 Remove the mounting hardware from the ripper frame.
6 Loosen the hexagon screws and place the link arms in the
horizontal position.
WARNING
V1043048
Securing the ripper box to the ripper frame
7 Using a suitable lifting device and spreader bar, position the

ripper assembly onto the machine and secure the mounting
base to the frame of the machine using the mounting
hardware. Do not tighten. Weight of ripper: 1002 kg (2209 lb).
8 Snug the hexagon screws securing the mounting base to the
sides of the machine frame. Tighten and torque the hexagons
screws securing the mounting base to the rear of the frame.
Continue to tighten and torque the hexagon screws on the
sides of the frame.
9 Install a support stand underneath the ripper box and remove
the spreader bar and lifting device from the ripper.
WARNING
V1043049
Ripper lifted and mounted to the frame using a

spreader bar
10 Using a suitable lifting device, raise the ripper box and remove
the chain securing the ripper box to the mounting base.
11 Remove the caps from the hydraulic hoses and allow the lift
cylinders to extend while the ripper box is lowered to the
ground.
12 Connect the hydraulic hoses to the fittings on the machine.
Tighten and torque.
V1058693
Lifting device secured to mounting base, left side

13 Align the link arms of the ripper with the support arch and insert
shims and necessary to remove the gap between the two
parts.
14 Secure the ripper and shims to the support arch with the
washers and hexagon screws. Tighten and torque.
V1043051
Shimming at the support arch end of the link arms
15 Tighten and torque the hexagon screws securing the link arms
to the ripper mounting base.
16 Start the machine and cycle the ripper up and down several
times to check for leaks and proper operation.
17 Check the hydraulic oil level and add oil as required to fill the
tank to the recommended fill level specification, see page
289.
V1043050
Hexagon screws and washers in the link arms at

the ripper end
224 Dozer blade
Dozer blade
The dozer blade is used for spreading, backfilling and knocking
down piles of material.
Machines can be equipped with optional front lift float capabilities
see page 84 for further information.
NOTE!
On machines with conventional steering, the dozer blade is
hydraulically raised and lowered using the control lever on the
pedestal, see page 84.
On machines with joystick steering, the dozer blade is
hydraulically raised and lowered using the right joystick, see page
91.
Dozer blade control, conventional steering

Scarifier 225
Scarifier
A scarifier is mounted either on the front of the machine or behind
the front wheels and is hydraulically operated from inside the cab.
See page 84. The mid-mounted scarifier can be used with other
front-mounted attachments.
The scarifier is equipped with up to eleven teeth that are
adjustable and replaceable. Use the scarifier to break up surfaces
that are too hard to cut with the moldboard. For especially hard
surfaces, reduce the number of teeth. Always lower the scarifier
teeth into the material slowly while the machine is moving at a
slow speed. Do not skid the teeth along hard surfaces such as
large rocks or pavement.
NOTE!
Do not use the scarifier when turning or articulating. This places
side loads on the scarifier teeth and may result in equipment
damage.
226 Scarifier
Scarifiers, operating
assistance.
When scarifying or ripping across a slope, keep the moldboard
parallel with the front axle, centred to the frame and lowered close
to the ground to provide protection against rolling over.
A scarifier is useful for breaking up hard surfaces such as asphalt,
rocky subgrade and ice to ease grading.
Scarify downslope whenever possible. For additional information,
see page 84.
Front mounted scarifier lever, conventional
steering NOTE!
On machines with conventional steering, the scarifier is operated
using a control lever mounted on the pedestal, see page 84.
On machines with joystick steering, the scarifier is operated using
the right joystick, see page 91.
Mid-mounted scarifier lever, conventional steering
Mid-mounted scarifier
Scarifier shank depth, adjusting

1 Lower the scarifier to within several centimetres of the ground.
2 Remove the wedge from each shank.
3 The shanks incorporate adjustment notches. Move the shank
to the desired depth and engage the appropriate notch with
the scarifier box.
4 Install the wedge.
Scarifier 227
Scarifier tooth angle, adjusting
1 Lower the scarifier to the ground.
2 Remove the bolts, lockwashers and nuts that hold the scarifier
box arms to the scarifier drawbar.
3 Tilt the scarifier box to the desired angle and align the bolt
holes. You may have to loosen the ball stud nuts. Install and
tighten the bolts.
1 Tooth
2 Shank
3 Scarifier box
4 Wedge
Scarifier teeth, replacing

- The hardened scarifier teeth are replaceable. Use a hammer
and drift to force the tooth forward and off the shank.
- Install a new tooth and tap onto the shank.
1 Scarifier drawbar
2 Scarifier box arms
3 Bolt
228 Ripper
Ripper
The ripper is very useful for dislodging large rocks and tree
stumps, and breaking up asphalt pavement. The ripper can be
equipped with five ripper teeth or nine scarifier teeth. The ripper
is hydraulically operated from inside the cab.
When using the ripper, lower the teeth into the ground with the
machine in motion. If the rear wheels lose traction, raise the ripper
until the wheels regain traction. For especially hard surfaces,
reduce the number of teeth. To break old pavement, lower the
teeth under the pavement and raise the ripper. Do not use the
ripper when turning or articulating. This places side loads on the
ripper teeth and may result in equipment damage.
NOTE!
Ripper control lever, conventional steering Do not use rear scarifier teeth to rip up old pavement or asphalt.
NOTE!
On machines with conventional steering, the ripper is operated
using a control lever mounted on the pedestal, see page 84.
On machines with joystick steering, the ripper is operated using
the right joystick, see page 91.
Rear mounted ripper
Ripper, operating
assistance.
When ripping across a slope, keep the moldboard parallel with
the front axle, centred to the frame and lowered close to the
ground to provide protection against rolling over.
A ripper is useful for breaking up hard surfaces such as asphalt,
rocky subgrade and ice to ease grading.
Some machines may use the mid-mounted scarifier hydraulic
control lever to raise and lower the ripper.
For additional information and for rear attachment float, see page
84.
Ripper 229
Ripper tooth shank positions
See illustration for appropriate working or transporting condition:
1 Adjust the ripper tooth shank positions for the appropriate
working or transporting condition.
2 Remove the cotter pins, flatwashers and pins from the ripper
shanks and ripper box brackets.
3 Remove and reposition the shanks.
NOTE!
Take extra care. The shanks are heavy.
4 Align the holes of the ripper shanks and ripper box brackets.
5 Install the pins and secure them with the flatwashers and cotter
pins.
Ripper tooth shank positions

1 Ripper shank in raised position
2 Scarifier shank
3 Ripper shank in transport position
4 Ripper shank in working position
Ripper shank, removing

1 Lower the ripper onto a safe support.
2 Remove the cotter pins, flatwashers and pins that hold the
shank in the ripper brackets.
3 Remove the shanks carefully. They are heavy.
Ripper teeth, replacing
1 To replace ripper teeth, remove the roll pin.
2 Remove and discard the tooth.
3 Clean the shank and install a new tooth.
4 Install the roll pin.
230 Signalling diagram
Signalling diagram
If the operator's visibility is restricted, e.g., due to a big load, use
a signal man.
The faster lifting, lowering, or movement that is required, the
livelier the signal man's movements should be. If two or several
operators use the same signal man, determine ahead of time how
the lift is to be done and how signals shall be given to each
operator.
START STOP END

Arms extended horizontally with Right arm pointing up with palm Hands held together at chest
palms facing forward facing forward height
RAISE LOWER VERTICAL DISTANCE

Right arm pointing up with palm Right arm pointing down with palm Hands indicate relevant distance
facing forward and hand moving facing forward and hand moving
slowly in a circle slowly in a circle
MOVE FORWARD MOVE BACK DANGER (EMERGENCY STOP)

Both arms bent with palms facing Both arms bent with palms facing Both arms up with palms facing
up and underarms moving slowly down and underarms moving forward
and repeatedly up towards the slowly and repeatedly down away
body from the body
Signalling diagram 231
OPERATE IN INDICATED OPERATE IN INDICATED HORIZONTAL DISTANCE

DIRECTION DIRECTION Hands indicate relevant distance
Arm extended horizontally with Arm extended horizontally with
palm facing down and small palm facing down and small
movements back and forth slowly movements back and forth slowly
to the right to the left
232 Service position

Service position
Service positions
WARNING
If work must be done on the machine before it has cooled down;
beware of hot fluids and hot components that can cause severe
burns.
Before performing any service, maintenance or inspection
procedure, the machine must be placed in the service position.
6 7 3 4 8
! P
1 2 9 10 V1067254
Service position
1 Place the front wheels straight and upright.
2 Lower the moldboard and all attachments to the ground. Do not apply down pressure.
4 Check that the articulation lock pin is installed (unless specified otherwise during servicing).
5 Shut down the engine. Remove and retain the ignition key.
6 Carefully depressurise the hydraulic system.
7 Attach a warning label to the steering wheel.
8 Turn the battery disconnect switch OFF and remove the battery disconnect switch key.
9 Block the wheels in a suitable way (with, for example, wedges).
10 Allow the machine to cool.
Before service, read 233
Before service, read

Prevent personal injuries
Read the instructions in the Operator's Manual before starting
to work on the machine. It is also important to read and follow
the information and instructions on plates and decals.
Do not wear loose-fitting clothes or jewellery that may get
caught and cause injuries.
Always use a hard hat, eye protection (safety glasses or
goggles), gloves and protective work footwear when required
by the job.
Make sure that the ventilation is adequate if you are going to
start the engine indoors.
Do not stand in front of or behind the machine while the engine
is running.
Turn off the engine before removing any protective covers or
opening any engine hoods.
Accumulated pressure remains in the system even when the
engine has been turned off. If a system is opened without first
depressurizing it, high-pressure fluid may jet out.
Use a piece of paper or cardboard when checking for leaks,
never your hands.
Make sure that stepping surfaces, handholds, and slip-
protected surfaces are free from oil, diesel fuel, dirt and ice.
Only step on parts of the machine that are provided with slip-
protection.
It is important to use the right tools and the right equipment.
Defective tools or equipment must be repaired or replaced.
If service work has to be done under a raised attachment, it
must first be secured. Engage the control lockout and apply the
parking brake, if the attachment is installed on the machine.
Stepping surfaces
Prevent machine damage

Use equipment with sufficient lifting capacity if the machine or
parts of it are to be lifted or supported.
Volvo Construction Equipment will not accept any
responsibility if other lifting devices, tools, work methods,
lubricants, and parts are used other than those described in
this Operator's Manual.
Make sure that no tools or other objects that may cause
damage have been left in or on the machine.
Release the pressure in the hydraulic system before beginning
service work.
Never set a relief valve to a higher pressure than that
recommended by the valve manufacturer.
Machines used in environmentally contaminated or health-
hazardous areas must be equipped for such operations. As
well, special safety rules apply for service work on such
machines.
When installing two-way radio, mobile telephone, or similar
equipment, the installation must be performed according to the
manufacturer's instructions in order to eliminate interference
with the electronic system and components intended for the
machine's function, see page 21.
For actions in connection with electric welding, see welding and
electric components procedure.
Make sure that all protective plates, covers, and hoods on the
machine are in place before starting the engine and operating
the machine.
234 Before service, read
Use the three-point method (two feet and one hand) when
cleaning or scraping the windscreen.
Three-point mounting
Prevent environmental influence

Be conscious of the environment when carrying out service and
maintenance. Oil and other liquids when released into the
environment will cause damage. Oil degrades very slowly in water
and sediment. One liter of oil can destroy millions of liters of
drinking water.
NOTE!
In common for all points below is that all waste is to be handed
over to a treatment and disposal firm approved by the authorities.
When draining, oils and liquids must be collected in suitable
vessels and steps taken to avoid spillage.
Used filters must be drained of all liquid before they are passed
on as waste. Used filters from machines which work in
environments with asbestos or other dangerous dust, must be
placed in the bag supplied with the new filter.
Batteries contain substances dangerous to the environment
and health. Used batteries must be treated as waste
dangerous to the environment.
Consumables, e.g., used cloths, gloves and bottles may also
be contaminated with oils and liquids dangerous to the
environment and must be treated as waste dangerous to the
environment.
Welding and electronic components
Contact your local Volvo dealer for specific welding procedures.
Before allowing a qualified service technician to weld on the
machine or any attachment, disconnect the following items:
Before service, read 235
1 Disconnect battery ground connection by turning the battery
disconnect switch OFF (placed to the rear left side of the
machine).
2 Electronic control units (ECUs):
V1090966
Battery disconnect switch
Instrument ECU (I-ECU). Remove four screws and

instrument module. Disconnect three electrical connectors.
1 Instrument ECU (I-ECU) module
D7 Engine ECU (E-ECU) module

236 Before service, read
Engine ECU (E-ECU)
D9 Engine ECU (E-ECU) module
Vehicle ECU (V-ECU)

Caretrack
Vehicle (VECU) module
Additional precautions
Connect the welding unit ground cable as close as possible to
the work area.
Close the battery box cover.
After completing your welding procedure(s), disconnect the
welding unit ground cable.
Connect the following items:
1 Electronic control units (ECUs)
Battery box and lid Vehicle ECU (V-ECU)
Engine ECU (E-ECU)
Hydraulic ECU's (H-ECU) optional
Wireless ECU (W-ECU) optional Instrument ECU (I-ECU).
- Connect three electrical connectors.
- Install instrument module and retain with four screws.
2 Battery ground connection by turning the battery disconnect
switch ON.
NOTE!
Ensure the battery disconnect switch is the last item activated.
Fire prevention 237
Fire prevention
WARNING
Special equipment is required if the machine is used in an
explosive environment or other environments that are fire-
hazardous.
There is always a risk of fire. Find out what type of fire extinguisher
is used at your work site and learn how to use it. A fire extinguisher
is optional equipment and is available from your dealer. If the
machine is equipped with a fire extinguisher it should be located
on the rear part of the front fender.
If the machine is equipped with a handheld fire extinguisher it
should of the type ABE (ABC in North America). The designation
ABE means that it can be used to extinguish fires in both solid
organic materials and fluids, and that the extinguishing agent
does not conduct electricity. Efficiency class I means that the fire
extinguisher must have an effective operating time of at least
8 seconds, Efficiency class II at least 11 seconds, and Efficiency
class III at least 15 seconds.
A portable fire extinguisher ABE I normally corresponds to an
effective content of 4 kg (8.8 lb) (EN-class 13A89BC), standard
EN 3-1995 part 1, 2, 4, and 5.
Fire prevention actions
Smoking or an open flame is prohibited near the machine when
refuelling or when the fuel system is open to contact with the
ambient air.
Diesel fuel is flammable and must not be used for cleaning.
Instead, use car care products intended for cleaning or
degreasing. Also keep in mind that certain solvents may cause
skin rash, damage the paint finish, and constitute a fire hazard.
Keep the service area clean at your work site. Oil and water
make floors and stepping surfaces slippery, and may also be
dangerous in connection with electrical equipment or electrical
power tools. Oily or greasy clothes are a serious fire hazard.
Check daily that the machine and equipment are free from dust
and oil. This reduces the risk of fire and also makes it easier to
detect loose or damaged parts.
NOTE!
Be very careful when using a high-pressure washer for cleaning.
Electrical components and insulation on wiring may be damaged
even at relatively low pressure and temperature. Protect electrical
components and wiring in an adequate manner.
Be extra thorough when cleaning a machine operating in
conditions with high risk of fire, for example, saw mills and
landfill sites. The risk of spontaneous combustion can be
reduced further by installing insulation on the muffler.
The fire extinguisher must be inspected and maintained so that
it works when it is needed. Service a fire extinguisher after
every use.
Check that fuel lines, hydraulic and brake hoses and electrical
cables have not been damaged by chafing or are not in danger
of being damaged in that way because of incorrect installation
or clamping. This applies particularly to unfused cables, which
are red and marked R (B+) and routed:
- between the batteries
- between battery and starter motor
238 Fire prevention
- between alternator and starter motor
Electrical cables must not lie directly against oil or fuel lines.
Do not weld or grind on components which are filled with
flammable liquids, e.g. tanks and hydraulic pipes. Exercise
care with such work in the proximity of such places. A fire
extinguisher must be on-hand during welding operations.
Actions in case of fire
If the situation allows and it is possible without risking your own
safety, take the following actions at the slightest sign of fire:
1 Stop the machine if it is moving.
2 Lower the attachments to the ground.
3 Move the lockout lever, if installed, to locked position.
4 Turn the ignition key to the stop position.
5 Leave the cab.
6 Call the fire department.
7 Turn off the battery disconnector, if it can be reached safely.
8 Try to put out the fire, if possible. If not, move away from the
machine and the dangerous area.
Actions after fire
When handling a machine which has been damaged by fire or
been exposed to other intense heat, the following protective steps
must be taken:
Use protective goggles and thick protective gloves made of
rubber.
Never touch burnt components with your bare hands to avoid
contact with melted polymers. First wash thoroughly with plenty
of lime water (a solution of calcium hydroxide, i.e. slaked lime
in water).
Handling of heated fluoro-carbon rubber, see page 241.
WARNING
Special equipment is required if the machine is used in an
explosive environment or other environments that are fire-
hazardous.
There is always a risk of fire. Find out what type of fire extinguisher
is used at your work site and learn how to use it. A fire extinguisher
is optional equipment and is available from your dealer. If the
machine is equipped with a fire extinguisher it should be located
on the rear part of the front fender.
If the machine is equipped with a handheld fire extinguisher it
should of the type ABE (ABC in North America). The designation
ABE means that it can be used to extinguish fires in both solid
organic materials and fluids, and that the extinguishing agent
does not conduct electricity. Efficiency class I means that the fire
extinguisher must have an effective operating time of at least
8 seconds, Efficiency class II at least 11 seconds, and Efficiency
class III at least 15 seconds.
A portable fire extinguisher ABE I normally corresponds to an
effective content of 4 kg (8.8 lb) (EN-class 13A89BC), standard
EN 3-1995 part 1, 2, 4, and 5.
Fire prevention actions
Smoking or an open flame is prohibited near the machine when
refuelling or when the fuel system is open to contact with the
ambient air.
Fire prevention 239
Diesel fuel is flammable and must not be used for cleaning.
Instead, use car care products intended for cleaning or
degreasing. Also keep in mind that certain solvents may cause
skin rash, damage the paint finish, and constitute a fire hazard.
Keep the service area clean at your work site. Oil and water
make floors and stepping surfaces slippery, and may also be
dangerous in connection with electrical equipment or electrical
power tools. Oily or greasy clothes are a serious fire hazard.
Check daily that the machine and equipment are free from dust
and oil. This reduces the risk of fire and also makes it easier to
detect loose or damaged parts.
NOTE!
Be very careful when using a high-pressure washer for cleaning.
Electrical components and insulation on wiring may be damaged
even at relatively low pressure and temperature. Protect electrical
components and wiring in an adequate manner.
Be extra thorough when cleaning a machine operating in
conditions with high risk of fire, for example, saw mills and
landfill sites. The risk of spontaneous combustion can be
reduced further by installing insulation on the muffler.
The fire extinguisher must be inspected and maintained so that
it works when it is needed. Service a fire extinguisher after
every use.
Check that fuel lines, hydraulic and brake hoses and electrical
cables have not been damaged by chafing or are not in danger
of being damaged in that way because of incorrect installation
or clamping. This applies particularly to unfused cables, which
are red and marked R (B+) and routed:
- between the batteries
- between battery and starter motor
- between alternator and starter motor
Electrical cables must not lie directly against oil or fuel lines.
Do not weld or grind on components which are filled with
flammable liquids, e.g. tanks and hydraulic pipes. Exercise
care with such work in the proximity of such places. A fire
extinguisher must be on-hand during welding operations.
Actions in case of fire
If the situation allows and it is possible without risking your own
safety, take the following actions at the slightest sign of fire:
1 Stop the machine if it is moving.
2 Lower the attachments to the ground.
3 Move the lockout lever, if installed, to locked position.
4 Turn the ignition key to the stop position.
5 Leave the cab.
6 Call the fire department.
7 Turn off the battery disconnector, if it can be reached safely.
8 Try to put out the fire, if possible. If not, move away from the
machine and the dangerous area.
Actions after fire
When handling a machine which has been damaged by fire or
been exposed to other intense heat, the following protective steps
must be taken:
Use protective goggles and thick protective gloves made of
rubber.
Never touch burnt components with your bare hands to avoid
contact with melted polymers. First wash thoroughly with plenty
of lime water (a solution of calcium hydroxide, i.e. slaked lime
in water).
240 Fire prevention
Handling of heated fluoro-carbon rubber, see page 241.
Handling hazardous materials 241
Handling hazardous materials

Heated paint
WARNING
Heating of painted surfaces, rubber or plastics parts may cause
the formation of substances dangerous to health or environment.
Take care when, for example, welding, grinding or gas cutting.
Wear protective equipment.
Heated paint gives off poisonous gases. Therefore, paint must be
removed from an area with a radius of at least 10 cm (4 in) before
carrying out welding, grinding or cutting with a torch. In addition
to the health hazard, the weld will be of inferior quality and
strength, which in the future may cause the weld to break.
Methods and precautionary measures when removing paint
Blasting
- use respirator and protective goggles
Paint remover or other chemicals
- use a portable air extractor, respirator and protective gloves
Grinding machine
- use a portable air extractor, respiratory protective equipment
and protective gloves and goggles
Never burn painted parts after they have been discarded. They
should be disposed of by a licensed disposal plant.
Heated rubber and plastics
Polymer materials can, when heated, form compounds which are
dangerous to health and environment and must therefore never
be burned when scrapped.
If gas cutting or welding is to be carried out near such materials,
the following safety instructions must be followed:
- Protect the material from heat.
- Use protective gloves, protective goggles and respiratory
protective equipment.
Heated fluoro-carbon rubber
WARNING
Seals that can withstand high temperatures may be made of
fluoro-carbon rubber. At very high temperatures fluoro-carbon
rubber forms substances, which are very corrosive to skin and
lungs. Wear protective equipment.
When handling a machine that has been damaged by fire or has
been exposed to intense heat, the following actions should be
taken:
Use thick, gloves made of rubber and wear protective goggles.
Discard gloves, rags and other items that have been in contact
with heated fluoro-carbon rubber after first having washed
these items in lime water (a solution of calcium hydroxide, i.e.
slaked lime in water).
The area around a part which has been very hot and which may
be made of fluoro-carbon rubber should be decontaminated by
thorough and ample washing with lime water.
As a precaution, all seals (O-rings and other oil seals) should
be handled as if they were made of fluoro-carbon rubber.
242 Handling hazardous materials
The hydrofluoric acid may remain on the machine parts for
several years after a fire.
If swelling, redness or a stinging feeling appears and one
suspects that the cause may be contact with heated fluoro-
carbon rubber, contact a medical doctor immediately.
Symptoms may not appear until after several hours without any
previous warning.
The acid cannot be rinsed or washed off from the skin. Treat
instead with Hydrofluoric Acid Burn Jelly or similar before
contacting a medical doctor.
Refrigerant
NOTE!
All kinds of service on the air conditioning unit must be carried out
by accredited workshops by, or under the guidance of, a person
in a leading position with certified competence.
WARNING
R134a is moderately dangerous to one’s health. When handling
refrigerant, wear close-fitting goggles and protective gloves. In
liquid form refrigerant can cause frost-bite and when in the form
of a gas at high concentration it has an anaesthetising effect and
at lower concentration it primarily affects the nervous system.
The air-conditioning unit of the machine is filled with refrigerant
R134a at the factory. R134a has no damaging effect on the ozone
layer of the atmosphere, however, it contributes to the
greenhouse effect and must therefore never purposely be
released into the open air.
NOTICE
R134a must never be mixed with another kind of refrigerant, e.g.
R12, as this leads to a breakdown of the unit.
In case of contact with escaping refrigerant, the following actions
must be taken:
The gases formed by heated refrigerant, may be harmful to
lungs and nervous system even at low concentrations when no
smell is apparent. High concentrations have a narcotic effect.
An exposed person should be moved away from the danger
area out into the fresh air. Seek medical advice if there are
remaining symptoms.
In liquid form, the refrigerant may cause frost-bite. Warm
carefully the injured area with lukewarm water or warm clothes.
Seek medical advice, if there are remaining symptoms.
Seek medical advice, if liquid refrigerant has come into contact
with someone's eyes.
If a leak is suspected, leave the risk area and contact an
accredited workshop to get information about measures.
Batteries
WARNING
Handling batteries may lead to that electrolyte comes into contact
with eyes, skin or clothes. Wear protective equipment. Electrolyte
splashes in eyes must be rinsed off with water immediately.
Electrolyte on skin must be washed off with soap and water
immediately. Seek medical advice.
Do not smoke near batteries as these give off explosive gases.
Handling hazardous materials 243
Make sure that metal objects (such as tools, rings, watch straps
etc.) do not come into contact with battery terminals.
Make sure that the caps on the battery terminals always are
installed.
Do not tilt a battery in any direction. Battery electrolyte may leak
out.
Do not connect a discharged battery in series with a fully
charged battery. Risk for explosion.
When removing a battery, disconnect the ground cable first and
when installing, connect the ground cable last in order to
reduce the risk of sparks.
Discarded batteries must be taken care of according to
governing national environmental requirements.
Charging batteries, see page 271.
Starting with booster batteries, see page 138.
Crystalline silica (quartz) dust
WARNING
Working in environments containing dangerous dust, for example
asbestos, may lead to serious health problems. Special measures
must be taken to prevent dust from spreading. Contact a
workshop authorised by Volvo for further information.
Crystalline silicon dioxide is a basic part of sand and granite.
Many activities on building sites and in mines, such as ditching,
sawing and drilling, generate dust that contains crystalline silicon
dioxide.This dust can cause silicosis (miner's lung).
The employer or the work site management should inform the
operator about any presence of crystalline silicon dioxide on the
work site, and should provide special work instructions,
necessary protective equipment and what actions are to be taken.
Also check local/national instructions regarding crystalline silicon
dioxide and silicosis.
244

This chapter describes the service and maintenance jobs that can
be done by the operator. These are summarized in the section
"Lubrication and service chart" as an illustration, with an
accompanying table for each interval, see page 302.
Other jobs require trained workshop personnel or special
equipment. Contact a workshop authorised by Volvo for more
information.
Preventive maintenance guidelines

NOTE!
Power grease guns may damage bearing seals. Use only manual
(hand) grease guns when greasing this machine.
NOTE!
Attach the lifting apparatus only to the machine’s designated
lifting points using properly rated lifting straps, cables, or chains.
Use spreader bars to ensure equal weight distribution during
lifting as well as avoid contact with the machine.
To prevent minor irregularities from developing into serious
conditions, several other services or checks are recommended
for the same intervals as the periodic lubrication. The purpose of
these services or checks is to ensure the uninterrupted and safe
operation of the machine by revealing the need for adjustment
caused by normal wear.
NOTE!
Replacement of engine oil, planetary wheel ends (2) gear oil,
carrier gear oil, differential and brake assembly gear oil require
that the machine oil be at normal operating temperatures.
Preparations before service
Before performing preventive maintenance, place machine in the
service position. See page 232.
Fluids and oil, fuel filters
Provide a container that will hold more than the quantity of fluid
to be drained (such as engine or hydraulic oil, or engine
coolant) before draining the liquid.
Dispose of used oil and coolant in an environmentally safe
manner. Follow local guidelines and regulations.
Clean up any spilled oil or grease immediately.
Store oily waste, such as rags or shop cloths, in an enclosed
metal container. Dispose of them in an environmentally safe
manner following local guidelines and regulations.
245
Lubrication
NOTE!
Power grease guns may damage bearing seals. Use only manual
(hand) grease guns when greasing this machine.
NOTE!
Most bearings on this machine are sealed, require no lubrication,
and have no grease fittings.
Lubricate the machine while it is still warm.
Store lubricants in covered containers.
Keep lubricants clean.
Clean funnels and measuring utensils before and after use.
Clean grease fittings before applying grease.
Clean around drain, check level, and fill plugs before removing
them.
Clean drain, check level, and fill plugs before replacing them.
To prevent problems, other services or checks are recommended
at the time of lubrication.
Wash fill plugs with a non-flammable, non-toxic, cleaning
solution before servicing, to prevent dirt from entering while
performing the service.
Visually check components while lubricating them. Make sure
that capscrews, nuts and pins are secured properly. If any are
loose, tighten them to specifications and check the overall
condition of the component.
Stop the machine if any function does not operate or operates
incorrectly. Report the problem to your supervisor or site
management. Do not continue operations until the problem is
corrected. If necessary, contact authorised distributor for
results.
Service history
After each completed service at a workshop authorised by Volvo
Construction Equipment, the service history should be filled in,
see page 333. Service history is a valuable document, which can
be referred to when for example selling the machine.
Arrival and delivery inspection

Before the machine leaves the factory, it is tested and adjusted.
The dealer must also, if the warranty is to apply, carry out arrival
and delivery inspections according to the applicable form, which
must be signed.
246
Delivery Instructions
When handing the machine over, the dealer must give the buyer
delivery instructions according to the applicable form, which must
be signed, if the warranty is to apply.
Service Programme
The service programme, available at the workshop, includes all
service and maintenance jobs, both those that can be done by
the operator and those that have to be done in the workshop.
The service programme shall be used for warranty inspections
and maintenance done at an authorised workshop.
The intervals recommended between checks, oil changes, and
lubrication apply on the condition that the machine is used under
normal environmental and operating conditions.
Cleaning machine
The machine should be cleaned regularly with conventional car
care products in order to eliminate the risk of damage to the paint
finish and other surfaces on the machine.
NOTICE
Avoid using strong cleaning agents or chemicals in order to
minimise the risk of damage to the paint finish.
NOTE!
Daily clean the areas on the machine where dust, chips, and
similar may collect in order to minimize the risk of fire, see page
247.
Recommendations for cleaning the machine:
Place the machine in a place intended for cleaning.
Follow the instructions supplied with the car care product.
The water temperature may not exceed 60 °C (140 °F).
If a high-pressure washer is used, keep a distance of at least
20 – 30 cm (8 – 12 in) between the nozzle and the machine.
Too high pressure and too short distance may cause damage.
Protect electrical wiring in an appropriate way.
NOTICE
If you are using a high-pressure wash, take care so that the decals
do not loosen.
Use a soft sponge.
247
Finish by rinsing the whole machine with only water.
Always lubricate the machine after washing.
Touch-up the paint finish when required.
Touch-up painting
Clean the machine.
Check for faults to the paint finish that may expose bare metal.
Carefully repair any faults to the paint finish.
Cleaning engine compartment
WARNING
Moving parts could cause serious cutting or crushing injury.
Stop the engine before opening the engine hood and performing
any work.
WARNING
Risk of burns.
Engine and exhaust system components get very hot and can
cause severe burns.
Avoid contact with engine compartment covers, engine
components and exhaust system until the engine is cooled down.
Machines operating in dusty environment or environment
exposed to fire hazards for example, wood-processing, woodchip
handling or grain handling and animal feed industries require daily
attention and cleaning of the engine compartment and
surrounding areas.
When operating in other environments, inspection and cleaning
is required at least once a week.
Loose material is removed with for example compressed air.
Cleaning should preferably be carried out at the end of the
working shift before the machine is parked.
Use personal protective equipment such as protective goggles,
gloves and respirator.
After cleaning, check and rectify any leaks. Close all covers and
hoods.
248 General inspection of machine
General inspection of machine

Bolted joints, checking
1 Tighten all nuts and threaded connections found loose during
daily check.
2 Renew any self-locking nuts which may be loose.
Lap type seat belt, checking and maintenance

Ensure that the mounting hardware is tight.
Check the seat belt regularly for wear or damage. Inspect the belt
hardware and fabric. Replace the seat belt if the hardware is
damaged or if the strap is nicked, frayed or loose sticking is found.
Seat belt assemblies should be replaced every 3 years regardless
of appearance. Seat belt strength degrades over time and use
due to exposure to weather, ultraviolet (UV) and abrasives (dirt).
Service points 249
Service points
Service points, G930, G940, G946, G960
1 Ventilation filters, cab 18 Suction strainer, transmission

2 Filling point for transmission oil 19 Tyre air pressure valve (6 tyres)
3 Expansion tank for coolant 20 Breather filter, fuel system
4 Filling point for coolant 21 Primary filter, air cleaner
5 Alternator drive belt 22 Secondary filter, air cleaner
6 Filling point for fuel 23 Charge filter, AWD
7 Filling point for engine oil 24 Level sight glass, hydraulic oil
8 Oil filter, engine 25 Breather filter, hydraulic system
9 Oil dipstick, engine 26 Filling point for hydraulic oil
10 Draining point for engine oil 27 Filter, hydraulic system
11 Secondary fuel filter, engine 28 Breather filter, transmission
12 Level sight glass, tandem oil 29 Oil filter, transmission
13 Battery 30 Draining point for hydraulic oil
14 Primary fuel filter / water trap, engine 31 Level sight glass, rear axle oil
15 Water trap drain 32 Filling and draining points for rear axle
16 Battery disconnect switch 33 Draining point for coolant
17 Level sight glass, transmission oil
250 Service points
Applies to models: G970, G976, G990
Service points, G970, G976, G990
1 Ventilation filters, cab 18 Charge filter, AWD

2 Filling point for transmission oil 19 Level sight glass, hydraulic oil
3 Alternator drive belt 20 Breather filter, hydraulic system
4 Filling point for fuel 21 Filling point for hydraulic oil
5 Oil filters, engine 22 Filter, hydraulic system
6 Draining point for engine oil 23 Breather filter, transmission
7 Level sight glass, tandem oil 24 Oil filter, transmission
8 Battery 25 Draining point for hydraulic oil
9 Battery disconnect switch 26 Primary fuel filter / water trap, engine
10 Level sight glass, transmission oil 27 Water trap drain
11 Suction strainer, transmission 28 Secondary fuel filter, engine
12 Tyre air pressure valve (6 tyres) 29 Level sight glass, rear axle oil
13 Breather filter, fuel system 30 Filling and draining points for rear axle
14 Expansion tank for coolant 31 Oil dipstick, engine
15 Filling point for coolant 32 Filling point for engine oil
16 Primary filter, air cleaner 33 Draining point for coolant
17 Secondary filter, air cleaner
Engine 251
Engine
Check engine oil level
Check the oil level every 50 hours or according to the level sensor
signal with the engine shut down.
When checking, the machine must stand on level ground.
The check must be carried out when the oil is cold and has had
time to run down to the bottom of the sump.
The level must be between the marks on the oil dipstick.
G930, G940, G946 and G960

A Oil dipstick
B Filler pipe
G970, G976, and G990

A Oil dipstick
B Filler pipe
252 Engine
Change the engine oil filter

Replace the oil filter(s) every time the oil is changed.
The oil filters are the disposable type, i.e. they cannot be cleaned,
but must be replaced.
Removing
- Use a filter wrench and turn counter clockwise.
Installing
- Fill the filter(s) with fresh oil and apply oil to the gasket.
- Screw on the filter until the gasket just touches the sealing
surface. Tighten a further half of a turn by hand.
- Start the engine and check that the gasket(s) are sealing
properly. If they are not, remove the filter(s) and check the
sealing surface. Usually it does not help to overtighten.
NOTE!
After replacing oil filter(s), the engine must run at low idle for at
least one minute to make sure that the engine is lubricated before
the machine is put to work.
NOTE!
IMPORTANT! It is important that the filters are filled with fresh oil
before they are installed. This is to ensure lubrication of the
engine immediately it is started.
Oil filter
Engine 253
G930, G940, G946 and G960
The single engine oil filter is located on the left-hand side of the
cylinder block.
G930, G940, G946 and G960

A Engine oil filter
G970, G976 and G990

The three engine oil filters are located on the left-hand side of the
cylinder block. There are two full-flow filters and one bypass filter.
Check for any oil leaks. Clean up spilled or leaked oil and rectify
where necessary.
Take care of filters / oils / liquids in an environmentally safe way,
see page 233.
G970, G976 and G990

A Full-flow filters
B Bypass filter
254 Engine
Engine oil change
WARNING
Be careful when changing oil since hot oil may cause severe
burns to unprotected skin.
See page 233.
Change oil every 500 hours.
The conditions for the 500 hour interval between oil changes are
that:
- The oil filters are replaced every time the oil is changed.
- The oil filters are original Volvo parts.
- The diesel fuel sulphur content does not exceed 0.3% by
weight.
- The oil is of a certain grade quality. See page Engine oil.
- The correct oil viscosity for the ambient air temperature is
selected according to the recommended lubricant chart. See
page 307.
Engine 255
Draining
NOTE!
The oil must be changed at least every six months, regardless of
the number of operated hours.
NOTE!
If an optional skid plate is used, place an appropriate jack
underneath the skid plate and lower it carefully.
A skid plate can weigh up to 135 kg (298 lb) - take extra care.
Drain the oil while the engine is still warm. Draining point for mod-
els G930, G940, G946 and G960 is the large (M32) angled port
on the left-hand side of the oil sump. Draining point for models
G970, G976 and G990 is the M24 port at the bottom of the oil
sump.
1 Place a container with an appropriate capacity under the oil
pan drain plug.
2 Remove the drain hose adapter from the toolbox.
3 Remove the drain valve cap. Connect the drain hose adapter
to the drain valve and drain the oil.
G930, G940, G946, G960

1 Drain hose adapter
2 Drain valve cap
G970, G976, and G990

1 Drain hose adapter
2 Drain valve cap
Filling
Fill with oil through the filler pipe.
For oil capacity when changing oil and filter(s), see page 315.
NOTICE
Take care of filters, oils and liquids in an environmentally safe
way.
256 Fuel system
Fuel system
NOTE!
Take care of filters/oils/liquids in an environmentally safe way, see
page 233.
Fuel tank
Clean fuel is essential for trouble-free running of the diesel
engine.
Clean around the fuel tank filler cap before removing it.
Avoid spillage when filling. Spilt fuel attracts dirt and is a fire
hazard if it is split on hot surfaces.
During the cold season, keep the fuel tank full to prevent water
condensing in the tank.
For fuel tank capacity see page 315.
Fuel cap
1 Fuel tank filler cap
Fuel system 257
Fuel filters
NOTE!
Take care of fuel spillage by collecting it in a suitable vessel.
Replace the fuel filters every 500 hours when fuel that meets
specification is used. If fuel of poorer quality is used, the filters
must be replaced more often.
The fuel filters consist of a primary fuel filter complete with water
trap and a secondary fuel filter. On the primary fuel filter head
there is a hand pump which is used when bleeding the air out of
the fuel system (G930, G940, G946 and G960 only). The primary
fuel filter works as a prefilter for the fuel pump.
When installing the filter elements, they should only be tightened
by hand. The filter elements should be replaced by qualified
service personnel at an authorised dealer workshop.
G930, G940, G946 and G960 1 Before replacing the primary fuel filter, remove residual water
A Primary fuel filter from the water trap.
B Secondary fuel filter 2 Remove the primary fuel filter and water trap from the filter
head by turning the fuel filter element counter clockwise.
3 Turn the water trap counter clockwise and remove from the
fuel filter element.
4 Clean the water trap and install on a new filter element by
turning clockwise.
5 Clean the sealing surfaces of the new filter element and the
filter head.
6 Lightly lubricate the sealing surface of the new filter element
with fuel. Install the filter element by turning clockwise.
G970, G976 & G990

A Primary fuel filter
B Secondary fuel filter
258 Fuel system
Fuel system, air bleeding
NOTE!
After filter replacement, the fuel system must be bled. Take care
of fuel spillage by using a vessel or a plastic hose.
NOTE!
Manual air bleeding applies only to G930, G940, G946 and G960.
Air bleeding is automatic on G970, G976 and G990.
Fuel flows as follows:
G930, G940, G946 and G960
Fuel tank – primary fuel filter with water trap – fuel pump –
secondary fuel filter – ECU cooler – common rail – unit injectors
– cylinders.
G970, G976 & G990
Fuel tank – primary fuel filter with water trap – ECU cooler – fuel
pump – secondary fuel filter – unit injectors – cylinders.
Proceed as follows:
1 Unlock the fuel hand pump plunger by pressing and turning
counter clockwise at the same time. The plunger will be
pushed out by the spring.
2 Turn the shutdown lever of the thermostat valve approximately
45° in a clockwise direction.
3 Pump the plunger until you feel a strong resistance. Perform
Fuel/water separator
10 more pumping actions.
1 Fuel hand pump on primary filter head
4 Start the engine and allow to idle for around 3 minutes.
2 Thermostat valve with shutdown lever
3 Primary fuel filter element
5 Shut down the engine and check the filter for leaks.
4 Draining nipple 6 Turn the shutdown lever of the thermostat valve approximately
5 Water trap 45° in a counter clockwise direction until it engages.
7 Lock the fuel hand pump plunger by pressing and turning
clockwise at the same time.
Water trap
NOTE!
Take care of fuel spillage by using a vessel or a plastic hose.
Drain the water trap according to the indicator lamp signal.
Draining water from the fuel has to be done by hand.
A non-return valve in the filter head prevents the fuel from running
back to the tank. As no fuel can run back, the pressure will remain
and, as a consequence, no water will be drained unless new fuel
is pumped in.
Proceed as follows:
1 Place the end of the hose in a vessel.
2 Slacken the draining nipple.
3 Pump with the fuel hand pump plunger on the primary filter
head until all water has been forced out of the water trap.
4 Tighten the draining nipple.
Fuel system 259
Fuel system, breather filter
NOTE!
Take care of filters/oils/liquids in an environmentally safe way, see
page 233.
Replace the fuel tank breather filter every 2000 hours.
The filter cannot be cleaned, but must be replaced.
G930, G940, G946 & G960
The filter is installed on the right-hand side of the machine.
G970, G976 & G990
The filter is installed on the left-hand side of the machine.
Breather filter
1 Breather filter, fuel system
260 Turbocharger
Turbocharger
Turbocharger, inspection
The turbocharger is lubricated and cooled through the engine
lubrication system.
Lubrication and cooling is safeguarded by:
Not racing the engine immediately after it has been started.
Allowing the engine to run at low idle for a couple of minutes
before it is shut down.
Changing engine oil and oil filters at prescribed intervals.
Servicing the air cleaner regularly and checking that the
exhaust system and lubricating oil lines do not leak.
Checking the charge air cooler and piping for leakage.
NOTE!
In cases where the turbocharger is noisy or vibrates, it must be
reconditioned or replaced immediately.
Only authorised dealer workshops should carry out work on the
turbocharger.
Engine air cleaner 261
Engine air cleaner

The degree of engine wear depends largely on the cleanliness of
the induction air. The air cleaner prevents dust and other
impurities from entering the engine. Therefore, it is very important
that the air cleaner is checked regularly and maintained correctly.
Check the hoses and connections leading from the air cleaner to
the engine. Check the exhaust aspirator hose and connections.
Look for accumulations of dust, which may indicate leaks, cracked
hoses or loose clamps.
Air cleaner installation
Primary filter, maintenance and replacement

Replace the primary filter every 12 months or when the alarm text
shows “Engine air intake restriction”. The period of operation
between filter replacements varies depending on the working
environment of the machine. In certain environments, the filter
needs to be replaced more often.
The filter can be cleaned. Contact your local Volvo dealer for
instructions when cleaning the filter. However, after the filter has
been cleaned three times, or if it is damaged, it must be replaced.
NOTE!
When the air filter is restricted, the amber control lamp lights and
the red central warning lamp flashes. The buzzer sounds if the
parking brake is not engaged.
Filter indicator
Replacing primary filter

1 Wipe away all dirt from around the housing and cover.
2 Unfasten the latches and remove the end cover.
3 Remove the primary filter, taking care not to damage it.
4 Do not attempt to clean the primary filter by striking it.
NOTE!
Make a mark on the decal at the end of the secondary filter every
time the primary filter is replaced. This is a reminder that after the
primary filter has been replaced three times, the secondary filter
must be replaced.
If the control lamp still lights and the alarm text remains displayed
after service, the secondary filter element must be replaced. See
Replacing secondary filter procedure. Do not clean the secondary
filter element.
Do not, under any circumstances, run the engine without a filter
or with a damaged one.
Air cleaner primary filter Always have a spare filter at hand and keep the filter well
protected from dirt.
262 Engine air cleaner
Replacing secondary filter
Replace the filter every 24 months or when the primary filter has
been replaced three times.
The secondary filter works as a protective filter if the primary filter
is damaged.
NOTE!
Never remove the secondary filter unless it is to be replaced.
Take care of filters/oils/liquids in an environmentally safe way.
Air cleaner secondary filter
Oil-bath precleaner (optional equipment)

When working in a particularly dusty environment, we
recommend installing an oil-bath precleaner in series with the
existing dry-filter air cleaner. This will provide further safety
against damage to the engine.
The particle-retaining ability of the oil-bath cleaner is between 90
and 95 percent, which extends the life of the primary air filter.
Check the oil level daily. Oil capacity, 9.5 litres (2.5 US gal).
Change oil and clean the lower and upper steel mesh filters if:
The oil is dirty.
There are sludge deposits or dry spots on the underside of the
lower steel mesh filter.
The oil bowl, the lower and upper steel mesh filters should be
washed in diesel fuel.
Do not use petrol (gasoline) for cleaning, as any remaining petrol
can cause the engine to surge when it is started later.
When filling or changing oil, use the same viscosity as in the
engine.
Oil-bath precleaner (typical)
Clean the steel mesh filter inserts every 2000 hours.
Washer fluid reservoir, front and rear windows
When there is a risk of frost, make sure that there is sufficient
washer fluid formulated for cold weather in the reservoir.
The fluid reservoir is located on the right-hand side of the machine
in the engine compartment.
Top up when necessary.
Make sure that the cap on the reservoir is securely tightened and
that the reservoir is clean on the outside.
Washer fluid reservoir

Cooling system 263
Cooling system
Radiators and coolers
The coolers and engine radiator are rear-mounted, cross flow
radiators with a hydraulically driven cooling fan. The cooling fan
can be driven at variable speeds by hydraulic pump flow based
on various system cooling requirements.
Charge air temperature, engine coolant temperature, hydraulic
system temperature, transmission temperature and A/C system
pressure are monitored. The system with the highest cooling
demand will determine fan speed.
Fan speed is proportional to temperature. When a system
operating temperature reaches a specified level, the fan will begin
to increase in speed. The fan will continue to increase in speed if
the temperature continues to increase.
The cooling system is filled with Volvo Coolant VCS, which is in
accordance with the highest requirements regarding anti-freeze,
anti-corrosion and anti-cavitation properties. To avoid damage to
the engine, is it very important that Volvo Coolant VCS is used
when topping up or when changing coolant.
- Minimum fan speed is approx. 400 ± 100 rpm.
- Maximum speed is:G930 – G960 1750 rpm
G970 – G990 (Europe) 1750 rpm
G970 – G990 (except Europe) 2000 rpm.
A temperature sensor failure will cause the fan to be driven at
maximum speed.
IMPORTANT! Take care not to damage the fins of the radiator
core.
For the cooling system to function without problems, the proper
coolant level must be maintained and the radiator core kept clean.
Coolant, checking
WARNING
Turn off the battery disconnect switch and remove the start key
before starting to work.
Check the coolant level every 1000 hours or according to the level
sensor signal.
The level should be between the MAX and MIN marks on the
expansion tank.
If the coolant level in the expansion tank is too low, the red central
warning lamp will flash, accompanied by the buzzer sounding
and / or alarm text showing on the display unit. Top up when
required.
1 Expansion tank
The coolant level must never be below the MIN mark.
2 Coolant level
Coolant, changing
WARNING
Risk of scalding and burns when the expansion tank cap (radiator
cap) is opened due to high pressure in the cooling system.
Change coolant every 6000 hours (48 months).
IMPORTANT! Volvo Coolant VCS must never be mixed with any
other coolant or corrosion protection to avoid damage to the
engine.
264 Cooling system
Draining
1 Open the rear module cover.
2 Remove the expansion tank cap.
3 Place an appropriate container under the radiator drain valve.
4 Remove the plug, install an appropriate nipple and hose. Open
the drain valve and drain the coolant into the container.
5 After draining, close the drain valve, remove the nipple and
hose. Install the plug.
NOTE!
To completely drain the cooling system, the engine block must
also be drained. Contact your local Volvo dealer for further details.
Take care of filters / oils / liquids in an environmentally safe way.
Radiator is located on the right-hand side of the

machine. (Model G930, G940, G946 and G960
shown)
Filling
WARNING
When the engine is running, the fan motor may start any time
without warning. Be ware of rotating fan when the cover door on
the rear module is open.
Filling with coolant is done through the expansion tank.
1 The engine should not be running and the temperature control
should be set to warm.
2 Fill with fresh coolant to the MAX mark on the expansion tank.
3 Install the expansion tank cap. Close the rear module cover.
4 Run the engine until it is warm and all air has been removed
from the system.
5 Top up the coolant level until the system is completely full.
1 Cooling fan motor, G930 – G960 6 The coolant level should be checked after the engine has been
2 Radiator, G930 – G960 run to operating temperature and then allowed to cool.
IMPORTANT! Never fill a hot engine with cold coolant, as this may
cause the cylinder block or the cylinder head to crack. Failure to
change coolant will cause contamination of the cooling system
and the risk of engine damage.
Radiator and coolers, cleaning
NOTICE
Cleaning the radiator should always be carried out with the engine
turned off.
WARNING
Turn off the battery disconnect switch and remove the start key
before starting to work.
The radiator should be cleaned at regular intervals in order to
safeguard the cooling of the engine. When operating under
Cooling system 265
especially dusty conditions, the radiator should be checked more
often.
Radiator
Clean the radiator every 500 hours or as needed.
2 Open the fan housing door.
3 Remove any debris from the radiator and cooler fins.
4 Check the fan blades.
5 Blow the radiator clean with compressed air in the opposite
direction of normal air flow.
6 Close and latch the fan housing door.
7 Close the rear module cover.
NOTE!
The radiator core can be easily damaged if not handled carefully.
Cooler(s), general
3 Remove any debris from the cooler fins.
4 Blow the cooler(s) clean with compressed air in the opposite
266 Cooling system
Hydraulic oil cooler
G930, G940, G946 & G960, the hydraulic oil cooler is located on
the rear left-hand side of the machine.
G970, G976 & G990, the hydraulic oil cooler is located on the rear
right-hand side of the machine.
3 Inspect the oil cooler for clogged or damaged cooler fins.
4 Blow the cooler clean with compressed air in the opposite
NOTE!
High pressure air may damage the cooler fins.
1 Hydraulic oil cooler, G930 – G960

2 Transmission oil cooler, G930 – G960
1 Hydraulic oil cooler, G970 – G990

2 Transmission oil cooler, G970 – G990
Cooling system 267
Winter air intake covers (optional equipment)
The optional winter air intake covers are available to prevent snow
and ice buildup on coolers at lower ambient temperatures and in
certain applications, such as snow plowing.
- The winter air intake covers are recommended for use in
ambient temperatures below –10 °C (+14 °F).
- The winter air intake covers include blanking plates for the air
intake and muffler stacks to prevent snow clogging the air filter
assembly and engine compartment. The flexible cover that is
attached to the fan housing has three flaps that can be partially
opened.
- The winter air intake covers must be removed when ambient
temperatures are consistently above 5 °C (41 °F) or when there
is no possibility of snow and ice buildup on the rear module
cover and air intake. This prevents increased fan speed, higher
1 Winter air intake cover fuel consumption and increased noise levels.
2 Winter air intake blanking plates
Coolant
The cooling system is filled with Volvo Coolant VCS, which is in
accordance with the highest requirements regarding anti-freeze,
anti-corrosion and anti-cavitation properties. To avoid damage to
the engine, is it very important that Volvo Coolant VCS is used
when topping up or when changing coolant.
Volvo Coolant VCS is yellow and a decal at the point of filling
shows that the system is filled with this coolant (see figure).
NOTICE
Volvo Coolant VCS must never be mixed with any other coolant
or corrosion protection to avoid damage to the engine.
If concentrated Volvo Coolant VCS and clean water (see page
Coolant) is used, the table below shows the approximate amount
of concentrated coolant required to achieve freeze protection.
The content of Volvo Coolant VCS must never be less than 40%
of the total mixture.
When there is doubt as to the quality of the water, ready-mixed
Volvo Coolant VCS, which contains 40 % concentrated coolant,
must be used.
NOTICE
If the ready-mixed Volvo Coolant VCS is used, it must not be
mixed with any other ready-mixed coolants, as this may cause
damage to the engine.
Freeze protection down to Content of concentrated

coolant
–25 °C (–13 °F) 40% (mixture from factory)
–35 °C (–31 °F) 50 %
–46 °C (–51 °F) 60 %
Handle filters, oils, and fluids in an environmentally safe manner,

see page 233.
268 Electrical system
Electrical system
Check the headlights, working lights and control lamps daily.
Replace blown fuses with the fuses of the correct ampere rating.
For correct ampere rating, see page Relays and fuses.
Contact your local Volvo dealer for specific welding procedures.
Before allowing a qualified service technician to weld on the
machine or any attachment, disconnect the following items:
switch OFF.
2 Electronic control units (ECUs):
- Instrument ECU (I-ECU). Remove four screws and instru-
ment module. Disconnect three electrical connectors.
- Engine ECU (E-ECU)
- Vehicle ECU (V-ECU)
- Auxiliary hydraulic ECU's (H-ECU) optional
- Wireless (Caretrack) ECU (W-ECU) optional
Additional precautions:
Connect the welding unit ground cable as close as possible to
the work area.
Close the battery box cover.
After completing your welding procedure(s), disconnect the
welding unit ground cable.
Connect the following items:
1 Electronic control units (ECUs)
- Vehicle ECU (V-ECU)
- Engine ECU (E-ECU)–Auxillary hydraulic ECU'
- Wireless (Caretrack) ECU (W-ECU) optional
- Instrument ECU (I-ECU). Connect three electrical
connectors. Install instrument module and retain with four
screws.
switch ON.
NOTE!
Ensure the battery disconnect switch is the last item.
Relays and fuses
Relays and fuses are installed in the electrical distribution box
behind the operator’s seat. They are accessible after the cover of
the electrical distribution box has been opened. A decal on the
inside of the cover shows which current consuming device is
connected to its respective relay or fuse.
Never install a fuse with a higher rating than that specified on the
decal (there is a risk of damage or fire on the circuit board).
If a fault should arise in one of the relays, this can be temporarily
remedied by replacing the faulty relay with another relay which
has a less important function.
For additional information, see 319.
Electrical system 269
Batteries
The machines are supplied with ‘maintenance free’ batteries. The
batteries are two 12 V batteries which are connected in series
providing a system voltage of 24 V.
Battery box
Battery disconnect switch

NOTE!
The battery disconnect switch must remain in the ON position
while the engine is running. If the switch is turned off with the
engine running, damage to the alternator or electronic control
units may result.
The battery disconnect switch is installed on a bracket inside the
engine compartment and above the battery box on the left hand
side of the machine. If the machine is to be left unattended for
some time, turn the battery disconnect switch to the OFF position
and remove the battery disconnect switch key.
NOTE!
Do not bypass the battery disconnect switch. Have the switch
repaired if it is not working properly.
Battery disconnect switch and key
Disconnecting battery
Turn the battery disconnect switch to the OFF position.
Battery and alternator cables must not be disconnected while
the engine is running. This can damage the electrical system.
Disconnect and insulate the battery cables before carrying out
any work on the alternator equipment.
Battery connection
NOTE!
Risk of machine damage
If the cables are wrongly connected, the alternator rectifier is
destroyed immediately.
Turn the battery disconnect switch to the OFF position.
The battery terminals must never be confused. Each terminal
is clearly marked with a (+) or a (–) sign, respectively.
Batteries, rules
Never smoke near batteries, as these give off explosive gases.
Do not connect a discharged battery in series with a fully
charged battery. The current surge can cause the batteries to
explode.
Make sure that metal objects (such as tools, rings, watch straps
etc.) do not come into contact with the battery pole studs.
Protections should be installed over the battery pole studs, as
otherwise there is a risk of injuries and fire.
Never tilt a battery in any direction. Battery electrolyte may leak
out.
When removing a battery, disconnect the ground cable first.
When installing a battery, connect the ground cable last. The
risk of sparks, which can cause fire, is reduced.
When charging batteries, follow the instructions on page 271.
When starting with booster battery, follow the instructions on
page 271.
Battery, charging
WARNING
When a battery is being charged an explosive mixture of oxygen
and hydrogen is formed. A short circuit, an open flame or a spark
in the neighbourhood of the battery can cause a powerful
explosion. Always turn off the charging current before
disconnecting the charging clips. Ventilate well, especially if the
battery is charged in a confined space.
The battery electrolyte contains corrosive sulphuric acid. Any
electrolyte that is spilled on the skin should be removed
immediately. Wash with soap and plenty of water. If you get
V1066032 splashes of electrolyte in your eyes or on any other sensitive part
of your body, at once rinse with plenty of water and seek medical
advice immediately.
1 Disconnect the black negative battery cable from the battery.
2 Disconnect the red positive battery cable from the battery.
3 Connect a battery charger to the battery. During charging, if
electrolyte boil-over (spewing) occurs or the battery
temperature is too high, reduce the charging rate or
temporarily halt the charging to permit the battery to cool.
Starting with booster batteries
WARNING
The batteries could explode due to the current surge if a fully
charged battery is connected to a completely discharged battery.
Since the batteries contain sulphuric acid, this could result in
personal injuries.
Proceed as follows:
2 Check that the booster batteries or any other power source
has the same voltage as the batteries on the machine.
3 Do not under any circumstances disconnect the cables from
the batteries on the machine.
4 Displace the insulating caps from the battery terminals on the
machine.
5 Connect jumper cable (+) on the booster battery to (+) on the
battery connected to the starter motor.
6 Connect the other jumper cable from the (–) terminal on the
booster battery to the frame of the machine, for example the
frame member close to the starter motor.
7 Start the engine with the ignition key in the cab.
8 When the engine has started, first disconnect the jumper cable
between the machine frame and the negative (–) terminal of
the booster battery. Then remove the jumper cable between
the positive (+) terminals.
9 Reinstall the insulating caps on the battery terminals.
NOTE!
Use the optional remote battery boost connector if the machine
is so equipped.
The optional battery boost jumper cable is equipped with
conventional grip clips at one end and a special connector at the
other.
Proceed as follows:
2 Check that the booster batteries or any other power source
has the same voltage as the batteries on the machine.
NOTE!
Do not under any circumstances disconnect the cables from the
batteries on the machine.
3 Attach the grip clips to the appropriate terminals of the booster
battery.
4 Open the left-hand side engine compartment door. Remove
the cap at the remote receptacle alongside the battery
disconnect switch. Install the jumper cable connector into the
receptacle. The connector can only be installed one way.
5 Start the engine with the ignition key in the cab.
6 When the engine has started, first disconnect the jumper cable
from the remote receptacle. Then remove the jumper cable
Remote battery boost connector receptacle and from the booster battery.
receptacle cap 7 Reinstall the cap on the remote receptacle. Close the engine
compartment door.
Belt tension, adjusting, G930, G940, G946 and G960
1 Slacken the alternator attaching bolt.
2 Adjust to the correct belt tension using adjusting screw.
3 Check the belt tension as described above.
4 Tighten the alternator attaching bolt.
Belt tension, adjusting
Belt tension, adjusting, G970, G976 and G990

- Belt tension for G970, G976 and G990 machines is
automatically adjusted. At the correct tension, it should be
possible to deflect the belt approximately 15 mm (0.6 in).
Headlights, adjusting
Headlights, adjusting
Measurements High beams

“B” 2000 mm (6.652 ft)
“L” 5000 mm (16.4 ft)
“H1A” (high cab light) 2060 mm (6.759 ft)
“H2A” (low cab light) 1940 mm (6.365 ft)
“H3A” (high front headlight) 2025 mm (6.644 ft)
“H4A” (low front headlight) 1550 mm (5.085 ft)
The setting of headlamps is of great importance, particularly when

operating on public roads during darkness.
1 Place the machine in service position, see 232. The battery
disconnect switch must be switched on.
2 Switch on high beam.
3 Adjust headlights so that beam centre line is within a target of
Ø250 mm (Ø10 in).
4 Turn off the high beams.
Battery storage
When a battery is at rest, there is a spontaneous electrical
discharge that increases with storage temperature. A fully
charged battery, stored at a temperature of -20°C (-4°F) loses
insignificant charge during a 3 month period. If the same battery
is stored at +30°C (86°F), it is only half charged after 3 months.
To help reduce this discharge, always store batteries in a cool,
dry place in an upright position.
If a battery becomes severely discharged, the electrolyte can
freeze if it is stored below -7°C (+20°F). To prevent damage due
to freezing, do not allow batteries to become discharged or to be
stored below -7°C (+20°F).
Allowing batteries to stand for an extended period of time without
recharging them, will result in reduced performance and service
life. To preserve optimum battery performance and life, recharge
batteries in storage when the open circuit voltage drops to 12.4
volts.
274 Transmission
Transmission
Transmission oil level, checking
Check the oil level every 50 hours.
Before starting the engine, ensure the transmission oil level sight
gauge is full. The oil level sight glass is located on the left hand
side of the transmission case. The sight glass should be full when
the engine is shut down.
Check the transmission oil level at operating temperature with the
engine running.
1 When checking, the machine must stand on level ground.
3 Lower the moldboard and all attachments to the ground. Do
not apply down pressure.
4 With the engine speed at idle, have an assistant check the oil
level. It may be necessary to displace a hydraulic hose if it
obscures the sight glass. To do this, carefully use a suitable
pry bar through the opening on the rear left-hand side of the
Level sight gauge, transmission oil transmission guard. The oil level should be in the middle of the
sight glass.
Transmission, changing oil
WARNING
Draining
The oil is drained at the drain plug on the machine when it is at
working temperature.
Before draining the oil, place an appropriate jack underneath the
transmission guard. Remove the front bolts and carefully lower
the guard to gain access to the drain plug.
NOTE!
The guard is very heavy - take extra care.
1 Place an appropriate vessel underneath the drain plug.
2 Remove the plug and drain the oil.
3 Clean the plug and install it. Raise and secure the guard.
Drain plug, transmission oil
Filling
1 If filling or adding oil to the transmission, shut down the engine.
2 Fill with oil through the filler pipe.
3 With the engine speed at idle, have an assistant check the oil
level. The oil level should be at the middle of the sight glass.
Transmission capacities:
See page 315.
Take care of filters/oils/liquids in an environmentally safe way.
Filler pipe, transmission oil

Transmission 275
Suction strainer
Clean the strainer every 1000 hours in connection with changing
the oil.
1 Remove the cover and clean the suction strainer.
2 Replace gaskets when required.
3 Fill transmission with oil to the required level.
4 Check that there are no leaks.
Suction strainer location
Transmission, replacing oil filter

Replace the filter every 1000 hours or if the filter bypass warning
control lamp lights up, amber central warning lamp flashes and
alarm text shows in the display unit.
The oil filter is the disposable type. It cannot be cleaned, but must
be replaced.
Removing
- Use a filter wrench and turn clockwise.
Installing
1 Fill the filter with fresh oil and apply oil to the gasket.
2 Screw on the filter until the gasket just touches the sealing
surface.
Oil filter, transmission 3 Tighten a further half of a turn by hand.
Transmission, breather filter

Replace the transmission breather filter every 2000 hours.
Transmission breather filter

276 Axles
Axles
Rear axle oil level, checking
NOTICE
Always handle oils and other environmentally hazardous fluids in
an environmentally safe manner.
The oil level sight glass is located on the left hand side of the rear
axle case.
Check the rear axle oil level as follows:
1 Secure machine in the service position. See page 232.
2 The oil level sight glass should be full.
3 If an oil top-up is required, remove the fill plug alongside the
oil level sight glass and add the appropriate lubricant.
4 After topping-up, install the fill plug.
5 Wipe up excess oil. Place soiled shop rags in a closed metal
Rear axle, rear top view container or dispose in an environmentally safe manner and
A Fill plug, rear axle oil in accordance with local regulations.
B Level sight glass, rear axle oil See page 307.
C Drain plug, rear axle oil
D Axle breather
Rear axle, changing oil
WARNING
NOTICE
way.
Change oil and replace axle breather every 1000 hours.
Draining
The oil is drained at the drain plug on the machine when it is at
3 Remove the plug and drain the oil.
4 Clean the plug and install it.
Filling
1 Remove the fill plug and add oil through the port.
2 After filling, clean the plug and install it.
3 Replace the axle breather.
container or dispose in an environmentally safe manner and
in accordance with local regulations.
For rear axle capacities, see page 315.
Tandems 277
Tandems
Tandem oil level, checking
NOTICE
Always handle oils and other environmentally hazardous fluids in
an environmentally safe manner.
1 Secure machine in the service position. See page 232
2 The oil level should be at the middle of the sight plug.
3 Check both tandems.
4 If an oil top-up is required, remove the fill plug on the top front
of the tandem housing and add the appropriate lubricant. See
page 307.
5 After topping-up, install the fill plug.
container or dispose in an environmentally safe manner in
1 Drain plug, tandem oil accordance with local regulations.
2 Fill plug, tandem oil
3 Level sight plug, tandem oil
4 Breather filter, tandem
Tandem oil, changing
WARNING
NOTICE
way.
Change oil and replace the tandem breather filter every 1500
hours.
Draining
3 Remove the drain plug and drain the oil.
4 Clean the magnetic end of the drain plug and install it.
Filling
1 Remove the fill plug and fill the tandem with fresh oil through
the fill plug hole. The oil level should be at the middle of the
sight plug.
2 Clean the fill plug and install it.
3 Repeat for the other tandem.
4 Replace the tandem breather filter.
container or dispose in an environmentally safe manner in
accordance with local regulations.
Tandem capacity:
See page 315.
278 Brake system
Brake system
Service brakes warning system, checking
WARNING
A faulty brake system could lead to accidents and serious injury.
If there is a fault in the brake system do not drive the machine.
1 Turn the battery disconnect switch to the ON position.
2 Insert the ignition key into the ignition switch and turn to the (I)
(running) position. Do not start the engine.
3 Firmly depress the service brake pedal several times (30–40
times) until the red service brake warning lamp begins to flash
and alarm text “WARNING: Service Brakes Circuit Failure.” is
displayed on the display unit
NOTE!
When the alarm text “WARNING: Service Brakes Circuit Failure.”
is displayed, the buzzer sounds also if the parking brake is not
engaged.
4 If the warning lamp does not light, or the alarm text is not
A Service brake pedal
displayed, the brake system is faulty and must be repaired by
B Central warning lamp (red)
C Service brake warning lamp (red) a qualified service technician.
D Alarm text on display unit 5 Start the engine and wait approximately 30 seconds. The
“WARNING: Service Brakes Circuit Failure” warning lamp shall turn off and the alarm text shall not be
displayed.
6 If the warning lamp is still flashing or the alarm text is still
displayed, the brake system is faulty. Shut down the engine
and have the brake system repaired by a qualified service
technician.
7 If the warning lamp turns off and the alarm text is no longer
displayed while the engine is running, continue with this test.
times). The warning lamp shall stay off and the alarm text shall
not be displayed.
9 If the warning lamp begins to flash or the alarm text is
displayed, the brake system is faulty. Shut down the engine
and have the brake system repaired by a qualified service
technician.
10 If the warning lamp remains off and the alarm text is not
displayed while the engine is running, continue with this test.
11 Shut down the engine and turn the ignition switch back to the
(I) (running) position. Do not start the engine.
times).
13 If the warning lamp does not light, or the alarm text is not
displayed, the brake system is faulty and must be repaired by
a qualified service technician.
14 If there is a fault in the brake system that results in a loss of
brake oil when the engine is running, the service brake
warning lamp should light. The red or amber central warning
lamp will flash and the display unit displays, “WARNING:
Service Brakes Circuit Failure.” The buzzer sounds if the
parking brake is not engaged.
Brake system 279
Service brakes, daily test
WARNING
The brake test must only be performed in a place where there is
no risk of accidents, should the machine move forward or reverse.
NOTE!
A secondary power source automatically supplies hydraulic
power assist in the event of an engine failure or any situation
where hydraulic oil flow is interrupted to the service brake system.
Before testing the service brakes, ensure that the parking brake
functions correctly. See Parking brake test on page 280.
1 Start the engine and apply the brake pedal with moderate
pressure. It should stop a minimum of 6.35 cm (2.5 in) from
the floor (measured at the front under side brake pedal to the
floor mat). If OK, continue to step 2.
If not, check master cylinder oil levels. See page Service
brakes, master cylinder oil, checking.
If pedal travel is not acceptable after checking and adding to
the master cylinder oil level, see Service brakes, adjustment
on page 279.
2 Drive the machine to an open area where it is safe to operate
the machine.
3 Operate the grader to a speed of 3–5 km/h (2–3 mph). Depress
the inching pedal and apply the service brakes with moderate
effort. The machine must stop abruptly.
4 If the machine stops abruptly then the machine is OK to go into
service.
Pedal travel, service brake
If not, check master cylinder oil levels. See page Service
brakes, master cylinder oil, checking.
Retest using steps 2–4. If the machine coasts or slows only
slightly, see Service brakes, adjustment on page 279.
5 When the machine comes to a complete stop, secure machine
in the service position. See page 232.
6 Check for any leaks and or fault codes.
7 If none are found, the machine is fit for the day’s operations.
Operating on steep or long grades
When operating on steep or long grades, more frequent checking
and adjustment to braking elements may be required.
Service brake pedal, free play adjustment

The brake pedal free play must be 3±1.5 mm (0.12±0.06 in)
without the engine running.
The brake lights on the rear of the machine should activate when
the service brake pedal is depressed with a force of 133 N (30 lbf)
or more.
Free play, service brake pedal

280 Brake system
Service brakes, adjustment
As the service brakes friction discs wear, the system may require
more oil to fully compress the discs and plates than what is
available in one pedal application. To correct this condition, the
piston travel limiting screw must be adjusted to decrease the
volume necessary to obtain the full force of the piston.
2 With the operator applying light force to the brake pedal, an
assistant on the ground loosens jam nut and turns the piston
travel limiting screw in until it contacts the piston.
NOTE!
If the brakes are not being applied, the pressure in the
accumulators may need to be restored. Starting the engine,
waiting 30 seconds and then shutting down the engine will restore
the pressure in the brake system.
3 Back the piston travel limiting screw out from the piston one
complete turn.
4 Secure the travel limiting screw with its attached jam nut.
5 Repeat steps 3–5 on all four service brake disc units (one per
axle).
Contact your authorised Volvo dealer if the pedal travel is still
excessive or the brake warning light does not go off after proper
adjustment.
Tandem drive, wheel end

1 Mounting flange, tire rim
2 Screw, piston travel limiting
3 Jam nut, limiting screw
Parking brake, description

Parking brake description
The parking brake assembly consists of a set of friction discs
splined to the rear axle input flange. The friction discs engage with
stationary steel plates to provide the braking action. The parking
brake is spring applied when the parking brake is engaged. The
parking brake is released by hydraulic pressure.
On machines with conventional steering, the parking brake is
disengaged when the transmission shifter is moved into a position
other than park (P).
On machines with dual joystick steering, the parking brake is
disengaged when the lower end of the parking brake switch is
pressed in.
Parking brake, test
WARNING
The parking brake must only be checked in a specially secured
location. Make sure that there are no persons or obstructions in
the vicinity of the machine.
1 Drive the machine onto an incline with at least a 20 per cent
grade.
Brake system 281
3 Release the service brakes. The parking brake should hold the
machine stationary.
Have the brake assembly rebuilt by a qualified service technician
if there is any evidence of oil leaks or if the parking brake has been
used for emergency braking.
Ensure that the parking brake works after moving the machine or
any repair work.
Parking brake, manual override
WARNING
Always block the wheels before mechanically releasing the
parking brake to prevent the machine from rolling.
WARNING
If the machine is left without restoring the parking brake function,
this must be indicated clearly with a tag on the steering wheel with
information that the parking brake function has been disabled.
The machine may not be used until the parking brake is restored,
which must be done at a workshop authorized by Volvo CE.
NOTE!
If for any reason the parking brake cannot be released by
hydraulic pressure, the brake can be released using the manual
override method.
NOTE!
Turning the adjusting screws evenly prevents the brake piston
from twisting.
2 Loosen the two adjusting screw locknuts.
3 Turn the two adjusting screws inward in an even manner until
the cup spring preload is overcome and the brake pack
released.
4 To restore the parking brake, turn the adjusting screws
outward to their original position in an even manner to ensure
the park brake has engaged fully. Tighten the locknuts.
1 Parking brake housing

2 Adjusting screws and locknuts
282 Wheels
Wheels
Tyres, checking air pressure
WARNING
Inflating a tyre may cause it to explode. This may lead to
accidents. Use a self-attaching air chuck with a hose long enough
to enable you, when inflating, to stand by the tyre tread, but as far
away as possible.
Recommended air pressures should normally be followed, see
page 327. Special ground conditions may require adjustment of
the air pressure. Follow the tyre supplier's instructions and do not
exceed the maximum permitted air pressures.
V1103088
The tyre pressure may have been raised before the machine was
delivered from the factory. Therefore, check and adjust the tyre
pressure according to recommendations, before putting the
machine to work for the first time.
WARNING
Repairs on or welding of a rim with mounted and inflated tyre may
cause the rim to crack or the tyre to explode. Repair work on tyres
and rims must be carried out by persons who have been
especially trained for this.
The instructions stated below apply to an inflated tyre where the
pressure needs to be increased. If the tyre has lost all pressure,
a trained service engineer should be called in.
- When checking the air pressure, the tyre should be cold and
the machine be without a load.
- Ask all other persons to leave the danger area (in front of the
rim).
- Stand by the tyre’s tread. Tyre installed on a split rim may
explode and cause injuries or, in the worst case, death.
- Use a long air hose (with a self-attaching air chuck) which
allows you to stand outside the danger area.
- Tyres on stored wheels (spare wheels) should be kept in a lying
down position and only be inflated sufficiently to keep the rim
parts in position.
- Do not re-inflate a tyre, if the machine has been operated with
a tyre pressure that has been below 80% of the lowest
recommended tyre pressure according to the specifications, or
if the tyre and/or rim are obviously damaged or are suspected
of being damaged.
Wheel bolts, checking tightening

After having changed a tyre or if the wheel has been removed and
installed for any other reason, the wheel bolts must be check-
tightened after eight hours of operation.
For additional information, see Wheel nuts, tightening torque
All Wheel Drive hydraulic system

Hoses and fittings
Inspect all hoses and fittings for wear, cracks or leaks.
Use cardboard or similar material to check for hydraulic leaks.
Wheels 283
WARNING
The hydraulic oil is hot, toxic and may be highly pressurised. Jets
of oil can penetrate skin and cause serious injuries. A person
injured by a jet of hydraulic oil needs immediate medical attention.
All Wheel Drive motors, greasing
Grease the All Wheel Drive motors every 50 hours. Use only a
hand held grease gun to lubricate the motors. Pump two strokes
of grease into either one of the two grease fittings on both sides
of the machine. Do not over-grease the motors as this will damage
the seals and may cause the system to malfunction.
NOTICE
Do not use an air compressor or another type of grease pump
which is very powerful. The seals may suffer serious damage.
All Wheel Drive, oil filters
The All Wheel Drive hydraulic system shares the same return filter
with the main hydraulic system.
Replace the All Wheel Drive charge filter every 1000 hours.
NOTICE
way.
284 Cab
Cab
Cab, ventilation filters
NOTICE
The cab filters are only intended to separate particles (dust) from
the air. Any dangerous gases are not trapped by the filter.
NOTICE
way.
The cab ventilation filters consists of a prefilter and main filter.
Clogged filters are a result of the working environment of the
machine. The prefilter must be checked every 250 hours.
The main filter must be replaced every 2000 hours and the
prefilter every 1000 hours.
The interval between filter replacements can be increased or
Location of cab ventilation filters reduced depending on how dusty the working environment is.
Cleaning
1 Use a respirator (face mask).
2 Open the outside and inside covers and remove the filters.
3 Carefully shake the filters without damaging them. Avoid using
compressed air, vacuum cleaner or water.
4 Inspect filters and replace if seals are damaged.
5 Install the filters.
6 Close and secure the inside and outside covers.
Opening filter housing inside cover
Replacing
1 Use a respirator (face mask).
2 Open the outside and inside covers.
3 Remove the prefilter (fabric handle). When replacing the
prefilter, ensure that the arrow shown on the filter frame is on
top and pointing towards the front of the machine.
4 Remove the main filter (long metal handle). When replacing
the main filter, ensure that the arrow shown on the filter frame
is on top and pointing towards the front of the machine.
5 Close and secure the inside and outside covers.
Cab ventilation main filter

Cab 285
Dusty environment
Advice for operating in environments where dust is present.
It is important that the cab is kept free from dust as much as
possible:
Keep clothes and shoes clean from dust.
Tidy and vacuum-clean the cab often.
Make sure that the cab door and windows are securely closed
while operating.
Ventilate cab through the ventilation system to provide higher
pressure in the cab.
Check, clean and replace the prefilter and main filters more
often in dusty environment.
Cab ventilation prefilter

286 Windscreen wiper system
Windscreen wiper system

Check the condition of the wiper blades, replace if worn or
damaged. Also replace the wiper blades if they leave stripes on
the windscreen.
Washer reservoir
Washer fluid reservoir, front and rear windows
When there is a risk of frost, make sure that there is sufficient
washer fluid formulated for cold weather in the reservoir.
The fluid reservoir is located on the right-hand side of the machine
in the engine compartment.
Top up when necessary.
Make sure that the cap on the reservoir is securely tightened and
that the reservoir is clean on the outside.
Washer fluid reservoir

Air conditioning 287
Air conditioning
Ask personnel at an authorised dealer workshop to check the air
conditioning once a year.
NOTE!
All kinds of service on the air conditioning unit must be carried out
by accredited workshops by, or under the guidance of, a person
in a leading position with certified competence.
Compressor
On machines equipped with air conditioning, the alternator and
A/C compressor are driven by the same belt.
G930, G940, G946 & G960, the belt is a single V type.
G970, G976 & G990, the belt is a multi-V type.
Check the fan belt tension every 500 hours.
WARNING
The engine must be turned off when replacing the belt – rotating
parts can cause injuries.
In order to prevent leakage and to safeguard the lubrication of the
seals in the air conditioning compressor, the air conditioning
should be run for at least five minutes once a month.
At temperatures below freezing, 0 °C (+32 °F), the unit must be
run indoors, as the power supply to the compressor lead is
switched off by the thermostat whenever the evaporator
temperature is below +1 °C (+34 °F).
NOTE!
Make sure that the exhaust gases are extracted or removed by
ventilation in a suitable way.
288 Air conditioning
Condenser
Cleaning
Clean the condenser as required and as follows:
3 Remove any debris from the area of the condenser.
4 Blow the condenser clean with compressed air.
If the pressure in the system becomes too high because of a
clogged condenser, the air conditioning will cut out. The
condenser must first be cleaned before the system is restarted.
Condenser, G930, G940, G946 & G960
Condenser, G970, G976 & G990

Hydraulic system 289
Hydraulic system
WARNING
Work carefully when changing oil as hot oil can cause severe
NOTICE
way.
NOTE!
Any work on the system requires the utmost in cleanliness. Even
very small particles can cause damage or clog up the system.
Therefore, pressure wash and air dry areas in question before
any work is carried out.
The same hydraulic oil tank is used for the working hydraulics,
steering system and All Wheel Drive system.
The pressure-limiting valves for the hydraulic system are set to
the correct value at the factory. If the valves are altered by any
person other than service personnel at an authorised dealer
workshop, the guarantee from the manufacturer will be void.
Hydraulic system, checking oil level
Check the oil level every 500 hours. The level must be 3/4 of the
way up the level sight gauge (positioned on the right-hand side of
the machine).
NOTE!
The oil level must be checked with the moldboard and all
attachments lowered to the ground. Do not apply down pressure.
Level sight gauge, hydraulic oil
Hydraulic system, changing oil

Draining
NOTE!
You will need a long, flexible hose and appropriate vessel when
draining the oil from the hydraulic tank.
Drain the oil from the hydraulic tank as follows:
1 Operate the machine until the hydraulic oil reaches normal
2 Place the machine in the 232.
3 Remove the drain hose adapter from the toolbox. Attach a long
flexible hose to the drain hose adapter.
4 Remove the drain valve cap at the front manifold plate of the
hydraulic tank.
5 Connect the drain hose adapter to the drain valve and drain
the oil into a vessel.
6 After draining, remove the hose and install the drain valve cap.
7 Remove the hose from the drain hose adapter. Return the
Hydraulic oil tank drain point drain hose adapter to the toolbox.
290 Hydraulic system
Filling
NOTE!
Fill the hydraulic tank through the filter.
NOTE!
Take care not to overfill the hydraulic tank.
NOTE!
Do not fill the hydraulic tank without a filter element installed.
1 Place the machine in the Service position.
2 Remove the oil filter head cover or use the recommended
optional quick-connector.
3 Fill with oil to the correct level.
4 Install the oil filter head cover.
5 Start the engine when it is safe to do so. Operate the blade lift
cylinders several times. Shut down the engine.
6 Top up as required.
7 Check that there are no leaks.
See page 311.
For tank capacity see page 315.
A Oil filter head cover
B Hydraulic oil filter element
C Breather filter
Hydraulic system, return oil filter

Replace return oil filter every 2000 hours.
1 Remove the oil filter head cover.
2 Remove the filter element, which is the disposable type, and
install a new element. Replace the seal ring when installing.
3 The filter cannot be cleaned, but must be replaced.
4 Install the oil filter head cover.
Hydraulic system, breather filter
Replace the hydraulic system breather filter every 2000 hours.
Hydraulic system 291
Implement raising and lowering, alternative method on
CE marked graders
This procedure is used to lower and raise the implements when
the machine will not run.
WARNING
Risk of crushing. Implements can fall when hydraulic power is not
present. Falling implements may cause serious injury. Work with
extreme care when using the alternative method of raising and
lowering the implements. Use an assistant when raising and
lowering the implements.
NOTE!
If the valve section is equipped with a work port relief, the
procedure must be performed by qualified service technician.
1. 10 bank valve position Performing the procedure on a valve section equipped with a work
port relief will alter valve pressure settings.
To lower implements:
1 Loosen the jam nut on the needle valve with a 19 mm (3/4 in)
wrench.
2 Insert a ¼ inch hexagon key into the needle valve and slowly
turn the needle valve counter clockwise 3- 4 turns.
3 Relieve the pressure on both sides of the circuit.
4 After the pressure is released, snug the needle valve and
torque the jam nut to 19 N•m (14.01 lbf ft).
To raise implements:
1 Loosen the jam nut on the needle valve with a 19 mm (3/4 inch)
wrench.
2 Insert a ¼ inch a hexagon key into the needle valve and slowly
turn the needle valve counter clockwise 3 - 4 turns.
V1112165
3 Use an external source with adequate capacity to lift the
1 Needle valve and jam nut
implement.
2 Work port relief
3 Valve section 4 After the pressure is released, snug the needle valve and
torque the jam nut to 19 N•m (14.01 lbf ft).
5 Support and secure the implement. Do not rely on the
hydraulic system for support.
292 Attachments, maintenance
Attachments, maintenance
Moldboard
Moldboard, checking
The following procedure describes the method for checking the
grading unit, circle, moldboard, drawbar and highlift system.
After completing the inspection take action to adjust, repair or
replace any worn or damaged components that negatively affect
the performance of the grading unit. Follow the proper
maintenance and repair methods provided in the Service Manual.
1 Centre and rotate the moldboard 90° to the frame. Raise the
moldboard 203 mm (8 in) off the ground.
2 Place the machine in the service position.
3 Check the moldboard quadrant and sliding surfaces.
a Remove debris and clean for inspection.
b Inspect the slide rail for scarring and rust. Remove scarring
and rust with a hand grinder or buffer.
c For additional protection, the moldboard slide rail can be
lubricated with a graphite based dry lubricant spray.
4 Check the tilt quadrant bolt for movement. Tighten, if
necessary.
A. Moldboard sliding surface
5 Check the cylinder guard mount bolt and U-bolt. Tighten, if

necessary.
6 Check for movement in several locations at the moldboard.
WARNING
B. Tilt quadrant bolt
a Place the floor jack below the moldboard.

Attachments, maintenance 293
b Raise the jack slowly and watch for excessive movement at
the lower slide tubes.
c Continue to slowly raise the jack and watch for excessive
movement at the upper slide wear plates.
7 Check the circle clamp plate condition
C. Lower slide tubes

D. Upper slide wear plates
a Place the floor jack in front of the moldboard below the

quadrant.
b Use the jack to slowly raise the moldboard to check for
movement between the circle and drawbar plates.
E. Checking for movement between the circle and

drawbar plates
c Lower the jack. Continue lifting with the jack and check for
movement in the high lift ball cap.
F. Checking for movement in the lift ball cap
d Lower the jack. Continue lifting with the jack and check for
movement in the blade lift cylinder trunnions.
8 Check the circle guide plate condition.
G. Checking for movement in the blade lift cylinder

trunnions
a Measure from the inside of the circle to the drawbar to check

that the circle is centred in the drawbar. Ensure that the drive
pinions are wearing evenly.
b Use a feeler gauge to check for space between the guide
wear plates and the inside of the circle.
9 Check the drawbar ball stud for movement.
H. Checking that the circle is centred in the drawbar
a Lower the moldboard to the ground on two wooden blocks.

b Install a magnetic mount dial indicator gauge on the end of
the drawbar. Set the dial indicator tip against the end of the
ball cap. Zero in the gauge.
J. Magnetic mount dial indicator gauge
c Start the machine and using the blade tilt function, check for
movement of the ball stud. Stop the machine.
10 Adjust, repair or replace components as required.
K. Using the blade tilt function to check for

movement of the ball stud
Moldboard shimming procedure

Applies to models: G930, G940, G946, G960, G970, G976
The moldboard can be shimmed to remove any excessive
freeplay. This unwanted tilting movement is a result of wear to
various bearing surfaces and affects grade quality.
Shims are placed behind the front Duramide™ bearing plates to
adjust the fit between the moldboard and the quadrant.
Shims are available for models G930 to G976 in two sizes. They
can be used in any combination of 3 mm (0.12 in) and 1.5 mm
(0.06 in).
1 Place the moldboard on blocks tilted all the way forward.
2 Add or remove either one or a combination of several shims
behind the front Duramide™ bearing plate.
3 Shim this gap as tight as possible while still being able to move
1 Quadrant the shims in and out of position by hand.
2 Rear Duramide™ bearing plate
4 Once the appropriate shims are installed and the bearing
3 Front Duramide™ bearing plate
4 Duramide™ slide bearing plates are reassembled, start the machine and slide the
5 Shim moldboard completely from one side to the other. This will
verify any binding between the upper moldboard rail and the
quadrants.
5 If the moldboard binds, stops horizontal movement or makes
noise, it is because a slide area is shimmed too tight.
6 If binding occurs, tilt the moldboard completely forward. Shut
down the engine. Remove the smallest of the steel shims
installed. (For example, if there are two 3 mm shims installed,
one of them may be removed and a 1.5 mm shim installed
instead.)
Circle
1 Circle timing valve

2 Timing shaft lock nut
3 Timing valve pinion
4 Left hand circle turn cylinder
5 Drawbar
6 Right hand circle turn crank
7 Circle
A Centring dimension
B Tooth backlash
C Guide plate to circle clearance
Circle, setup and timing

The machine uses two hydraulic cylinders in conjunction with a
timing valve to turn the circle. The circle must be kept properly
adjusted through regular maintenance for smooth operation and
long life. If the circle fails to turn smoothly, one of the corrective
measures is re-timing. Timing the circle is a six step procedure.
Follow this procedure whenever the timing is checked or
whenever the circle is adjusted. For more detailed information,
refer to the Service Manual.
1 Preparing the circle for adjustment:
Loosen all jam nuts securing the guide plate setscrews.
Loosen the front guide plate setscrews approximately 6 mm
(0.25 in) to allow the circle to move freely. Use a safe method
to move the circle teeth away from the drive pinions. Measure
the centring dimension from the inside edge of the circle to the
side of the drawbar on both sides of the machine. Tighten the
front setscrews on the rear guide plates to adjust the circle
from side to side until the distance is approximately equal on
both sides.
2 Centring circle to pinions:
Measure the backlash between each drive pinion and the
circle teeth. If the backlash for each pinion is not the same,
tighten the front setscrews of the rear guide plates to adjust
the circle until the backlash measurement is equal.
3 Setting pinion backlash:
The front guide plate should always be in contact with the circle
at both ends. Tighten the setscrews of the front guide plate to
pull the circle closer to the drive pinions. The backlash to the
face of each pinion is set at 2.0 +0.5/–0.25 mm (0.090 +0.020/–
0.010 in). Note that you may have to further loosen the rear
guide plate setscrews to allow the circle to move freely. The
timing valve pinion should have the same backlash as the
circle teeth. When you have obtained the correct backlash at
both pinions, fully tighten the jam nuts securing the front guide
plate setscrews.
4 Setting guide plate clearance:
Measure the clearance between the rear guide plates and the
circle inside edge. Adjust each rear plate to have a clearance
of 1.0 +1.0/–0.0 mm (0.040 +0.040/–0.0 in).
Measure clearance between guide plates and

circle. Viewed from bottom of circle; arrow
indicates front of machine.
A 0.0 mm (0.00 in)
B 1.0 +1.0/–0.0 mm (0.040 +0.040/–0.0 in)
Adjusting the circle turn valve

1 Setting crank position:
Fully retract the left-hand cylinder so that a straight line passes
through all three pivot points. Ensure that the right-hand
cylinder and crank is towards the drawbar. Position the
cylinder so that a straight line drawn between the centre of the
cylinder anchor and the centre of the crank shaft will form an
approximate 90° angle with a line drawn through the centres
of both the crank shaft and pivot.
2 Set timing valve:
After relieving all hydraulic pressures, locate and remove a
hose and fitting from one of the ports on the timing valve
connected to the left-hand cylinder. The valve spool must
completely block the port. If adjustment is required, loosen the
timing pinion shaft lock nut and rotate the shaft until the spool
is centred completely blocking the port. A hole on the spool
must be visible in the centre of the port. Check for wear
between the timing valve drive shaft and timing valve spool. If
excessive, timing performance will suffer. Secure the lock nut
and ensure that the spool did not move. Replace all fittings
and hoses. The circle should turn in a counter clockwise
direction when pushing the circle turn control lever forward. If
the circle turns in a clockwise direction, the spool is 180° out
of position. Turn the valve spool 180° and repeat this step.
Circle and drawbar, overview
Drawbar ball stud, adjusting
WARNING
Risk of personal injury. Very heavy object.
1 Place machine into the service position. See page 232.
2 Support the front of the drawbar with a safe stand or overhead
lifting device with proper rated capacity for the job.
3 Remove all bolts and washers securing the split ball cap to the
ball seat.
Removing the split ball cap from the ball seat

A. Split ball cap
4 Slide the split ball cap down the ball stud towards the drawbar
in order to gain access to the shim pack.
Access to shim pack

B. Shim pack
5 Disassemble the shim pack. Using a vernier calliper, measure
the thickness of the shims used in the pack.
Measuring shim pack thickness
6 Using suitable cutting pliers, cut and remove the

corresponding number of shims from the pack in order to
decrease free play, as calculated during inspection.
Cutting shims
7 Realign the shim pack to the split ball cap and secure to the
ball seat with the top and bottom two bolts and washers.
Torque-tighten the four bolts to specification.
NOTE!
Do not install the other four bolts in the split ball cap at this time.
8 Repeat the checking procedure for ball stud movement. Refer
to the Service Manual.
Securing the split ball cap to the ball seat

NOTE!
If free play remains too high, repeat the adjusting procedure.
9 When the proper amount of free play is obtained, install the
remaining four bolts and washers. Torque-tighten the four
bolts to specification.
Final tightening of bolts

Greasing 301
Greasing
Bearings, greasing
The service life of bushings and pivot pins can be extended
considerably if the machine is greased regularly and in the correct
way. Refer to 282 before greasing the AWD motors.
Wipe off grease nipples and grease gun before greasing so that
dirt and sand is not introduced when greasing.
The greasing of bearings has two main purposes:
- Add grease to the bearing to reduce friction between pin and
bushing.
- Replace old grease which may contain dirt. The grease in the
space inside the outer seal collects dirt and also prevents dirt
and water from penetrating into the bearing.
Therefore, grease the bearing until new, clean grease is forced
out through the outer seal.
See 307.
Tandem pivot bearings, greasing

Grease the bearings every 1000 hours or every year.
Tandem pivot bearings are a four point bearing that require an
approved premium quality synthetic grease to ensure maximum
service life.
Approved greases are Shell Aeroshell 22 and Total Aerogrease
N 31089.
NOTE!
Greasing must be performed using a hand grease gun to slowly
and evenly install 3 to 4 strokes of grease into each bearing.
1 Tandem pivot bearing remote grease fittings Excessive rapid greasing with a power grease gun could result in
damage to the bearing seal and oil leakage from the tandem.
302 Lubrication and service chart
Lubrication and service chart

Symbol key
These standard symbols are used in the Lubrication and Service
Chart.
Symbol Description Symbol Description Symbol Description
Engine Engine oil check Engine oil filter
Engine coolant Engine coolant

Fuel filter
level check filter
Hydraulic system
Hydraulic system Hydraulic oil filter
oil check
Transmission oil Transmission oil

Transmission
filter check
Battery Cab recirculating

Cab main air filter
Inspection air filter
Oil disc brake Rear axle oil Engine belt

system level check tension
Tandem oil level

Rear axle Breather filter
check
Lubrication
Tandem Control lamps
grease
Some service and maintenance jobs included in the Lubrication

and service chart require trained workshop personnel or special
equipment. For these jobs we recommend contact with a
workshop authorised by Volvo Construction Equipment.
Other service and maintenance jobs not included in the
Lubrication and service chart must be done by trained workshop
personnel or using special equipment. Contact a workshop
authorised by Volvo Construction Equipment
Other service and maintenance jobs not included in the lubrication
and service chart must be done by trained workshop personnel
or using special equipment. Contact a workshop authorised by
Volvo Construction Equipment for information.
Lubrication and service chart 303
Lubrication and service chart

Intervals: 10 (daily), 50, 250, 500, 1000, 1500 and 2000 hours
For symbol key see page 302.
Maintenance service, every 10 hours

See page 307 for lubricant specifications.
Item Page Service
Check around machine for leaks, damage, obstructions or loose components
Check travel lights, working lights, horn, back-up alarm
Item Page Service
1 34 Check initial display when key is turned to running position (I), the warning and control lamps will
light up and the gauges will activate. Check function of the control lamps (differential lock, blade
lock status, high beam, directional indicators, etc.) instruments, controls and alarm text on the
display unit, and wiper/washer.
278 Check service brakes
280 Check parking brake
164 Check steering system
38 256 Add fuel

Item Page Maintenance service
Every 50 hours after carrying out 10 hour (daily) services
3 251 Check engine oil level
4 274 Check transmission oil level
282 Check tires (air pressure and damage)
Check function/operation/wear/damage of attachments
5 Lubricate front axle main pivot pin bushings
6 Lubricate tie bar bearings
7 Lubricate front axle king pin bushings
8 Lubricate wheel lean cylinder bearings
9 Lubricate front axle leaning wheel pivot pin bushings
10 Lubricate steering cylinder inboard bearing
11 282 Lubricate All Wheel Drive (AWD) motors (optional equipment)
12 Lubricate drawbar ball stud
13 Lubricate circle turn cylinder and crank bearings
14 Lubricate circle turn valve driveshaft bearing
15 Lubricate blade lift cylinder ball pins
16 Lubricate circle shift cylinder bearings
17 Lubricate blade shift cylinder bearing
18 Lubricate moldboard tilt cylinder bearings
19 Lubricate articulation cylinder bearings (these are the two bottom grease nipples on the remote lube
manifold)

Every 250 hours after carrying out 10 hour (daily) and 50 hour services
20 276 Check rear axle oil level
21 284 Check main filter in cab (clean when necessary)
Inspect attachments mounting bolts
23 Lubricate mid-mount lower drive shaft bearing (this is the top-most grease nipple on the remote
lubrication manifold)
Lubrication and service chart 305
Every 500 hours after carrying out 10 hour (daily), 50 and 250 hour services
3 251 Change engine oil and replace oil filter. For conditions that apply to this interval, see Service and
maintenance, Engine page 251.
25 256 Replace fuel filter
25 256 Replace fuel / water trap element
26 289 Check hydraulic system oil level
267 Check radiator, A/C condenser and charge air cooler
27 277 Check tandem oil level
28 272 Check engine belt tension and for wear
29 268 Check battery, state of charging, cables and connections
Check for function of tandem breathers
324 Check wheel rim bolt tightening torque
30 Lubricate upper/lower drive shaft splines

Every 1000 hours after carrying out 10 hour (daily), 50, 250 and 500 hour services
20 276 Change rear axle oil

4 274 Change transmission oil, clean suction strainer and magnetic drain plug
4 274 Replace transmission oil filter
21 284 Replace prefilter in cab
31 282 Replace All Wheel Drive (AWD) charge filter
32 267 Check coolant level
24 Lubricate rear axle/tandem bearing housing

Every 1500 hours after carrying out 10 hour (daily), 50, 250, 500 and 1000 hour
services
27 277 Change tandem oil and replace tandem breathers.

Every 2000 hours after carrying out 10 hour (daily), 50, 250, 500, 1000 and 1500 hour services
33 Clean, check and lubricate front wheel hub bearings every 2000 hours or 12 months whichever
occurs first.
34 289 Change hydraulic system oil
34 289 Replace hydraulic system return oil filter element
35 274 Replace transmission breather filter
34 289 Replace hydraulic system breather filter
36 256 Replace fuel system breather filter
21 284 Replace main filter in cab
267 Check coolant anti-freeze concentration (or yearly before winter season)
280 Test parking brake
Check engine valve clearance (D4—D8 engines only)
Maintenance service, when required

Maintenance service, when required
Check engine valve clearance every 4000 h (D11—D16 engines only)
Change diesel particulate filter (DPF) spark plugs every 4500 h
Diesel
particulate filter, Clean diesel particulate filter (DPF) every 6000 h (D4—D8 engines) 4500 h (D11—
check and clean D16 engines)
267 Change engine coolant every 6000 hours or 48 months whichever occurs first.
DPF ignition Change diesel particulate filter (DPF) ignition cables every 8000 h (D11—D16
cables, change engines only)
261 Replace air cleaner primary filter according to signal or maximum 12 months
261 Replace air cleaner secondary filter after 3 primary filters or maximum 24 months
37 Inspect and adjust circle top, clamp and guide bearings
Inspect tilt quadrant bolts
37 Check circle and moldboard sliding surfaces Keep these bearing surfaces clean
Check drawbar ball stud and adjust
Check battery disconnect switch
Adjust blade lift ball pin caps
Adjust blade lift trunnions
Specifications
Recommended lubricants 307
Specifications
Recommended lubricants
General information
Lubrication is an essential part of preventive maintenance,
affecting to a great extent the useful life of the unit. Periodic
lubrication of the moving parts reduces to a minimum the
possibility of mechanical failures.
For maximum machine life and performance, use only genuine
manufacturer-approved lubricants. See pages 302 and 307.
Different lubricants are needed, and some components require
more frequent lubrication than others. It is important that the
specific instructions regarding types of lubricants and the
frequency of their application be followed.
Items requiring regular service and the interval at which they
should be performed are shown on the lubrication and service
chart, see page 302. To obtain the maximum long-life results from
the machine, a regular service program should be followed as
recommended in this manual. The suggested preventive
maintenance intervals are based on average operating
conditions. In extremely severe, dusty or wet operating conditions
more frequent lubrication may be necessary.
Check all levels with the machine parked on a level surface and
while the oil is cold, unless otherwise specified.
All grease fittings are SAE standard, unless otherwise indicated.
Grease non-sealed fittings until grease is seen extruding from the
fitting. Grease fittings that are worn and will not hold the grease
gun, or those that have a stuck check ball, must be replaced.
Over-lubrication on non-sealed fittings will not harm the fittings or
components. But, under lubrication will definitely lead to a shorter
component life.
Unless otherwise indicated, items not equipped with grease
fittings (linkages, pins, levers, etc.) should be lubricated with oil
once a week. Motor oil, applied sparingly, will provide the
necessary lubrication and help prevent the formation of rust. An
anti-seize compound may be used if rust has not formed.
Otherwise, the component must be cleaned first.
Thoroughly wash all fittings, caps, plugs, etc. with non-
flammable, non-toxic cleaning solution before servicing to
prevent dirt from entering while performing the service.
Lubricants must be at operating temperature before draining.
During regular lubrication service, visually check the entire unit
to ensure that capscrews, nuts and pins are properly secured.
Spot check several capscrews and nuts for proper torque. If
any are found loose, a more thorough investigation must be
made.
Stop the machine if any function does not operate or operates
incorrectly. Report the problem to your supervisor or site
management. Do not continue operations until the problem is
corrected. If necessary, contact authorised distributor for
results.
The viscosity indications are according to SAE J 300 MAR93.
The approval of Volvo is required if any other oil base quality (e.g.,
biologically degradable oil) is to be used.
Specifications
308 Recommended lubricants
Oil grade Recommended viscosity at varying ambient temperatures

°C –40 –30 –20 –10 0 10 20 30 40 50
°F –40 –22 –4 14 32 50 68 86 104 122
Engine Volvo Ultra Diesel Engine Oil
VDS-3 or SAE 10W-30
ACEA-E5 plus VDS-2 or
SAE 10W-30
ACEA-E7 plus VDS-2 or
API CI-4 plus VDS-2 or SAE 15W-40
EO-N Prem. plus VDS-2
Rear axle Volvo Wet Brake Transaxle Oil
lock/unlock #WB101 WB101
differential
Tandems/oil
disc brakes
Transmission Volvo Automatic Transmission
Fluid AT102
Hydraulic Volvo Super Hydraulic Oil ISO VG 32 HV

system According to standard: ISO VG 46 HV
VCE 1286,08
Volvo Biodegradable Hydraulic Oil ISO VG 68 HV
According to standard: Warm-up is required in low temperatures. See page 138.
VCE 1286,1
Cooling Volvo coolant VCS
system See 267.
All grease Volvo Super Grease Lithium
fittings NLGI EPO or EP1
(except
NLGI EP2
tandem pivot
bearings)
Tandem pivot Shell — Aeroshell 22 Total —

bearings Aerogrease N 31089 NGLI Grade 2
Engine oil
Follow recommended change intervals according to the oil's
grade and sulphur content in the fuel.
Sulphur content of the fuel

< 0.3 % 0.3–0.5 % > 0.5 %
Oil grade
Oil change interval
Specifications
Sulphur content of the fuel
Volvo Ultra Diesel Engine Oil
Volvo Super Diesel Engine Oil
VDS-3 500 hours 250 hours 125 hours
VDS-2 plus ACEA-E7
VDS-2 plus API CI-4
VDS-2 250 hours 125 hours 75 hours
VDS plus ACEA-E3
ACEA: E7, E4 125 hours 75 hours 50 hours
API: CI-4, CH-4, CG-4
Coolant
Only use Volvo Coolant VCS when topping up or changing
coolant. To avoid damage to engine and cooling system, different
coolants or corrosion protection must not be mixed.
When using concentrated Volvo Coolant VCS and clean water,
the mixture should contain 40–60 per cent concentrated coolant
and 60–40 per cent clean water. The amount of concentrated
coolant must never be less than 40 per cent of the total mixture,
see table below.
Freeze protection down to: Mixed-in amount of concentrated coolant

–25 °C (–13 °F) 40 %
–35 °C (–31 °F) 50 %
–46 °C (–51 °F) 60 %
The concentrated coolant must not be mixed with water that

contains a high degree of lime (hard water), salt or metals.
Clean water for the cooling system must also meet the following
requirements:
Description Value
Total number of solid particles < 340 ppm
Total hardness < 9.5 ° dH
Chloride < 40 ppm
Sulphate < 100 ppm
pH value 5.5–9
Silica < 20 mg SiO2/litre
Iron < 0.10 mg Fe/litre
Manganese < 0.05 mg Mn/litre
Electrical conductivity < 500 µS/cm
Organic content, COD-Mn < 15 mg/litre
When there is doubt as to the quality of the water, ready-mixed

Volvo Coolant VCS, which contains 40 per cent concentrated
coolant, must be used. Do not mix with other ready-mixed
coolants, as this may cause engine damage.
Fuel
Quality requirements: The fuel should at least meet the legal
requirements, and national and international standards for
marketed fuels, for example: EN590 (with nationally adapted
temperature requirements), ASTM D 975 No. 1D and 2D, JIS KK
2204.
Specifications
Sulphur content: According to current legal requirements (the
sulphur content must however not exceed 0.3 per cent by weight),
see also .
Bio-diesel fuel
Vegetable oils and/or esters, also called “bio-diesel”, (e.g., rape-
seed methyl ester RME fuel), which are offered on certain markets
both as pure products and as mixed into the diesel fuel.
Volvo accepts a maximum intermix of 7 per cent bio-diesel fuel in
the diesel fuel, ready mixed from the oil companies.
A higher intermix than 7% of bio-diesel fuel may cause:
- Increased emission by nitrogen oxide, (thereby not meeting
legal requirements)
- The short service life of motor and injection system
- Increased fuel consumption
- Altered engine output
- Shortening the engine oil change interval to a half
- Shortened service life of rubber materials in the fuel system
- Less good cold handling properties of the fuel
- Limit storage time for the fuel, which may cause clogging up of
the fuel system if the machine is laid up for a longer period
Warranty condition
The warranty does not cover damage caused be an intermix of
more than 7 per cent of bio-diesel fuel.
Lubrication grease
Volvo Super Grease Lithium EP2 or corresponding grease on
lithium base with EP additives and consistency NLGI class 2.
If the machine is provided with automatic greasing system, other
recommended lubricants apply.
Specifications
Oil viscosities
Low ambient air temperature increases oil viscosity, which
causes additional loads on the starting circuit and increases
cranking duration before the engine will start.
All oils are seasonally adjusted at the factory. The actual factory
fills are identified on a temporary decal mounted on the lower left-
hand window.
Rear axle/tandem/oil disc brake oils

Oil grade Volvo WB 101
Requirements
Property Unit WB 101 Test method

Density kg/m2 To be stated
Flash point COC °C min. 180
Pour point °C min. –27
Viscosity @ 40 °C (104 °F) mm2/s (cSt) To be stated
Viscosity @ 100 °C (212 mm2/s (cSt) min. max. 9.0 12.5
°F)
Viscosity @ 100 °C (212 mm2/s (cSt) min. 8.8
°F) after shearing 30
cycles
Viscosity @ 20 °C (68 °F) mPa/s max. 3500
Rust protection 24 h No rust
API class GL-4
Additives Lubrizol/Unizol LZ 9990A
Oronite OLOA 9725XV
Oronite OLOA 9727V
Solid particles code max. 18/13
NOTE!
It is very important that the oil contains the correct additives to the
required amount.
Hydraulic oil
The quality of the hydraulic oil is important to the satisfactory
performance of any hydraulic system. The oil serves as the power
transmission medium, system coolant and lubricant. Selection of
the proper oil is essential to ensure proper system performance
Specifications
and life. For the specifications and requirements that hydraulic oil
used in this machine should meet, refer to table below.
Viscosity 60 SUS minimum at operating temperature 7500 SUS

minimum at starting temperature 150–225 SUS at
100 °F (generally) 44–48 SUS at 210 °F (generally)
Viscosity index 90 minimum
Aniline point –175 minimum
API gravity 28 minimum Paraffinic oils: 28 or more Mixed base: 24–
28 Naphthalic or asphaltic base: 24 or less
Recommended additives Rust and oxidation inhibitors foam depressant
Desirable characteristics Stability of physical and chemical characteristics. High
demulsibility (low emulsibility for separation of water,
air, and contaminants). Resistance to the formation of
gums, sludges, acids, tars and varnishes. High lubricity
and film strength
Lubricant
Extreme Pressure Multipurpose Lubricant
Extreme pressure (EP) multipurpose gear lubricant is
compounded to achieve high load carrying capacity and meet the
requirements of either API-GL-5 or MIL-L-2105C. Unless
otherwise specified, SAE-90 viscosity oil may be used for year-
round service. Low temperature usage is restricted as indicated
in the table below.
EP Multipurpose Lubricant
SAE Viscosity No. Min. Ambient Temp.
75W –40 °C (–40 °F)
80W –26 °C (–15 °F)
85W –12 °C (+10 °F)
90 –7 °C (+20 °F)
140 +5 °C (+40 °F)
250 +10 °C (+50 °F)
Extreme Pressure Multipurpose Grease

Extreme pressure multipurpose grease is a lithium soap base
grease with a high load carrying capacity. The properties listed in
table below are recommended.
EP Multipurpose Grease
Timken OK Load 18 kg (40 lb) minimum
Dropping point 177 °C (350 °F) minimum
Oil viscosity 75 SUS minimum at 99 °C (210 °F)
Water resistance Excellent
Under normal operating conditions, the following consistency

grades are recommended:
NLGI No. 0 ambient temp. below –18 °C (0 °F)
NLGI No. 1 or No. 2 for ambient temp. –18–38 °C (0–100 °F)
NLGI No. 2 or No. 3 for ambient temp. over 38 °C (100 °F)
Specifications
Bearing and Gear Lubricant
Bearing and gear lubricant provides better thermal and oxidation
stability than conventional mineral oils. The lubricant has naturally
high viscosity indexes compared to mineral oils, providing lower
viscosity at lower temperatures and higher viscosity at higher
temperatures. See table below.
Bearing and Gear Lubricant

Lubricant Viscosity
ISO Viscosity grade 220
API gravity 31.9
Viscosity index 152
Viscosity:
cSt at 40 °C 216
cSt at 100 °C 25.2
Specifications
314 Fuel system
Fuel system
Fuel
Viscosity (ASTM-D-445) 1.3 to 5.8 centistokes per second at 40 °C (104 °F)
Cetane number (ASTM-D-613) 40 minimum at temperatures above 0 °C (32 °F)
45 minimum at temperatures below 0 °C (32 °F)
Sulfur content (ASTM-D-129 or 1552) Not to exceed 0.05% by weight
Water and sediment (ASTM-D-1796) Not to exceed 0.1% by volume
Carbon residue (Ramsbottom, ASTM D-524 or Not to exceed 0.25% by weight on 10% volume residue
Conradson, ASTM-D-189)
Flash point (ASTM-D-93) At least 52 °C (125 °F) or legal temperature if higher
than 52 °C (125 °F)
Density (ASTM-D-287) –1 °C to 6 °C (30 °F to 42 °F) API gravity at 16 °C (60 °F)
(0.816 to 0.876 Sp. Gr.)
Cloud point (ASTM-D-97) 6 °C (10 °F) below lowest ambient temperature at which
the fuel is expected to operate
Active sulfur Copper strip corrosion not to exceed No. 2 rating after
3 hours at 49 °C (122 °F)
Ash (ASTM-D-482) Not to exceed 0.02% by weight
Distillation (ASTM-D-86) The distillation curve must be smooth and continuous.
At least 90% of the fuel must evaporate at less than
360 °C (680 °F). All of the fuel must evaporate at 385 °C
(725 °F)
Specifications
Service capacities and change intervals 315
Service capacities and change

intervals
Capacities
Component Change capacities
Engine incl. filter G930 to G960 21.5 litres (5.7 US gal)
Engine incl. filter G970 to G990 37.8 litres (10 US gal)
Transmission incl. filter 60 litres (15.9 US gal)
Rear axle G930 to G960 22.3 litres (5.9 US gal)
Rear axle G970 to G990 23.0 litres (6.0 US gal)
Tandems (each) G930 to G960 134 litres (35.4 US gal)
Tandems (each) G970 & G976 135.8 liters (35.9 US gal)
Tandems (each) G970 optional & G990 147 litres (38.8 US gal)
Hydraulic oil tank G930, G940, G960, G970 & G990 95 litres (25 US gal)
Hydraulic oil tank G946 & G976 144 litres (38 US gal)
Fuel tank G930 318 litres (84 US gal)
Fuel tank G940 to G960 368 litres (97.2 US gal)
Fuel tank G970 to G990 474 litres (125.2 US gal)
Cooling system G930 and G940 31 litres (8.2 US gal)
Cooling system G946 and G960 34 litres (9 US gal)
Cooling system G970 to G990 48 litres (12.7 US gal)
Change intervals
Oil and fluid changes Hours
Engine 500
Coolant 6000*
Transmission, at the same time clean magnetic drain plug and suction 1000
strainer
Rear axle, at the same time clean magnetic drain plug 1000
Tandems, at the same time clean magnetic drain plug 1500
Hydraulic system (working hydraulics and steering system) 2000
Filter changes Hours

Engine, oil filters 500**
Engine, air cleaner (primary filter) According to signal, max. 1 year
Engine, air cleaner (secondary filter) After 3 primary filters, max. 2 yrs.
Fuel filters 500
Fuel / water trap element 500
Fuel system, breather filter 2000
Oil-bath precleaner, filter inserts 2000
Transmission, oil filter 1000
Transmission, breather filter 2000
Tandem breather (each) 1500
Hydraulic system, oil filter 2000
Hydraulic system, breather filter 2000
Specifications
316 Service capacities and change intervals
Filter changes Hours
Cab, ventilation filter (prefilter) 1000
Cab, ventilation filter (main filter) 2000
Specifications
Engine 317
Engine
Engine, specifications (G940)
Applies to models: G940
Engine
Type designation D7EGBE3
Product number N/A
Flywheel output at 2100 r/min. 165 kW (221 hp)
Max. torque at 1550 r/min. 1049 Nm (774 lbf ft)
Number of cylinders 6
Cylinder bore 108 +0,02 mm (4.251 +1.0008 in)
Stroke 130 mm (5.118 in)
Cylinder capacity, total 7.150 dm3 (litres) (436 in3)
Compression ratio 18:1
Order of injection 1-5-3-6-2-4
Idle speed, low 800 ±50 r/min.
Idle speed, high 2200 ±35 r/min.
Engine, specifications (G946,G960)

Engine
Type designation D7EGAE3
Product number N/A
Cylinder bore 108 +0,02 mm (4.251+1.0008 in)
Engine, specifications (G976,G990)

Engine
Type designation D9BGBE3
Product number 114487
Cylinder bore 120 mm (4.72 in)
Stroke 138 mm 5.43 in)
Specifications
318 Engine
Engine
Compression ratio 19.2:1

Engine
Type designation D7EGCE3
Product number N/A
Cylinder bore 108 +0,02 mm (4.25 +1.0008 in)

Engine
Type designation D9BGAE3
Product number 115160
Cylinder bore 120 mm (4.72 in)
Stroke 138 mm 5.43 in)
Compression ratio 19.2:1
Specifications
Electrical system
System voltage 24 VDC
Batteries 2 (connected in series)
Ground connection Negative
Battery voltage 12 V
Battery capacity (standard) G930, G940 96 Ah (2 x 85 Ah)
and G960
Battery capacity (standard) G946, G970, 130 Ah (2 x 100 Ah)
G976 and G990
Battery capacity (optional) 2 x 231 Ah
Battery cold cranking amps (standard) 760 CCA
G930, G940 and G960
Battery cold cranking amps (standard) 1125 CCA
G946, G970, G976 and G990
Battery cold cranking amps (optional) 1125 CCA or 1300 CCA
G930, G940 and G960
Battery cold cranking amps (optional) 1300 CCA
G946, G970, G976 and G990
Alternator (standard) 80 Amp
Rated output 2240 W
Alternator (optional) 110 Amp
Rated output 3080 W
Starter motor output (D7) 5.5 kW (7.4 hp)
Starter motor output (D9) 7 kW (9.4 hp)
Batteries
Battery electrolyte density kg/dm³ (lb/in³)
Fully charged battery 1.280 (0.046)
The battery should be recharged at a 1.250 (0.045)
density of:
Lights
Bulbs Watt Socket
Cab headlights, high beam 70 H3
Cab headlights, low beam 70 H7
Front headlights, high beam 70 H3
Front headlights, low beam 70 H7
Worklights 70 H3
Parking lights, front 4 BA 9s
Parking lights, rear 10 BA 15s
Stop lights 21 BA 15s
Direction indicators, front 21 BA 15s
Direction indicators, rear 21 BA 15s
Clearance lights, front 4 Bullet terminals
Clearance lights, rear 4 Bullet terminals
Rotating warning beacons 70 H1
Specifications
Centre instrument panel (20 1.2 W 2x4.6d
pcs)
Cab (dome) main light 21 BA 15s
Cab (dome) spotlight 10 BA 15s
Specifications
Relays and fuses
V1127710 Relays and fuses

Specifications
Relays on circuit board
Re Function Re Function
1 Electronics components supply 14 Not used
2 Vehicle ECU (V-ECU) 15 Front headlights/marker lights
3 Rear worklights and side 16 Backup alarm/backup lights
worklights
4 Wipers and washers 17 Seat air suspension
5 Cab headlights/master light switch 18 Heated mirror
6 Front worklights M1 Hydraulic unload
7 Moldboard worklights M2 Park brake V-ECU
8 Auxiliary hydraulic valve M3 Park brake latch
9 Air conditioning M4 Engine sensors
10 Instrument ECU (I-ECU) M5 Brake booster motor
11 Engine ECU (E-ECU) M6 Hi/low, front headlights
12 Defroster fan/direction indicator M7 Hi/low, cab headlights
13 Not used M8 Start circuit
M9 Fuel warmer
P Function P Function
1 Service plug 6 Service plug
2 Service plug 7 Service plug
3 Service plug IB Service connection (VCADS PRO)
4 Service plug 24 V Remote 24 V electrical power
source
5 Service plug
Relays not on circuit board

Preheater
Designation Function
RE2501 Preheating induction air
Hydraulic
RE3301 Start circuit
RE6401 Secondary steering motor
HVAC
RE8703 HVAC air mix actuator
RE8705 HVAC air mix actuator
Flasher
RF Direction indicators
Specifications
Fuses
Fuses in the electrical distribution box (behind the operator’s seat)
Fu A Function Fu A Function
1 5 Shifter/service tool/remote 22 5 Alternator/HVAC & AWD
display sensors
2 5 Blade lift accumulators/ 23 10 Instrument ECU (I-ECU),
Blade Control System Vehicle ECU (V-ECU)
3 5 Switches/sensors 24 15 Instrument ECU (I-ECU)
4 15 Vehicle ECU (V-ECU) 25 15 Vehicle ECU (V-ECU)
5 10 Interior lights/master light 26 5 Service Brake
switch
6 15 Beacon lights 27 15 Horn, direction indicator
flasher
7 5 Direction indicators 28 15 Front defroster fan and air
mix control
8 15 Rear worklights 29 7.5 Front wiper/washer
9 7.5 Side worklights 30 15 Rear and lower wiper/
washer
10 5 IEGR valve 31 10 Radio
11 5 Preheat 32 7.5 Ignition switch
12 15 Engine ECU (E-ECU) 33 25 24 V electrical power
outlet
13 5 Front headlights - RH low 34 15 Cab headlights
14 5 Front headlights - LH low 35 5 LH marker lights
15 5 Front headlights - RH high 36 5 RH marker lights
16 7.5 Front worklights 37 15 Backup lights/backup
alarm
17 15 Moldboard worklights 38 5 Front headlights - LH high
18 15 Auxiliary hydraulics 39 15 Air seat
19 25 HVAC unit 40 10 Heated mirrors
20 5 Radio 41 5 Not used
21 10 Wireless ECU (W-ECU) 42 20 Not used
FH 1 – Spare FH 5 10 NOx control unit power

FH 2 10 ACM Power FH 6 10 Spark plug power
FH 3 25 Glow plug power FH 7 5 Regeneration electrical
power
FH 4 – Spare FH 8 5 ACM sensor power
Main fuses at the battery connection

Fu A Function Fu A Function
- 75 Cab feed - 125 Preheat
Specifications
324 Transmission
Transmission
Transmission
Type Direct drive, fully sequential Volvo powershift transmission
Designation HTE840 (standard equipment on all G900 machines)
Number of gears 8 forward, 4 reverse
Designation HTE1160 (optional equipment on all G900 machines)
Number of gears 11 forward, 6 reverse
Gear shifting system Electro-hydraulic
Rear axle
Type Planetary final reduction with fully floating drive shafts
Designation APR 70A (Models G930 to G960)
Differential lock Operator-controlled
Designation APR 90A (Models G970 to G990)
Differential lock Operator-controlled
Tandem
Type Chain drive
Wheel rim bolts

Tightening torque All models, front and rear wheels: 644–712 N•m (66–73 kgf•m)
(475– 525 lbf•ft)
Specifications
Brake 325
Brake
Service brakes
Service brakes, type Dual circuit, all-hydraulic, wet multiple disc brake. The circuits are open centre with
back-up pressure supplied by a hydraulically charged circuit.
Number of internal clutch G930 – G960: 4
discs per side G970 – G990: 5
Number of external clutch G930 – G960: 5
discs per side G970 – G990: 6
Brake charging pressure

Cut-in pressure (electrical) 12.5±0.5 MPa (125±5 bar) (1813 ±73 psi)
Cut-out pressure (electrical) 18.0 –0.3/+0 MPa (180 –3/+0 bar) (2610 –44/+0 psi)
Max. brake charging pressure 17.0—18.5 MPa (170—185 bar) (2465—2683 psi)
Max. output brake pressure 10.0 ±0.6 MPa (100 ±6 bar) (1450 ±87 psi)
Low pressure indication 8.5—9.5 MPa (85—95 bar) (1231—1378 psi)
Parking brake
Type Wet multiple disc brake in rear axle, spring applied/hydraulically
released
Number of internal clutch discs 5 – APR 70A (Models G930 to G960)
Number of external clutch discs 6 – APR 70A (Models G930 to G960)
Number of internal clutch discs 7 – APR 90A (Models G970 to G990)
Number of external clutch discs 8 – APR 90A (Models G970 to G990)
Specifications
326 Steering
Steering
Type Closed-centre, dynamic signal, load sensing
Number of steering wheel revolutions, total 6.2 lock-to-lock
Minimum turning radius – articulated, no lean G930: 7290 mm (287 in)
G940: 7341 mm (289 in)
G946: 7319 mm (288 in)
G960: 7341 mm (289 in)
G970: 7755 mm (306 in)
G976: 7756 mm (306 in)
G990: 7913 mm (312 in)
Minimum turning radius – articulated, lean G930: 7254 mm (286 in)
G940: 7327 mm (289 in)
G946: 7259 mm (286 in)
G960: 7327 mm (289 in)
G970: 7705 mm (304 in)
G976: 7642 mm (301 in)
G990: 7695 mm (302 in)
Minimum turning radius – non-articulated, no lean G930: 9967 mm (393 in)
G940: 9920 mm (391 in)
G946: 9992 mm (394 in)
G960: 9920 mm (391 in)
G970: 10249 mm (404 in)
G976: 10504 mm (414 in)
G990: 10530 mm (415 in)
Minimum turning radius – non-articulated, lean G930: 9720 mm (383 in)
G940: 9694 mm (382 in)
G946: 9744 mm (384 in)
G960: 9694 mm (382 in)
G970: 9957 mm (392 in)
G976: 10504 mm (414 in)
G990: 10069 mm (397 in)
Main hydraulic oil pump

Type Variable displacement pressure and flow compensated
piston pump
Maximum working pressure setting 10 MPa (103 bar)(1500 psi)
Maximum output pressure setting 22 MPa (224 bar)(3250 psi)
External load sense relief valve opening pressure 21 MPa (210 bar)(3050 psi)
Specifications
Wheels 327
Wheels
If tyres are used other than those stated, the tyre manufacturer’s
dealer should be contacted to obtain information about the correct
air pressure.
Bias ply tyre sizes Ply Maximum pressures Radial tyre sizes Maximum pressures
14.00 X 24 12 250 kPa (36 psi) 14.00R24 375 kPa (54 psi)
14.00 X 24 16 350 kPa (51 psi) 16.00R24 375 kPa (54 psi)
16.00 X 24 12 225 kPa (33 psi) 17.50R25 300 kPa (44 psi)
16.00 X 24 16 300 kPa (44 psi) 20.50R25 300 kPa (44 psi)
17.50 X 25 12 200 kPa (29 psi)
17.50 X 25 16 275 40
20.50 X 25 12 175 kPa (25 psi)
Tyres and models

Tyre Model
G930 G940 G946 G960 G970 G976 G990
Standard tyre 14.00 X 14.00 X 14.00 X 14.00 X 14.00 X 14.00 X 16.00 X 24
24 24 24 24 24 24
Optional tyres 17.50 X 17.50 X 20.50 X 25
25 25
16.00 X 16.00 X
24 24
20.50 X
25
Specifications
328 Cab
Cab
General
The cab is mounted on four vibration damping rubber pads. The
rubber pads reduce noise and vibrations. The cab is insulated and
has a flat floor with rubber mat.
The primary access to the cab is by the left hand door.
Tested and approved as a protective cab and meets ROPS
standards according to ISO 3471-2004 and EN13510:2000.
Tested and approved as a protective cab and meets FOPS
standards according to ISO 3449-2005 Level 2 and for operator’s
seat belt requirements to ISO 6683-1999 and SAE J386 NOV 97.
Cab interior fittings and upholstery Fire retardant (fire resistant) measured according to ISO
3795-1989
Number of emergency exits The right-hand door opening can be used as the exit in case of
an emergency.
Models equipped with a snow wing must be equipped with an
emergency hammer located on the left-hand ROPS post. It can
be used to break the back and side window glass (impact
hammer on window corners only) in case of a rollover. An
emergency hammer is available from Volvo as an option.
Hand-arm vibrations
Emission of hand-arm vibration during real operating conditions
at its intended use is less than 2.5 m/s2 RMS (root mean square)
acceleration according to ISO 8041.
Whole-body vibrations
Emission of whole-body vibration during real operating conditions
at its intended use is less than 0.5 m/s2 RMS (root mean square)
acceleration, according to ISO 8041 for finish grading, hard
grading, and transfer movement.
Emission of whole-body vibration during real operating conditions
at its intended use is according to the table below.
Typical operating Vibration emission value Vibration emission value Vibration emission value
conditions aw,eqx(m/s² RMS) aw,eqy(m/s² RMS) aw,eqz(m/s² RMS)
Finish grading 0.41 0.48 0.38
Hard grading 0.61 0.64 0.68
Transfer movement 0.39 0.36 0.58
The following vibration directions are defined: x = fore and aft,

y = lateral, z = vertical
The whole-body vibration values given above have been taken
from a ISO/CEN Technical Report.
NOTE!
These whole-body vibration emission values were determined at
particular operating and terrain conditions and is therefore not
representative for all the various conditions in accordance with
the intended use of the machine and should not alone be used to
determine the whole-body vibration exposure to the operator
using the machine. For this purpose the information in the
ISO/CEN Technical Report is recommended.
To ensure that the whole-body vibration emission during machine
use is kept to a minimum, see .
Specifications
Cab 329
Sound information
Sound power level (LWA) around the machine, see value on
decal on the machine.
Measuring is carried out according to 2000/14/EC with applicable
appendices and measuring method according to ISO 6395.
Interior operator noise levels average 75 dB(A) per ISO
6394-1998 (enclosed cab).
Heating and ventilation
The enclosed cab can be equipped with a heating and ventilation
(HVAC) system with defrosting for all windows and the best
possible air distribution (10 HVAC outlets and 5 front defroster
outlets). The optional cab fan is a double blower wheel with
sixteen speeds. Air conditioning and the front defroster are
available as optional equipment.
Operator seat
When equipped with the EU mechanical or air suspension seat,
these seats meet the criteria of ENISO7096:2000 representing
vertical vibration input under severe but typical operating
conditions. This seat is tested with the input spectral class EM4
and has a seat transmissibility factor SEAT = 0.865.
Standard version (mechanical)

Height adjustment 51 mm (2.00 in)
Suspension stroke 76 mm (2.99 in)
Longitudinal adjustment 200 mm (7.87 in)
Backrest tilt adjustment 60° forward, 20° rearward
Armrest angle adjustment 110° upward from horizontal
Backrest extension (optional equipment) 250 mm (9.84 in)
Upholstery Fire resistant
Lap type seat belt with reel Yes
Operator weight range (not EU) 50 kg (110 lb) to 136 kg (300 lb)
Operator weight range (EU) 50 kg (110 lb) to 125 kg (275 lb)
Air-suspended version
Height adjustment 76 mm (2.99 in)
Suspension stroke 89 mm (3.50 in)
Longitudinal adjustment 200 mm (7.87 in)
Backrest tilt adjustment 60° forward, 20° rearward
Armrest angle adjustment 110° upward from horizontal
Backrest extension (optional equipment) 250 mm (9.84 in)
Seat cushion adjustment 60 mm (2.36 in)
Seat cushion angle 10° upward from horizontal
Upholstery Fire resistant
Lap type seat belt with reel Yes
Operator weight range 45 kg (100 lb) to 136 kg (300 lb)
Specifications
330 Hydraulic system
Hydraulic system
Type Load sensing, closed-centre, proportional demand flow
Implement and steering pump (main pump) Working hydraulics
Maximum pressure setting 20.7 MPa (207 bar) (3000 psi)
Standby pressure 2.4 MPa (24 bar) (350 psi)
Secondary steering pump Steering system

Maximum pressure setting 7 MPa (75 bar) (1078 psi)
Fan pump Engine cooling system

Maximum pressure setting 17.2 MPa (172.3 bar) (2500 psi)
All wheel drive (AWD) pumps (2) All Wheel Drive system
Maximum pressure setting 34 MPa (345 bar) (5000 psi)
Minimum pressure setting 3.4 MPa (34 bar) (500 psi)
Specifications
Machine weights 331
Machine weights
Basic weights
Model Total weight On front wheels On rear wheels
G930 15,650 kg (34,503 lb) 4,695 kg (10,351 lb) 10,955 kg (24,152 lb)
G940 16,250 kg (35,825 lb) 4,712 kg (10,388 lb) 11,538 kg (25,437 lb)
G946 17,150 kg (37,809 lb) 4,974 kg (10,966 lb) 12,176 kg (26,843 lb)
G960 17,550 kg (38,691 lb) 5,100 kg (11,244 lb) 12,450 kg (27,448 lb)
G970 18,900 kg (41,667 lb) 5,300 kg (11,684 lb) 13,600 kg (29,983 lb)
G976 19,800 kg (43,651 lb) 5,600 kg (12,346 lb) 14,200 kg (31,306 lb)
G990 22,100 kg (48,722 lb) 6,200 kg (13,669 lb) 15,900 kg (35,053 lb)
Maximum allowable operating weight

Maximum allowable operating weights are the weights based on
approved attachments.
Model Total machine weight On front wheels On rear wheels

G930 19,278 kg (42,500 lb) 7,575 kg (16,700 lb) 14,243 kg (31,400 lb)
G940 21,319 kg (47,000 lb) 7,575 kg (16,700 lb) 14,243 kg (31,400 lb)
G946 21,772 kg (48,000 lb) 7,575 kg (16,700 lb) 14,243 kg (31,400 lb)
G960 21,863 kg (48,200 lb) 7,575 kg (16,700 lb) 14,288 kg (31,500 lb)
G970 22,680 kg (50,000 lb) 8,391 kg (18,499 lb) 15,468 kg (34,100 lb)
G976 23,360 kg (51,500 lb) 8,391 kg (18,499 lb) 15,876 kg (35,001 lb)
G990 27,200 kg (59.966 lb) 8,391 kg (18,499 lb) 19,051 kg (42,000 lb)
NOTE!
The weights shown for front and rear axles are the maximum
permitted.
In no case shall the combined weights of the axles exceed the
total weight for the machine.
NOTE!
It is the customer’s responsibility to ensure that the machine is
equipped with tires suitable for the loads as equipped. Consult
the tire supplier for more information.
Specifications
332 Dimensions
Dimensions
Dimensions are shown for machines with standard
size tires and ROPS cab.
Model
Dimension G930 G940 G946 G960 G970 G976 G990
H1 Overall height 3460 mm 3460 mm 3460 mm 3460 mm 3460 mm 3460 mm 3505 mm
(full cab) (136 in) (136 in) (136 in) (136 in) (136 in) (136 in) (138 in)
(LP cab) (127 in) (127 in) (127 in) (127 in) (127 in) (127 in) (129 in)
(split cab) (102 in) (102 in) (102 in) (102 in) (102 in) (102 in) (105 in)
L1 Overall length 8928 mm 9150 mm 9150 mm 9150 mm 9500 mm 9500 mm 9500 mm
(353 in) (361 in) (361 in) (361 in) (374 in) (374 in) (374 in)
L2 Wheelbase 6280 mm 6280 mm 6280 mm 6280 mm 6531 mm 6531 mm 6531 mm
(247 in) (247 in) (247 in) (247 in) (257 in) (257 in) (257 in)
L3 Rear overhang 1380 mm 1507 mm 1507 mm 1507 mm 1600 mm 1600 mm 1600 mm
(54 in) (59 in) (59 in) (59 in) (63 in) (63 in) (63 in)
L4 Tandem centre 1542 mm 1542 mm 1542 mm 1542 mm 1546 mm 1546 mm 1673 mm
distance (60.7 in) (60.7 in) (60.7 in) (60.7 in) (60.9 in) (60.9 in) (66 in)
L5 Bladebase 1673 mm 2650 mm 2650 mm 2650 mm 2790 mm 2790 mm 2935 mm
(66 in) (104 in) (104 in) (104 in) (110 in) (110 in) (116 in)
W1 Overall width 2525 mm 2525 mm 2525 mm 2525 mm 2780 mm 2780 mm 2800 mm
(std. tires) (100 in) (100 in) (100 in) (100 in) (110 in) (110 in) (110 in.
W2 Front track 2076 mm 2076 mm 2076 mm 2076 mm 2239 mm 2239 mm 2340 mm
width (82 in) (82 in) (82 in) (82 in) (88 in) (88 in) (92 in)
W3 Rear track 2139 mm 2139 mm 2139 mm 2139 mm 2239 mm 2239 mm 2340 mm
width (84 in) (84 in) (84 in) (84 in) (88 in) (88 in) (92 in)
W4 Blade length 3658 mm 3658 mm 3658 mm 3658 mm 3658 mm 3658 mm 4267 mm
(standard) (144 in) (144 in) (144 in) (144 in) (144 in) (144 in) (168 in)
Specifications
Service history 333
Service history
Service 100 hours Type of service Signature and stamp
Date Hours 100 hours inspection

Date Hours Service and maintenance

Date Hours 1000 hours inspection







Specifications
334 Service history










Specifications
Service history 335

Alphabetical index
337
Alphabetical index
EU's EMC directive............................................................. 19
F
Fire prevention.................................................................. 237
A
FOPS and ROPS................................................................ 11
Additional Icons...................................................................13
Frame....................................................................................8
Air conditioning..................................................................287
Fuel................................................................................... 314
All Wheel Drive hydraulic system......................................282
Fuel system...............................................................256, 314
Arrival and delivery inspection.......................................... 245
Attachments................................................................ 12, 207 G
Attachments, connecting and disconnecting.....................208 Gear shifting..............................................................141, 151
Attachments, installing...................................................... 209 General information...........................................................307
Attachments, maintenance................................................292 General inspection of machine..........................................248
Auxiliary function, description............................................102 Greasing............................................................................301
Axles................................................................................. 276 Guidelines for installation of mobile telephone....................21
Guidelines for installing antenna......................................... 21
B
Batteries............................................................................ 269 H
Batteries, rules.................................................................. 269 Handling hazardous materials...........................................241
Battery disconnect switch..................................................269 Headlights, adjusting.........................................................273
Battery storage..................................................................273 High voltage overhead power line.....................................202
Battery, charging............................................................... 271 Hydraulic oil.......................................................................311
Bearings, greasing ........................................................... 301 Hydraulic system.................................................11, 289, 330
Before service, read.......................................................... 233 I
Bolted joints, checking...................................................... 248 Information and warning decals.......................................... 24
Brake.................................................................................325 Instrument panel, centre..................................................... 34
Brake system.............................................................. 10, 278 Instrument panel, pedestal..................................................65
Braking.............................................................................. 168 Instrument panel, rear......................................................... 79
Brightness screen............................................................... 56 Instrument panel, side.........................................................73
C Instruments and controls, overview.......................................9
Cab......................................................................11, 284, 328 Intended use......................................................................... 7
Cab's emergency exits........................................................ 11 International symbols.......................................................... 13
CareTrack........................................................................... 13 J
CE-marking, EMC-directive.................................................19 Joystick ECU, description................................................... 10
Change the engine oil filter............................................... 252
Check engine oil level....................................................... 251 L
Circle................................................................................. 296 Language selection screen................................................. 64
Circle and drawbar, overview............................................298 Lap type seat belt, checking and maintenance................. 248
Cleaning engine compartment.......................................... 247 Layout screen......................................................................58
Cleaning machine............................................................. 246 Lifting machine.................................................................. 178
Climate control system......................................................118 Loading on to a vehicle..................................................... 177
Climate control system, adjusting..................................... 118 Logged machine data..........................................................13
Communication equipment, installation.............................. 21 Lubricant........................................................................... 312
Control levers, description...................................................84 Lubrication and service chart.................................... 302, 303
Controls...............................................................................82 M
Coolant..............................................................................267 Machine.................................................................................7
Cooling system..................................................................263 Machine specific symbols................................................... 13
D Machine view...................................................................... 17
Danger zone......................................................................122 Machine weights............................................................... 331
Decal locations..............................................................25, 26 Maintenance service, every 10 hours............................... 303
Declaration of Conformity....................................................20 Maintenance service, every 1000 hours........................... 305
Delivery Instructions..........................................................246 Maintenance service, every 1500 hours........................... 305
Description, All Wheel Drive system................................... 10 Maintenance service, every 2000 hours........................... 306
Differential locks................................................................163 Maintenance service, every 250 hours............................. 304
Dimensions....................................................................... 332 Maintenance service, every 50 hours............................... 304
Display text messages........................................................ 49 Maintenance service, every 500 hours............................. 305
Display unit..........................................................................40 Maintenance service, when required................................ 306
Display unit, dual joystick.................................................... 52 Measures before operating............................................... 137
Dozer blade.......................................................................224 Mid mount scarifier, installing............................................213
Dual joystick electronic hydraulic control............................ 91 Moldboard................................................................. 182, 292
E N
Electrical magnetic field (EMF)......................................... 203 North American decals........................................................27
Electrical system................................................... 9, 268, 319 O
Emergency braking........................................................... 170 Operator comfort............................................................... 103
Engine................................................................... 8, 251, 317 Operator seat.................................................................... 104
Engine air cleaner............................................................. 261 Operator's station.................................................................. 9
Engine oil change..............................................................254
Engine, specifications (G930)........................................... 318 P
Engine, specifications (G940)........................................... 317 Parallel lift attachment frame kit, installing........................ 209
Engine, specifications (G946,G960)................................. 317 Park brake switch..................................................71, 83, 169
Engine, specifications (G970)........................................... 318 Parking.............................................................................. 172
Engine, specifications (G976,G990)................................. 317 Parking brake.............................................................. 10, 169
Environmental requirements................................................. 7 Parking brake, description.................................................280
Equipment........................................................................... 12 Parking brake, manual override........................................ 281
Parking brake, test............................................................ 280
Alphabetical index
338
Periodic replacement of critical parts for safety................ 136 Wheels...................................................................... 282, 327
Preventive maintenance guidelines.................................. 244 Whole-body vibrations.......................................................201
Product identification number..............................................23 Windscreen wiper system................................................. 286
Product identification plates................................................ 22 Working in cold weather....................................................206
Product plates..................................................................... 22 Working in water and on boggy ground............................ 205
Profile screen...................................................................... 57 Working on slopes.............................................................204
Protection against electromagnetic interference................. 21 Working within dangerous areas.......................................202
R
Rear axle and tandem.........................................................10
Recommended lubricants................................................. 307
Retrieving and towing........................................................174
Ripper................................................................................228
Ripper, installing................................................................219
Road construction............................................................. 191
Running-in instructions......................................................121
S
Safety during maintenance............................................... 131
Safety rules when operating..............................................122
Safety when boost starting................................................129
Safety when handling hazardous materials...................... 135
Safety when operating...................................................... 125
Safety when operating on public roads............................. 131
Safety when starting..........................................................125
Safety when stopping........................................................129
Safety when transporting, towing and roading.................. 130
Safety when welding......................................................... 134
Safety when working in dangerous areas......................... 125
Safety, general.................................................................. 122
Scarifier............................................................................. 225
Seat belt............................................................................ 116
Service brake.................................................................... 168
Service brake pedal, free play adjustment........................ 279
Service brakes warning system, checking........................ 278
Service brakes, adjustment...............................................280
Service brakes, daily test.................................................. 279
Service capacities and change intervals........................... 315
Service history...........................................................245, 333
Service points....................................................................249
Service position.................................................................232
Service positions............................................................... 232
Service Programme.......................................................... 246
Signalling diagram.............................................................230
Speed screen...................................................................... 56
Starting engine.................................................................. 138
Starting with booster batteries...........................................271
Steering.....................................................................164, 326
Steering wheel, adjusting.................................................. 117
Stopping............................................................................ 171
Symbol key........................................................................302
System information screen..................................................60
System tools screens.......................................................... 54
T
Tandems........................................................................... 277
Temperature, ambient air..................................................137
Touch-up painting............................................................. 247
Transmission.......................................................10, 274, 324
Transporting machine....................................................... 177
Travelling on public roads................................................. 136
Troubleshooting screens.....................................................61
Turbocharger.....................................................................260
Turbocharger, inspection.................................................. 260
Turning the machine......................................................... 181
Tying down machine......................................................... 177
Tyres, checking air pressure............................................. 282
U
Underground cables and pipes......................................... 203
USA federal clean air act.................................................... 30
V Ref. No. 20036077-A English
VHP (Variable Horsepower)..................................................8 Volvo, Eskilstuna
W
Washer reservoir...............................................................286
Wheel bolts, checking tightening.......................................282
Ref. No. 20036078B English
2013.05
Volvo, Shippensburg

eng-GB20036078B H

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

eng-GB20036078B H

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

OPERATOR'S MANUAL

Foreword OPERATOR'S MANUAL

Safety when servicing

Service and maintenance

Ref. No. 20036078-B

Manufacturer Volvo Construction Equipment

Please send comments about the Operator’s Manual to om@volvo.com

VHP (Variable Horsepower)

Joystick ECU, description

The joystick steering major components consist of two joysticks,

Rear axle and tandem

Description, All Wheel Drive system

Cab's emergency exits

FOPS and ROPS

Logged machine data

Machine specific symbols

Plus (positive) Volume empty

Minus (negative) Volume half full

Horn Volume full

Battery condition Grease

Hourmeter Oil lubrication point

Lift point Engine oil temperature

Jack or support point Engine coolant

Filling or emptying Engine coolant level

Read Operator's Manual Coolant temperature

Engine oil Engine rotations (rpm)

Engine oil pressure Gas inject (cold start)

Engine oil pressure – failure Engine air filter

Engine oil filter Fan belt – failure

Emergency engine stop Reverse direction

Engine start Parking brake

Engine on/run Brake on

Start switch Brake off

Transmission Primer (start aid)

Transmission oil level Hydraulic oil

High gear Hydraulic oil pressure

Low gear Hydraulic oil level

Forward direction Hydraulic oil filter

Hydraulic oil temperature Control lever – multi-direction

Diesel fuel Clockwise rotation

Fuel filter Engine electrical preheat

Work light Fast speed

Flashing beacon Slow speed

Control lever – dual direction

1 Operator's cab 12 Battery disconnect switch

EU's EMC directive

EC Declaration of Conformity for Machinery (IIA)

Protection against electromagnetic

Guidelines for installation of mobile telephone

Guidelines for installing antenna

Product identification plates

Product identification plates

1 Engine 5 Product plate for TUV (Germany)

Product identification number

Information and warning decals

Item Decal Quantity Location

Item Decal Quantity Location

2 WARNING! Jumper cables alert. Read Operator's Manual.

3 WARNING! Battery information, corrosion and explosion

4 WARNING! Read Operator's Manual first.

6 WARNING! Crush zone. Keep clear of moldboard.

7 WARNING! Pressurized accumulators. Read Operator's

8 WARNING! Rotating components. Keep clear.